Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................ 27
4.1 Install IQSET ............................................................................................................................................. 27
4.1.1 Install the Software ......................................................................................................................... 27
4.1.2 License IQSET ................................................................................................................................ 28
4.1.3 Set up Users .................................................................................................................................... 30
4.1.4 Install the BACnet Network Driver ................................................................................................ 32
4.1.5 Install the USB Driver .................................................................................................................... 33
4.1.6 Install the LCI/USB Driver ............................................................................................................. 34
4.1.7 Customise IQSET ........................................................................................................................... 35
4.1.8 Connect to the IQ Network ............................................................................................................. 35
4.1.9 Connect to the BACnet Network .................................................................................................... 35
4.2 Transfer the Licence to a Different Location ............................................................................................. 35
INDEX...................................................................................................................................................................... 739
3 ABOUT IQSET
IQSET is a Windows® based tool providing a graphical method of configuring the strategy within an IQ controller.
It simplifies the task of engineering a Trend system. Whether a site with large numbers of controllers covering a wide
area, or a stand-alone controller, is being engineered, IQSET has the tools required to make life easier. It provides a
powerful way to create IQ control strategies and support documentation. IQSET’s method of constructing strategies
as strategy diagrams allows both data files (IQ4, IQ3, IQECO, LDF, and IQ2) and printable documentation to be
produced.
Its graphical representation of the strategy makes the strategy easy to follow, and plant views allow the strategy to be
selected by HVAC equipment rather than by controller. Common pieces of strategy can be stored, and used again and
again, not only in one controller, but also in other controllers or projects, using the strategy block concept.
IQSET understands controllers, automatically using standards for module inputs and outputs, automatically placing
modules in the sequence table, and prompting for essential information. The use of projects means that all information
relating to a site or job is automatically organised, saving time searching for the right file.
During the creation of a strategy, IQSET keeps track of module number, and sequence steps used automatically
assigning the next module and sequence step as modules are added. IQSET also uses the standard source and
destinations for individual modules. These parameters can be manually adjusted, but normally this will not be
necessary. IQSET also allows event driven strategy and fast sequencing of modules to be quickly set up. When
defining the links between modules, IQSET uses its understanding of Trend system devices to determine whether the
link is valid, if it is not, IQSET will not allow the link to be made.
The graphical representation of the strategy, used when creating and editing, consists of strategy pages. Strategy can
be linked across these pages using connectives, enabling even the most complex strategies to be created. IQSET
enables the module's parameters displayed on the screen to be specified. Intelligent routing of links between modules
ensures that the links do not run over the top of modules, allowing modules to be moved around on the screen without
having to re-route the module links.
IQSET knows where each device is on the system, and with which strategy it is associated. This means that it can
download strategy to the correct controller without having to be told where it is.
Sensor definitions speed up the definition of sensor type modules. IQSET allows new sensor definitions to be created
if the types of sensors being used do not match those already shipped with IQSET.
Icon Description
Group of Strategy Pages
IQ1 Series Controller
IQ2 Series Controller
IQ3 Series Controller
NTD (Non-Trend Device)
LAN
Icon Description
BACnet LAN
Site
Strategy Page
Plant View
The Plant View enables the strategy within controllers to be located by HVAC equipment type. Once set up the
structure of the Plant View can be used to create display modules and directory modules. Icons indicate the type of
object.
Icon Description
Plant Directory
Strategy Page
3.1.5 Search Library
The Search Library displays a list of the strategy blocks that match the specified search criteria. It is divided into
three separate areas:
Search Area
The Search Area enables the search criteria to be specified.
Strategy Blocks Area
The Strategy Blocks Area contains list of the strategy blocks and solutions that match the specified search criteria. It
is divided into two columns:
Column Description
The name of the strategy block. Icons indicate the type of controller the strategy block or solution can
be used in.
- Standard solution
Block - Strategy block for an IQ4 controller
Name - Strategy block for an IQ3 controller
- Strategy block for a pre IQ3 controller
- Strategy block for an IQECO controller
- Strategy block for an unknown controller type, normally an old strategy block
Type Indicates the library that contains the strategy block, can be Custom, Standard, or Old.
Description Area
The Description Area contains a description of the selected strategy block or solution.
3.1.6 Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the display. It provides information about what IQSET is currently doing,
number of free modules, the number of free log points, free external I/O points, free brIQs, LAN and network address
of the controller, the page number, module position, and the current time.
Location Description
Address The network address of the selected controller.
Indicates the status of the current connection.
- vCNC link Authenticated and Encrypted
Connection - vCNC link Unauthenticated
Indicator - vCNC link Unauthenticated and Unencrypted
- vCNC link Disconnected
XXXXXXX- connected to SIMIQ
The number of free brIQs available in the current controller (if applicable). It provides an indication
Free brIQs
of the amount of memory left in the controller for strategy.
Location Description
Free External The number of free brIQs (if applicable), free I/O points on external I/O modules (if applicable)
I/O points available in the current controller.
The number of free log points available in the current controller (if applicable). This provides an
Free Log points indication of the amount of memory left in the controller for logging data. The number of log points
is displayed in red if there are not enough for the number of plot modules added to the strategy.
The number of modules available to be added to the strategy. Only available for IQECO controllers.
Free Modules
An error message is displayed when the maximum number of modules is exceeded.
LAN number The LAN number displays the LAN number of the selected controller.
Free Seq. Steps The number of free sequence steps in the strategy.
The co-ordinates of the top left corner of the selected module If more than one module is elected the
Module Co- co-ordinates are those of the top left corner of the current module. When the 'C' letter precedes the
ordinates co-ordinates, this indicates the cursor position. When the cursor is over a module the letter changes
to an ‘M’ and the value indicates the modules upper left position.
Information about the status of communications in and out of the node connecting IQSET to the
Network
Trend network. The indicators flash green when IQSET is receiving, or transmitting information. If
Comms Status
they appear grey, IQSET has been unable to locate the CNC. Clicking on the indicators displays the
Lights
Communications Window.
Page Number The number of the current strategy page.
Remote The status of any remote connection devices on the system. If grey, all the devices are available for
Connection use, if red, at least one of them is attempting to make a connection, and if green, at least one is
Indicator connected. Clicking on this icon displays the Remote Connection Window.
Note: The exact combination of these parameters depends on the controller type.
3.1.7 Strategy Library
The Strategy Library displays the reusable pieces of strategy (strategy blocks) and reusable strategies (solutions)
that have been created, and enables them to be used. It is divided into four separate areas:
Description Area
The Description Area contains a description of the selected strategy block or solution.
Strategy Blocks Area
Strategy Blocks Area contains the strategy blocks. It is organised into three different areas Custom Block Area,
Standard Block Area, and Old Block Area.
The Custom Block Area contains strategy blocks that you have set up, the Standard Block Area contains standard
strategy blocks that are supplied with IQSET, and the Old Block Area contains strategy blocks created with an earlier
version of IQSET. Strategy blocks in the Standard Block Area cannot be changed or deleted. Strategy blocks in the
Old Block Area can be deleted, or moved to the Custom Block Area. Icons indicate what the item is.
Icon Description
Standard Block Area
Custom Block Area
Old Block Area
Strategy block group
Old strategy block group
Strategy block sub group
Strategy block for an IQ4 controller
Strategy block for an IQ3 controller
Strategy block for a pre IQ3 controller
Strategy block for an IQECO controller
Strategy block for an unknown controller type, normally an old strategy block
Strategy Block Page
Solutions Area
The Solutions Area contains the solutions. It is organised into two different areas Custom Solution Area, and
Standard Solution Area.
Icon Description
Standard Solution Area
Custom Solution Area
Solution block group
Solution sub group
Standard solution
Custom solution
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons that enables the Strategy Library to be searched, or filtered.
Icon Description
Displays the Search Library, which enables the library of plant blocks to be searched
Enables the list of strategy blocks to be filtered
Refreshes the contents of the Strategy Library
Enables the strategy blocks and solutions to be printed
Enables the strategy blocks to be translated
Exports strategy blocks and solutions
Imports strategy blocks and solutions
3.1.8 System View
The System View displays the connections that are currently available, any sites, and user nodes that have been added,
and enables them to be browsed, and any relevant tasks performed. It is divided into two different areas:
Sites Area
The Sites Area contains a list of the sites that have been added, and the structure of those sites right down to the
individual modules in a tree structure. Right clicking on an object in the tree enables you to perform a task such as
enter a text comms session with the device, display a graph, or adjust a value. This tasks that can be carried out depend
on the device type. Icons indicate the type of object.
Icon Description
921 Supervisor
940 Supervisor
942 Supervisor
943 Supervisor
945 Supervisor
963 Supervisor, 962 Supervisor, S2 Supervisor, or ViewPoint
IQView
NDP
TCC Application
Trend X Application
Unknown Supervisor
ANC
BACnet device
BINC
CNC
EINC
FNC
Foreign device
Icon Description
IQ EYE Collector
ID200
INC
IQ1 Series Controller
IQ2 Series Controller
IQ3 Series Controller
IQ3 Series Controller on BACnet network
IQ4 Series Controller
IQECO Controller
IQL Series Controller
LERN
LINC
LONC
MNC
PNC
TOPS
TOPS BACnet Device
TOPS Logic 1Device
TOPS Unknown Device
Unknown Device
Unknown Internetwork Device
Virtual INC inside a device on LON
XNC
BACnet Site
BACnet Network
Foreign Site
Foreign LAN or network
Trend Site
Trend Internetwork
Trend LAN
Address modules
Alarm Destination modules
Alarm Group modules
Alarm Route modules
Analogue Node modules
Calendar modules
Core of a controller that has not yet been discovered
Critical Alarm modules
Digital Input modules
Digital node modules
Directory modules
Display modules
Driver modules
Function modules
Icon Description
IC Comms modules
Knob modules
Logic modules
Loop modules
Module Parameter
Non-Trend Device in TOPS
OSS modules
Page modules
Plot modules
Schedule Offset modules
Sensor modules
Sensor Type modules
Sequence Step modules
Switch Modules
Time modules
Time Schedule modules
Unknown Module
Unknown Module Family
User modules
A cross over the top of the icon indicates a problem, a black cross means that the comms have failed, and a grey cross
indicates that the value is old (value initialised from file).
Information from a site can be displayed by drilling down thorough the site to the required level. Once displayed,
information can be updated, and devices edited etc. depending on the functions available.
The values of parameters, and the network structure are learnt when the structure is refreshed. Learnt structures can
be saved enabling them to be viewed again quickly without the need for IQSET to communicate over the network. If
up to-date information is required, then just the part of the system containing that information can be refreshed,
reducing unnecessary communications and network traffic.
Objects (internetworks, LANs, devices, modules, and module parameters) can be removed from the site, preventing
them being accessed by the applets. The Sites section is available to all user roles, and provides the best way of finding
out about the system.
Each site specifies the name of the site, and the connection that is to be used to access the Trend network or devices
referred to by the site name. It is recommended that the site name describes the Trend network or Device that is being
accessed e.g. Albery House refers to the Trend network in Albery House, and the connection specified is the one that
will most often be used to connect to that site. For example, it may be possible to dial into the site, but you would
normally connect directly to the site over the company IT networks. In this case, you should add two connections, one
for the TCP/IP connection and another for the autodialled connection. When the site is created the TCP/IP connection
should be specified for the site, although if you need to access the site by autodialling, the sites connection can be
changed accordingly.
User Nodes Area
The User Nodes Area contains all the user nodes that have been added to the System View. User nodes are shortcuts
to items already in the System View and allow a user-defined structure to be created (to allow faster access to regularly
used parts of the system). Icons indicate the item type.
Icon Description
User Nodes
User Parameter
There is no limit to the number of user nodes that can be added. Each user node can contain other user nodes, or user
parameters. Access to user nodes (and some user parameters) can be restricted to specific user roles to prevent
unauthorised accessed and reduce confusion to lower-level users.
The structure above shows user nodes accessing information from two different sites Albery House and Foundry Lane.
The information inside the Temperatures user node comes from different controllers. The structure has been designed
to enable quick access to the required information.
Note: Structures displaying user parameters referring to parameters in different sites may be grouped together under
one user node.
The user node controls the refresh of data in the user nodes. A user node has two parameters relating to data refresh.
The first is the Refresh is active parameter that determines whether the data is refreshed at all. By default, this setting
is OFF, which allows any communications traffic to be kept to a minimum. The second is the Refresh interval, which
specifies the interval between refreshes, if refreshing is active. The data can be refreshed manually if required.
In addition to user parameters a user node may have a reference to any system node (site, LAN, device, etc.) as a child
to enable favourite structures to be built.
3.1.9 Toolbars
IQSET has several toolbars that provide easy access to IQSET's functions. Individual toolbars can be
hidden/displayed, and positioned as required. For more details of the individual toolbars and their commands.
4 INSTALLATION
This section describes how IQSET should be installed to ensure that it operates correctly, and how to upgrade from a
previous version. Before installing, or upgrading ensure that the PC meets the system requirements see the IQSET
Data Sheet (TA200131).
Installing IQSET with 963
IQSET and 963 can be installed, and run on the same PC. However, if running both only one will be able to
communicate with a BACnet network. The rule is:
IQSET v6.2 or greater with the BACnet Network driver installed and TOPS (required for 963 BACnet
communications) cannot run on the same PC at the same time.
Both 963 and IQSET will start and stop their respective BACnet driver when they are opened and closed. Running
one at a time does not cause a problem. However, if both are to be run at the same time the one that is run first will be
able to communicate over BACnet and the other will not. It is possible for 963's BACnet communication service
(TOPS) to run on a different PC to 963 if this is the case then both 963 and IQSET can run on the same PC, and both
can access BACnet devices.
Securing IQSET
To maximise the security of the IQSET - refer to Securing IQSET, and the Security Best Practice for Trend Products
Information Sheet (TP201331).
4.1 Install IQSET
To install IQSET follow the procedure described below:
1. Install the software
2. License IQSET
3. Set up IQSET users
4. Install the BACnet network driver (if required)
5. Install the LCI/USB Driver (if required)
6. Customise IQSET (if required)
7. Connect to the Trend network
8. Connect to the BACnet network (if required)
9. Secure IQSET
Note: The installation of IQSET on a virtual machine is not supported.
Note: Ensure that any firewalls between IQSET and controllers to which strategy is to be uploaded/downloaded are
configured to allow FTP.
4.1.1 Install the Software
The installation of IQSET is performed by a step-by-step installation program.
To install the software:
1. Ensure that IQSET is not running, and close all programs (including virus protection applications).
2. Download the IQSET installation.
3. Run the IQSET install. The installation screen is displayed.
Note: If the PC has an active Ethernet connection, but does not have access to the internet IQSET may take
a long time to install. If this occurs remove the network cable, or disable the PC's wireless connection to
close the Ethernet connection.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: In some cases, when using a very high resolution monitor, it may be necessary to adjust the custom text size.
4.1.1.1 Upgrade from a Previous Version
If a previous version of IQSET is already installed on the PC, it can be upgraded to the latest version. If upgrading
IQSET using a service pack supplied on disk, or downloaded from our web site, you should follow the instructions
provided with the service pack.
To upgrade from a previous version:
1. Ensure that IQSET is not running, and close all programs (including virus protection applications).
2. Download the IQSET installation.
3. Run the IQSET install. The installation screen is displayed.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: IQSET may display a Bridging button if upgrading from 6.91 or earlier, and not all the fields are
available for all products.
2. Click to copy the site code on to the clipboard or make a note of it.
Note: Some software will display a Trial button and SET may display a Bridging button if upgrading from
6.91 or earlier, and not all the fields are available for all products.
3. In the Company Name box enter your company name.
4. In the User Name box enter your name (not required for all products and license types).
5. In the Building Name box enter the name of the building (not required for all products and license types).
6. In the Serial Number box enter the serial number (not required for all products and license types).
7. In the Site Key box enter the supplied site key.
8. If a licence file was received specify the licence file (not required for all products and license types).
Copy the licence file to the PC running the software that is to be licensed.
Click . The Open dialogue box is displayed.
Navigate to the location the licence file has been copied to.
6. Enter the name for the user in the Enter User Name box. Only characters a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9 or the space
character can be used accented characters are not supported.
5. In the Adapter box select the network adaptor that is to be used to communicate over BACnet.
6. Click OK.
7. Click on the virtual network (Port ID 2), and click Edit. The Virtual Port Properties dialogue box is
displayed. Remember the port ID you will need it when adding a BACnet site.
8. In the Network Number box enter a network number for IQSET on the BACnet network. This must be
different from any other physical or virtual network on the BACnet system.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK.
To change any of the settings specified during this procedure it is necessary to run 'baccfg.bat' from the 'c:\Program
Files\Cimetrics\BACstac v6.2d' directory which will display the Cimetrics BACstac Gateway v6d Port Table
dialogue box.
4.1.5 Install the USB Driver
The USB driver enables IQSET to connect to the Trend network over USB using a standard USB cable connected to
an IQECO or IQ4s engineering port.
On all supported operating systems, see the IQSET Data Sheet (TA200131), except Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro and
Windows 8 Enterprise the first time you connect the driver will be automatically installed. For windows 8 systems the
driver must be manually installed as described below.
To install the USB driver:
1. Go to \Program Files (x86)\Trend Control Systems\Support Files\IQ Drivers folder and run 'dpinst.exe' from
the appropriate sub folder. The User Account Control dialogue box is displayed.
4. Click Install. When the installation is complete the Device Driver Installation Wizard is displayed.
Note: IQSET may display a Bridging button if upgrading from 6.91 or earlier, and not all the fields are
available for all products.
3. If transferring the licence to a different PC connect the removable media that is to be used to transfer the
licence.
5. Click the location to which the licence is to be copied. If moving the licence to a different PC this is the
removable media. To create a new folder click Make New Folder.
6. Click OK. The following message is displayed, 'Transfer media 'Y:\' registered successfully'.
7. Click OK.
8. If transferring the licence to a different PC remove the removable media.
9. Run IQSET from the original location. IQSET's Licence Details dialogue box should be displayed, If it is
not displayed it can be displayed manually.
10. If transferring the licence to a different PC connect the removable media being used to transfer the licence.
11. Click Transfer Out. The Browse for Folder dialogue box is displayed.
12. Click the location specified in (5).
13. Click OK. A message is displayed, 'Licence has been transferred out to 'C:\Licence' successfully'.
Note: If the licence is being transferred to a shared network drive on a different PC you will be prompted for
the user name and password required to access it. Enter the user name a password and click OK.
14. Click OK. The licence will be moved to the specified location. IQSET is no longer licensed to run in that
location.
15. Run IQSET from the new location. IQSET's Licence Details dialogue box is displayed, If it is not displayed
it can be displayed manually.
16. If transferring the licence to a different PC connect the removable media being used to transfer the licence.
17. Click Transfer In. The Browse for Folder dialogue box is displayed.
18. Click the location where the licence has been stored in (13). Click OK. The following message is displayed,
'Licence has been transferred in from 'Y:\' successfully'.
Note: If the licence is being transferred from a shared network drive on a different PC you will be prompted
for the user name and password required to access it. Enter the user name a password and click OK.
19. Click OK. The licence will be moved to the new location. Software is now licensed to run in the new location.
5 SECURING IQSET
IQSET is a networked product and as such must have its security correctly configured to reduce the risk of
unauthorised access. For general information about securing Trend products see the General Security Best Practice
for Trend Products Information Sheet (TP201331).
Adopting normal installation and security best practice guidelines can mitigate the risk of a malicious IT attack from
a skilled and equipped IT individual.
5.1 Security Checklist
Project files included in disaster recovery plan
IQSET installation files included in disaster recovery plan
PC running latest version of supported operating system with all updates
PC running virus protection software
Latest version of IQSET being used
All system networks secured
Appropriate user accounts set up on PC
IQSET users configured as required
In addition to the actions described in the General Security Best Practice for Trend Products Information Sheet
(TP201331), the advice described in the following sections must be followed.
5.2 Developing a Security Program
Refer to the General Security Best Practice for Trend Products Information Sheet (TP201331).
5.3 Disaster Recovery Planning
When developing the disaster recovery plan ensure that it includes ALL data required to restore system operation.
You should ensure that the following folder is included:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\System Engineering Tool
5.4 Physical and Environmental Consideration
The PC running IQSET should, where possible, be secured against unauthorised physical access in accordance with
your company's IT policy.
5.5 Security Updates and Service Packs
Ensure the PC running IQSET has the latest operating system updates installed, and the latest version of IQSET is
being used.
Trend software is tested against the latest service packs and updates applicable at the time of release. For significant
operating system/service packs, please check the Trend Partner's web site (https://partners.trendcontrols.com) for
compatibility issues.
5.6 Virus Protection
Ensure the PC running IQSET is running virus protection software, and the virus definitions are kept up-to-date.
5.7 Network Planning and Security
Ethernet Network
If IQSET is to be connected to an Ethernet network, follow the guidelines in the General Security Best Practice for
Trend Products Information Sheet (TP201331).
It is recommended that the Ethernet network used by the BMS system is separated from the normal office network
using an air gap, or virtual private network. Physical access to the Ethernet network infrastructure must be restricted.
You must also ensure that the installation complies with your company’s IT policy.
The use of a Firewall and Intrusion Detection System (IDS) from a reputable provider of security products is
recommended. Follow best practice for the products chosen as well as any corporate IT policy where the installation
is made.
6 CUSTOMISE IQSET
This section describes how to change IQSET's preferences to suite your requirements.
6.1 Configure Security Options
IQSET's security options enable you to configure the following settings that make IQSET more secure.
Setting Description
Configuring autolock will cause IQSET to lock after a user defined period of inactivity. The user will
Autolock then be required to log back in. Enabling this feature will disable the remember my password feature. By
default autolock is enabled with a 15 minute timeout.
To configure the security options:
1. Run IQSET.
2. On the Tools menu click Security Options. The Security Options dialogue box is displayed.
3. Click Sensor, Digin, Knob, Units, Driver, Switch, or General to specify the list to which the label is to be
added. The required list will be displayed in the box below.
4. Click in the list at the point the label is to be added, and if necessary press ENTER to add a new line.
5. Enter the required label.
6. Click Exit.
3. Click Sensor, Digin, Knob, Units, Driver, Switch, or General to specify the list from which the label is to
be removed. The required list will be displayed in the box below.
4. Highlight the required label.
5. Right-click the highlighted label, and click Delete.
6. Click Exit.
The position of a label in the list can be changed by highlighting it, right-clicking and clicking Cut, and then right-
clicking in the list at the new position, and clicking Paste. This method can also be used to copy labels between lists.
4. In the Number box click an unused sensor type module, i.e. one identified just by a number in the list.
5. In the Sensor Part Number box enter the part number of the sensor.
6. In the Scaling Range box enter the range of the sensor.
7. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter the reference for the sensor. It is recommended that this reference
consist of the part number followed by the range (e.g. PIL/4).
8. Click Edit.
9. In the Scaling box click the scaling type. The dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate parameters to
be specified.
Option Description
This type of scaling must be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It allows a sensor’s
characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it
Characterise
interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear
scaling
characteristics. It is therefore recommended for use with all non-linear sensors providing the
controller has version 2.1 firmware or greater. It is also used for lookup function modules.
Option Description
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for sensors
Linear scaling providing either a voltage or current signal with a linear characteristic between the top and
bottom of the range.
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. Can be used instead of
linearise thermistor volts. It should be used for non-Trend sensors where the
resistance/temperature characteristic is known, as it requires entry of ohms against
Linearise temperature directly from the characteristic. It enables the linearisation points on the
thermistor ohms temperature scale to be individually chosen so that they can be closer together over a part of
the characteristic where the gradient is changing rapidly, and further apart where the gradient
changes only gradually. It is not recommended for use with Trend sensors (use Linearise
thermistor volts for these).
Linearise
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for
thermistor volts
thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised.
scaling
Linearise volts This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for
scaling thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised.
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It is not normally used; it is
Log scaling for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a logarithmic characteristic
between the top and bottom of range.
10. Enter the required values or click on the required options to specify the sensor's parameters. Clicking Refresh
will display a graph of the sensor’s characteristics as defined by the current parameters. This can be used at
any point to check how the sensor reading will be scaled.
11. Once the parameters are correctly specified, click Save to Library.
12. Repeat steps (5) to (12) to add the definitions for other sensors to the library.
13. Click Exit.
Note: When adding a definition to the library, the sensor type module you select will be assigned the parameters for
the definition that has just been created.
4. In the Unique Sensor Reference box click the required sensor definition.
5. Click Edit.
6. Click Delete From Library. A dialogue box is displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion; click Yes.
7. Repeat steps (4) to (6) to remove any other definitions from the library.
8. Click Exit.
3. In the Block Name box enter the name of the strategy block.
4. In the Controller Type box select the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used.
5. In the Firmware Ver box select the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be used.
6. In the Revision box enter the revision number of the strategy block.
7. In the Group box click the strategy block group to which the strategy block is to be added.
8. In the Sub Group box click strategy block sub group to which the strategy block is to be added.
9. In the Language box click the language used for the labels of sensors, digital inputs, knobs, switches and
drivers in the strategy block. If the required language is not available, it must be added.
10. In the Key Search box enter any keywords that can be used to search for the strategy block.
11. In the Details box enter a description of the strategy block.
12. If place holder questions are to be used specify the question(s) that are to be asked in the Question column
and the text to be replaced by the user's input in the Placeholder column.
Note: If the strategy contains Interface modules you will be prompted to specify the Network module when
the strategy block is used.
13. Click OK. The new strategy block is created, with a blank page ready for strategy to be added. The
background of the strategy page changes to .
Note: The strategy page is green to indicate that a strategy block is being edited.
14. Create the strategy for the strategy block. Additional pages can be created for strategy by clicking .
If placeholder questions are to be used add the text that is to be replaced in the required locations e.g. module
labels. The text to be replaced can be located in module labels, text on strategy pages, and page descriptions.
4. In the Block Name box enter the name of the strategy block.
5. In the Controller Type box select the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used.
6. In the Firmware Version box select the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be
used.
7. In the Revision box enter the revision number of the strategy block.
8. In the Group box click the strategy block group to which the strategy block is to be added.
9. In the Sub Group box click strategy block sub group to which the strategy block is to be added.
10. In the Language box click the language used for the labels of sensors, digital inputs, knobs, switches and
drivers in the strategy block. If the required language is not available, it must be added.
11. In the Key Search box enter any keywords that can be used to search for the strategy block.
12. In the Details box enter a description of the strategy block.
13. Click OK.
Note: Strategy blocks created using version of IQSET earlier than v6.0 are stored in the Old Library and can be
copied into the Custom Library. This enables old strategy blocks to be edited.
6.8.1.2.4 Duplicate a Strategy Block
To duplicate a strategy block:
1. Open a project.
2. Display the Strategy Library.
4. In the Block Name box enter the name of the strategy block.
5. In the Controller Type box select the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be used.
6. In the Firmware Version box select the firmware version of controller for which the strategy block is to be
used.
7. In the Revision box enter the revision number of the strategy block.
8. In the Group box click the strategy block group to which the strategy block is to be added.
9. In the Sub Group box click strategy block sub group to which the strategy block is to be added.
10. In the Language box click the language used for the labels of sensors, digital inputs, knobs, switches and
drivers in the strategy block. If the required language is not available, it must be added.
11. In the Key Search box enter any keywords that can be used to search for the strategy block.
12. In the Details box enter a description of the strategy block.
13. If place holder questions are to be used specify the question(s) that are to be asked in the Question column
and the text to be replaced by the user's input in the Placeholder column.
Note: If the strategy contains Interface modules you will be prompted to specify the Network module when the
strategy block is used.
14. Click OK.
6.8.1.2.5 Edit Strategy Block Strategy
The strategy used by a strategy block’s can be edited. It is only possible to edit the strategy blocks in the Custom
Library. To edit a strategy block in the Old Library it is necessary to copy it to the custom library.
To edit strategy block strategy:
1. Open a project.
2. Display the Strategy Library.
3. In the Custom Block Area, right-click the strategy block that is to be edited, and click Edit/View. The
strategy pages for the strategy block are loaded. The background of the strategy page changes to .
4. Click or to display the required page.
5. Edit the strategy.
6. Click to close the strategy page. A dialogue box is display asking if you want to save the changes.
7. Click Yes.
6.8.1.3 Set up Strategy Block Page Details
Strategy pages in a strategy block can be titled, and a text describing them added.
5. Check the Set Module Start check box. The text boxes in the Module Start area change so that the module
number can be edited.
6. Edit the module start numbers as required.
7. Click OK.
Note: If a language has not been defined for any of the selected strategy blocks an error is displayed and you
are given the option of specifying the language. Having done this return to step (1).
4. In the Current Language box click the language of the strategy block you want to translate from.
5. In the Translated Language box click the language the strategy block is to be translated into. If the required
language is not available, it must be added.
6. Double click in the Translated Label column for each label that is to be translated, and enter the translated
label. If a label is not to be included in the translation, select it and click Remove Label(s). If more than one
label is select all the selected labels will be removed.
7. Once all the labels have been translated click Save Changes.
If labels a strategy block has already been translated they can be imported.
6. If existing labels are to be overwritten with the one that are to be imported select the Override Existing
Labels check box.
7. Click Import. The Select translated labels File dialogue box is displayed.
8. In the folder list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the
drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file
is displayed.
5. Click Export. The Enter translated labels export name dialogue box is displayed.
6. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
7. Click Save.
5. In the folder list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the
drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file
is displayed.
6. Click Open. The file will be imported. If a strategy block or solution already exist IQSET asks if it should
be overwritten.
5. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
6. Click Save. A dialogue box is displayed when the process is complete.
3. In the Default Language box click the required language. If the required language is not in the list, click
Add Language and enter the new language in the displayed dialogue box. To delete a language select it in
the Default Language box, and click Delete Language.
Note: New languages can only be used for translation of strategy blocks, deleting a language will delete all
translation for that language. If the language you require for the strategy print labels does not exist, contact
Trend via your normal channel.
4. In the Default language box click the required language.
5. Click Exit.
Connection Description
Comm 1 [19200]
Connection using COM 1 at 19200 baud.
Connection
Comm 1 [9600]
Connection using COM 1 at 9600 baud.
Connection
Comm 2 [19200]
Connection using COM 2 at 19200 baud.
Connection
Comm 2 [9600]
Connection using COM 2 at 9600 baud.
Connection
TCP/IP connection using a device with an IP address of 0.0.0.0. With ports 10004, 10005,
TCP Connection
10006, 100057 available for connection.
If these are not suitable, additional ones can be added.
Note: For the connection to work the appropriate physical connections must have been made.
To specify a comms connection:
1. Run IQSET.
2. On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Default Comms Settings box click the required comms connection.
4. Click Exit.
3. In the Range area click the required option (IQ1, IQ2, IQECO, IQ3, or IQ4) to specify the required range.
4. To only show choices for controllers with node controller functionality select the Node Controllers check
box.
5. In the Device Type box click the device type to be used as the default.
6. In the Firmware Version box click the firmware version to be used as the default.
7. In the Hardware Variant box click the hardware variant of the IQ controller to be used as the default.
8. In the Options area select the required check box(s) to specify the options (e.g. BACnet) to be used as the
default.
Note: These options are only displayed if available with the option selected in the Firmware Version box.
9. In the Controller area click Set Default.
10. Repeat steps (3) to (9) for each controller range.
11. Click Cancel to close the Controller Selection dialogue box.
The default device type, firmware version, hardware variant, and options can be set for each controller range by
repeating the steps above for each of the different controller ranges.
4. In the Available Display Languages box click the language that is to be the default.
5. Click .
6. Click OK.
4. In the Display Language box click the language that is to be the default.
5. Click .
6. Click OK.
6.19 Specify the Default Display Options
The configuration parameters displayed on the strategy page for each different type of module is different. The default
for each type of module is for all the parameters that can appear on the page to be displayed. If required, the default
for each type of module can be changed.
To set up the default display options:
1. Open a project.
2. Display a strategy page that contains a module of the type for which the default display options are to be
changed.
3. Right-click a module of the type for which the default display options are to be changed, and click Edit
Parameters. The Parameters dialogue box for that module type is displayed.
4. Select the appropriate check boxes on the left of the dialogue box to specify the module parameters that are
to be displayed. Clicking will select all the check boxes, clicking will clear all the check boxes, and
clicking will return the display setting to the current defaults.
5. Click .
6. Click OK.
3. In the Print what area, select the appropriate check boxes to specify the default print options. To select all
options click Select All.
Option Description
Prints a list of the strategy pages using the page details as a title sorted in page
Contents
order.
Strategy Prints strategy pages.
Sensor List Prints a list of all the sensors in the strategy.
Digital Inputs List Prints a list of all the digital inputs in the strategy.
Knobs List Prints a list of all the knobs in the strategy.
Switch List Prints a list of all the switches in the strategy.
Drivers List Prints a list of all the drivers in the strategy.
Time Schedule List Prints a list of all the time zones in the strategy.
Sequence List Prints the sequence table.
Plots List Prints a list of all the plot modules in the strategy.
IC Comms List Prints a list of all the IC comms modules in the strategy.
Analogue Nodes Used
Pre IQ3 controllers only. Prints a list of all the analogue nodes in the strategy.
List
Digital Nodes Used List Pre IQ3 controllers only. Prints a list of all the digital nodes in the strategy.
Module Used List Prints a list of all the modules used in the strategy.
Sensor Types Prints a list of all the sensor type modules in the strategy.
Directory Modules List Prints a list of all the directory modules in the strategy.
Display Modules List Prints a list of all the display modules in the strategy.
Alarm Groups Prints a list of all the alarm group modules in the strategy.
XNC Interface Module
/XNC controllers only: Prints a list of the XNC interface module in the strategy.
List
Option Description
Prints a list of the strategy pages using the page details as a title sorted in alphabetic
Index
order.
4. Click Set Default.
5. Click OK.
6.21 Specify the Gap in the Sequence Table Between Pages
When a new page is created after existing pages using the New Page button ( ) or from the Project View, IQSET
automatically leaves a gap in the sequence table. This means that modules can be added to one page without the need
to change the sequence steps of modules on the next. This gap is NOT inserted when a page is inserted before another.
E.g. If the last sequence step on page 2 was 20, and the number of sequence steps between pages to be skipped was
10, when page 3 is created a gap of 10 sequence steps would be left. This would mean that the sequence step of the
first module on page 3 would be 31.
Note: This setting applies to all projects. The gap is only left when the page is created; as modules are added to the
previous page, the gap will get smaller.
To specify the gap in the sequence table between pages:
1. Open a project.
2. Display a strategy page.
3. Click , or on the Tools menu point to Sequence Steps and click Skip. The Sequence Steps to Skip
dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the box enter the number of sequence steps that are to be skipped between pages. Range 0 to 50.
5. Click OK.
3. In the Difference in Minutes box enter the required times difference in minutes.
4. Click Exit.
6.23 Specify the Toolbar Theme
The appearance of the toolbars can be changed by specifying a different theme.
To specify the toolbar theme:
1. Open a project.
2. On the View menu point to Theme and click the required theme.
4. In the Themes area click Edit next to the Directory box. The Directory Themes dialogue box is displayed.
5. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to access the module. This can be in the range (1 to 99). The
can be used to set the required value.
6. Specify default background colour for the page by clicking Background Colour, clicking Change to display
the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Directory Themes
dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box.
If a background colour is not required, clear the Background Colour check box.
7. In the Refresh Rate enter the default refresh rate in seconds.
8. Specify the size of the page. In the Width box enter the default width of the page in pixels, and in the Height
box enter default the height of the page in pixels. Alternatively, in the Page Size box click the default page
size.
9. Click OK to return to the Display and Directory Setup dialogue box.
4. In the Themes area click Edit next to the Display box. The Display Themes dialogue box is displayed.
5. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to view or use the module. This can be in the range (1 to
99). The can be used to set the required value.
6. Specify the default foreground colour for the item by clicking Foreground Colour, clicking Change to
display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling
dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box.
If a background colour is not required, clear the Foreground Colour check box.
7. Specify the default background colour for the item by clicking Background Colour, clicking Change to
display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling
dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box.
If a background colour is not required, clear the Background Colour check box.
Option Description
All Site Data All data in the System View will be saved.
No Data No information in the System View will be saved.
Site, LAN, and Controllers Only the basic LAN and controller structure of the site will be saved.
Site, LAN, and Controllers The basic LAN and controller structure of the site will be saved plus details of
and IO any I/O modules.
4. Click OK.
3. In the Name box click the printer. To set up the printer click Properties.
4. In the Size box click the paper size.
5. In the Source box click the paper source.
6. In the Orientation area click either the Portrait, or Landscape. Landscape is recommended.
7. Click OK.
6.28 Specify the Priority Array Labels
The default priority array label that is displayed on the driver module when in Live Values can be specified.
Note: Any labels that are left blank will appear as Level followed by the level number e.g. 'Level 3'.
To specify the priority array labels:
1. Run IQSET.
2. On the Tools menu click BACnet Options. The BACnet Options dialogue box is displayed.
3. Double click the label that is to be changed in the Label column and enter the new label (max 15-characters).
4. Click away from the label.
5. Click OK.
3. In the Refresh action area click the required option to specify the refresh action.
Option Description
Discover all sub node details Information about the selected node and nodes directly below it is discovered.
Discover types/Values of Information about the selected node is discovered along with the structure of
sub-nodes nodes directly below it.
Simple node discover Only information about the selected node is discovered.
4. In the Site Refresh action area click the required option to specify the site refresh action.
Option Description
Show internetwork Displays only an icon for the local LAN, and displays an icon for the internetwork (if
population available) along with the internetwork structure.
Show local lan Displays an icon for the local LAN along with its structure, there is no icon for the
population internetwork.
Show only basic site Displays only an icon for the local LAN, and one for the internetwork (if available).
structure The structure of the internetwork and local LAN is not discovered.
Note: The amount of information discovered about each of the devices displayed in the structure is
determined by the Refresh action.
5. Click OK.
3. To change the location of strategy blocks click Edit in the User Strategy Library Base Directory area. To
change the location of strategy blocks created in earlier version of IQSET click Edit in the Old Plant Block
Directory area. The Browse for Folder dialogue box is displayed.
4. Click the required directory. If necessary, use the scroll bars to move up/down the list. To create a new
directory, navigate to the required location and click Make New Folder.
5. Click OK to return to the SET Options dialogue box.
6. Click Exit.
3. In the Base Project Directory area click Edit. This displays the Browse for Folder dialogue box.
4. Click the required directory. If necessary, use the scroll bars to move up/down the list.
5. Click OK to return to the SET Options dialogue box.
6. Click Exit.
4. Click the check box next to each module type that will prompt for the module number and sequence step.
5. Click OK.
6.33 Specify Whether the Tracker Window Displayed
It is possible to specify whether the Tracker Window is displayed when IQSET is run.
To specify whether the Tracker Window is displayed:
1. Run IQSET.
2. On the Tools menu click ToolSET Options. The ToolSET Options dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Translated Language box click the language the print labels are to be translated into. If the required
language is not available, it must be added.
5. Double click in the Translated Label column for each label that is to be translated, and enter the translated
label.
6. Once all the labels have been translated click Save Changes.
Note: To use the translated labels you must set IQSET's default language to the required language.
4. Click Translate Print Labels. The Strategy Translate dialogue box is displayed.
5. If existing labels are to be overwritten with the one that are to be imported select the Override Existing
Labels check box.
7. In the folder list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the
drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file
is displayed.
8. Click Open. The labels will be imported. A dialogue box is displayed when the process is complete.
6.35.2 Export Translated Print Labels
If the print labels have already been translated they can be exported for use on another PC.
To export translated labels:
1. Connect the removable media that is to be used.
2. On the Tools menu click SET Options. The SET Options dialogue box is displayed.
4. Click Export. The Select translated labels File dialogue box is displayed.
5. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
6. Click Open.
6.36 Turn Auto Routing ON/OFF
IQSET will automatically route the links between modules around the items on the page. If required, automatic routing
can be switched ON or OFF as required.
To switch auto routing ON/OFF:
1. Open a project.
2. Display a strategy page.
3. Click , or on the Edit menu click Auto Routing.
3. Clear the Show Tips on StartUp check box to turn the tip of the day OFF, select it to turn tip of the day ON.
4. Click Close.
7 QUICK TOURS
The Quick Tours are designed to show you the many features of IQSET. By following the tours, you will learn the
basics of using IQSET to engineer a Trend system.
There are three tours:
The first Quick Tour 1 - The Basics: Shows you how to get started by creating a basic project, with simple
strategies, documenting it, and creating a file ready for downloading to the controller.
The second Quick Tour 2 - Beyond Basics: Shows you to use the more advanced features of IQSET, such
as strategy blocks, Display and Directory modules, connectives, and editing the sequence table.
The third Quick Tour 3 - Making IQSET Work for You: Shows you how to get the best out of IQSET by
creating your own strategy blocks, adding your own sensor definitions to the library, and using IQSET to
reverse engineer a controller.
If you require more information than that provided in the tours, the rest of this manual provides descriptions of all the
tasks that can be carried out using IQSET.
7.1 Quick Tour 1 - The Basics
This tour is a step-by-step tutorial that shows you how easy it is to use IQSET to engineer a Trend system. This tour
will show you how to create a simple project containing a single IQ controller, document it, and create an IQ4 file
ready for downloading to the controller.
Lesson 1- Creating an IQSET Project
In this lesson, you will learn how to run IQSET, and create a new project. You will also learn about the SET Window.
Starting IQSET
Creating a new IQSET Project
Understanding the SET Window
Lesson 2 - Adding a controller
In this lesson, you will learn how to add a LAN, and an IQ controller to the project.
Adding a LAN
Adding an IQ controller
Setting up the Address Module
Setting up the Ethernet IP Module
Setting up the Sensor Type Modules
Lesson 3 - Configuring the Strategy
In this lesson, you will learn how to add modules to the strategy, edit module parameters, link them together, and add
extra pages.
Adding Modules to the Strategy
Moving Modules
Editing Modules
Linking Modules
Adding Pages
Lesson 4 - Documenting the Strategy
In this lesson, you will learn how to control the version of the strategy, and print out a comprehensive report
documenting the strategy.
Defining the Strategy’s Issue
Printing Project Documentation
Lesson 5 - Creating a Downloadable File
In this lesson, you will learn how create a file for an individual IQ controller that can be downloaded to the controller
using IQSET or another tool.
Creating an IQ4 File
3. In the Project Name box enter SET Tours to specify the name of the project.
4. In the Project Number box enter 12345678 to specify the project number.
5. In the Client box enter My Company Ltd to specify the client of the project.
6. In the Project Details box enter IQ4 SET Tour Project to specify the project details.
7. In the Site Name box enter SET Tour Project to specify the human readable site code for devices in the
project.
Note that all devices in the project will be assigned the same human readable site code.
8. Check the machine-readable site code displayed in the Site GUID box. A new code can be generated by
clicking Change. For the purposes of this tour use the one generated.
Note: All devices in the project will be assigned the same machine-readable site code.
9. Click OK.
IQSET will now create the project. A directory with the name specified as the project name is created in the 'Set
Projects' directory. In this case a directory called 'IQ4 SET Tours' will be created.
Strategy Library
The Strategy Library displays the reusable pieces of strategy (strategy blocks) and reusable strategies
(solutions) that have been created, and enables them to be used.
Project View
The Project View displays information about the devices that have been added to the project, and the strategy
associated with them.
Display Area
The Display Area displays the information that has been requested. Items launched from IQSET are
displayed in this area as a separate window in their own tab. Windows in this area can be positioned as
required either manually by resizing, and moving or using the Tile command, or the Window Position
toolbar.
1. If the Project View is not displayed click to display it, and then in the Device View right-click SET
Tours and click Insert LAN. The Lan Details dialogue box is displayed.
2. In the Lan Number box enter 99 to specify the number of the LAN that is to be added.
3. In the Type box click Trend-IQ.
4. In the Label box enter SET Tours to define the label for the LAN.
5. In the Details box enter Contains controllers for the SET Tours to specify a description for the LAN.
6. Click OK. The LAN will be added to the Device View as shown.
7. In the Address box enter 24 to specify the network address of the controller.
The network address is the address of the controller on the Trend network, set on the controller’s address
switch. It can be set anywhere in the range 1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. Each address on a LAN
must be unique.
8. In the Name box enter SET Tours Controller 1 to specify the name for the controller.
The details entered about the project have been automatically entered in the Details box if required this can
be changed. For this tour leave it unchanged.
13. The Name box enable the name for the admin user to be specified. For the purposes of this tour leave it as
'Admin User'.
14. In the Password box enter Tour Admin to specify the user's password.
15. In the Pin box enter 1234 to specify the user's PIN.
16. Leave the other parameters at their default values and click OK. The Sensor Type dialogue box is displayed.
This enables the sensor type modules to be specified now, or later.
17. For the purposes of the tour click Exit to leave it until later.
IQSET will now add the new controller to the Device View, and display a blank strategy page.
You will notice that several of the parameters are greyed out this is because this information would normally
be set up using the IP Tool. If the Not Sent check box next to a parameter is selected the parameter will be
greyed out and not included in the strategy file when it is created. For the purposes of this tour we shall
assume that the following parameters have been set up using IP Tool: Identifier, Local LAN, Local Node,
and Supervisor Port Address.
2. In the Attribute F (2) box enter FLR4:*.
This is an optional 30-character label for the controller, which allows the controller to be identified, either
uniquely, or as part of a group. It is used in conjunction with the identifier, and the other attributes.
All the other parameters are set up in a similar way by entering the required value into dialogue box, or
making selections from the list. The rest of the parameters do not need to be specified for this tour.
3. Click OK. The dialogue box is closed.
You will notice that some of the parameters are greyed out this is because this information would normally
be set up using IP Tool. If the Not Sent check box next to a parameter is selected the parameter will be greyed
out and not be included in the data file.
2. In the LAN Label box enter SET Tours.
3. Clear the Not Sent check box and in the Addressing Mode box select Obtain Automatically, to set the
controller to obtain its Ethernet settings from a DHCP server.
All the other parameters are set up in a similar way by entering the required value into dialogue box, or
making selections from the list. The rest of the parameters do not need to be specified for this tour.
4. Click OK. The dialogue box is closed.
2. In the Number box click 001- to select the sensor type module that is to be set up.
3. In the Sensor Part Number box click TE/TS to select the sensor definition that is to be used for sensor type
module 1 from the library.
4. Click Apply. The parameters for the sensor to be used by the sensor type module are displayed on the right
of the dialogue box, and the characteristics are shown in the graph.
5. Complete the setup of the sensor type modules by specifying two other modules as shown.
Module No. Value
Module 2 AQ/D range 0 to 100
Module 3 H/DT/H range 0 to 95
6. Click Exit.
The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of sensors that can be selected.
Note: If required, the parameters of the sensor type modules can be defined individually without using definitions
from the library.
1. Click to display the Project View and double-click Os 024 - SET Tours Controller in the Device
View (the controller whose strategy to which the modules are to be added). The tree structure will be
expanded.
2. Double-click Strategy Pages to display a list of all the pages created for the controller so far. The structure
should appear as shown below.
3. Currently there is only one page (P02 - Default Users) double-click it.
Note: IQSET labels the first page 'Page 2' because although page 2 is the first true strategy page, page 1 is
the title page of the strategy documentation.
The first module that is to be added to the page is Sensor 1, an external sensor.
4. Click to display the Next Module List dialogue box The Next Module List dialogue box is displayed
which enables the sequence step for the next module that is to be added to the page to be specified.
8. In the Module Number box enter 1 and click OK. The cursor changes to a hand , and the module appears
on the screen.
9. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the
page. For now, just place the module anywhere. You will learn to move modules later in this lesson.
Note: The Parameters dialogue box for the module may be displayed. If this is the case, don’t worry, Auto
Edit is enabled; click OK to close the dialogue box.
10. Now add the modules listed in the table below to the page.
You can move between pages using the next and previous page buttons. Click to goto the previous page, or click
to goto the next page. Alternatively, you could double-click the required page from the Device View in the Project
View.
7.1.14 Lesson 4 - Defining the Strategy's Issue
Details about the strategy for a controller can be kept. They describe the current issue, and enable a description of the
changes made since the previous version to be recorded. These details are included on the strategy pages when they
are printed out.
Define the Strategy’s Issue:
1. Ensure that the page you have just created is displayed, and on the Device menu click Issue Details. The
Drawing Issue dialogue box is displayed.
2. This is the first issue of the strategy so click New to create a new issue. The issue number is incremented to
1. It is now necessary to specify any changes made, and any pages that were changed. Because this is the
first issue of the strategy, you will enter First Issue in both cases.
3. In the PCN/Details box enter First Issue.
4. In the Pages Affected box enter First Issue.
5. In the Date Approved box enter today’s date to specify the date the strategy was approved.
6. In the Approved box enter your name.
7. Click OK.
4. Click OK.
1. Click to display the Project View and double-click Os 024 - SET Tours Controller in the Device
View. The tree structure will be expanded.
2. Double-click Strategy Pages to display a list of all the pages created for the controller so far.
3. Double click p03 - Page: 3 to go to the second page.
4. Right-click anywhere on the page, point to Other and click on Connective. The Connectives dialogue box
is displayed.
The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to find
the required module.
All connectives
Knob connectives
Sensor connectives
All connectives
Switch connectives
Undefined connectives
System connectives
5. Click S1V Space Temperature. You may need to use the scroll bars to locate it.
6. Click Select. The cursor changes to a hand .
7. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed. Position it to the left of L2.
8. Click the left mouse button. A connective to output (V) of module S1 is added to the page.
9. Now add a connective to I1S Manual Override, and place it above the connective to S1 and a connective to
Z1V Occupation Time Schedule and place it at the bottom of the page.
10. Click Exit.
It is now necessary to link the connective to the module to which it is supplying an input.
11. Click the connective to S1V, and drag the mouse to link it to the P attribute of L2.
12. Now link the connective to I1S to the A attribute of L2, and the connective to Z1V to the S attribute of L2.
7.2.3 Lesson 1 - Linking to a Specific Value
IQSET allows you link directly to a specific value by using an Analogue Node module. For this tour, you will add
link the U attribute of L1 to a specific node with a value fixed at 10.
Linking to a specific value:
1. Click to go to the first page (P02 - Page: 2).
2. Right-click anywhere on the page, and point to Inputs and click Analogue Node. This places an analogue
node module on the page.
3. Double-click the module that has just been added. The Analogue Module Parameters dialogue box is
displayed.
4. In the Label box enter Loop 1 Unoccupied Setpoint to specify the label for the node.
5. In the Value box enter 10 to specify the value of the node.
6. Click OK.
7. Move the module to the left of L1.
It is now necessary to link the module to the module to which it is supplying an input.
8. Click the output (D) of the module, and drag the mouse to link it to the U attribute of L1.
9. Now add the following Analogue Node modules to the strategy, and link them.
5. Drag the mouse to the To connective. IQSET will display a green circle .
6. Release the mouse button.
The To connective will now indicate the connection between the output of I1, and the A attribute - Manual
Override of L2 on page 3.
7. Now add some more To connectives to page 2 to indicate the other links to modules on page 3.
Linked to Location
Output of S1 To the right of S1
Output of Z1 To the right of Z1
7.2.6 Lesson 3 - Principles of Display and Directory Modules
Display and directory modules provide the ability to create pages of information that are defined within the controller.
These pages can then be accessed from a web browser, or by supervisors/displays to present the user with meaningful
information from the controller without the need for separate configuration.
These displays are stored in a hierarchy, which enables the user to navigate to the required information. Directory
modules provide that hierarchy, and display modules define what information is displayed within the hierarchy.
The hierarchy below illustrates how display and directory modules are used.
The number of display modules that have been added is shown in the Display box at the bottom of the dialogue box.
The number of display modules that have been added is shown in the Display box at the bottom of the dialogue box.
2. Right-click the page and click Properties. The Directory Item dialogue box is displayed.
6. Click . '6' will now appear in the Module's Sequence box, indicating that the module is at sequence step
6 in the sequence table.
7. Click OK.
8. Now complete the modifications to the sequence table by moving D1 to sequence step 4, L1 to sequence step
3, and S1 to sequence step 2.
4. Click Route - Time Enabled and drag it onto the strategy page.
The pointer will appear as a , and will change to a when over an area where the strategy block can
be placed.
5. Release the mouse button.
3. Navigate to the 'C:\Set Projects\Tours\SET Tour 3\Upload' directory, and click L099n025.IQ4.
4. Click Open. IQSET will now import the file, creating the controller 25, adding four strategy pages, and
putting the strategy into the specified locations. Once the process is complete, IQSET displays the final page
containing strategy.
5. Compare the strategy of the controller that has just been imported with that of controller 24. You will notice
slight differences in the layout of the two strategies, the connectives are not reproduced (although the modules
inputs are all specified correctly), and some modules may be overlapping slightly.
The strategy can now be documented and engineered using IQSET.
7.3.4 Lesson 2 - Principles of Strategy Blocks
Strategy blocks allow standard pieces of strategy to be re-used without the need to recreate the strategy each time it is
required. You can build up a library of different strategy blocks for all the different standard pieces of strategy you
use.
When a strategy block is created all the links between modules are retained, as is the relative position of the modules
on the page.
The actual modules used are determined at the time the strategy block is used by the appropriate pointer (e.g. if a logic
module is used, and the logic pointer is set to 5, the first logic module used will be logic module 5). The sequence
pointer determines the sequence step of first module in the sequence table.
IQSET prompts for the actual module that is to be used when the strategy block used. Each strategy block can be made
up of several pages of strategy, and it is possible to use the entire strategy block, or just a page.
6. In the Block Name box enter Tour 3 to specify the name of the strategy block.
7. In the Controller Type box click IQ4 to specify the type of controller for which the strategy block is to be
used.
8. In the Firmware Version box click 3.3 to specify the firmware version of controller for which the strategy
block is to be used.
9. In the Revision box enter 1 to specify the revision number of the strategy block.
10. In the Group box ensure that SET tour is selected.
11. In the Details box enter SET Tour 3 strategy block. For the purposes of this tour leave the other fields blank.
12. Click OK. IQSET will now create a strategy block called Tour 3 and open a blank strategy page ready for
strategy to be added.
Note: The strategy page is green to indicate that a strategy block is being edited.
2. In the Number box click 04 - to specify an unused sensor type module (this could be any unused sensor type
module).
3. In the Sensor Part Number box enter Tour 3 to specify the part number for the sensor.
4. In the Scaling Range box enter 90 - 110, to specify the range for the sensor.
5. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter Tour 3 90 - 110, to specify the reference for the sensor.
6. Click Edit. The dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate parameters to be specified. It is necessary to
define the output value for a specific input value. The number of values entered depends on the sensor’s
characteristics, and how accurate the reading needs to be.
7. In the first box in the Input (X) column enter 0.486, and in the first box in the Output (Y) column enter 110,
to specify the sensor’s scaling parameters.
Using the Command Line toolbar can speed up use of IQSET enabling modules to be added to the strategy at a
specific sequence step, or modules to be located quickly. The Command Line toolbar also allows other IQSET
commands such as redrawing the screen, displaying another page, or zooming in and out. A full list of the commands
that can be entered in the Command Line toolbar is provided in the 'Command Line Commands' section of this
manual.
7.3.8 Lesson 4 - Using the Command Line Toolbar to Find Modules
The Command Line toolbar can be used to find modules in the strategy. By entering the item reference (e.g. S1) to
specify sensor 1) you can locate the page containing a specific module. For this tour, you will find the location of
Loop 1.
Using the Command Line toolbar to find modules:
1. If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line.
2. Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move
cursor to the Command Line toolbar.
3. In the Command Line toolbar enter L1, to specify the item reference for the module that is to be located.
4. Click . IQSET will now locate Loop 1 and display ‘L1 on Pages(s) 2’ in the Command Line toolbar
indicating that loop 1 is located on page 2.
5. Repeat the process to locate other modules in the strategy. The item reference should be in the format shown
below.
<Module Type><Module Number>
<Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g.,
S1specifies a sensor). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Number> specifies the number of the module (e.g. to find sensor 3 type S3).
3. Click Compare.iq4 to select the file that is to be compared with the strategy held by IQSET.
4. Click Open. This displays the Compare and Update dialogue box.
Option Description
Update
Causes IQSET to update its strategy to be the same as the chosen fil
Database
Backup Ensures that IQSET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it allowing the
Database strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable.
Print Report Causes IQSET to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified
File printer.
6. Click Start.
IQSET will now compare the strategy in the file Compare.iq4 with the strategy stored by IQSET, and modify
the strategy in IQSET to be the same as the IQ4 file. It also prints out a report that describing the differences.
From this report, you can see that the settings for sensor type module 4 were different; in the IQ4 file the
module had not been set up, whereas in IQSET it had. If you now look at sensor type module 4 you will see
that it has been cleared down by the process. The report also shows that Loop 5 was not present in the IQ4
file, if you now check the first page of strategy 'L5' has been removed.
9 ENGINEER IQ CONTROLLERS
This section describes the process of using IQSET to engineer IQ controllers.
Although IQSET can be used in the way that best suits individual needs, it is recommended that the procedure below
be followed:
Plan the System
Specify the IQSET Project
Create the Controllers
Configure the Controller Strategy
Add Text and Graphics to Strategy Pages
Test the Strategy
Download the Strategy
Issue Project Documentation
Backup the Project
9.1 Plan the System
Good planning is necessary prior to starting work because it reduces the actual amount of time spent engineering the
system, reduces the number of errors, and produces a better result. It is important to understand the HVAC equipment
that is being controlled, and the hardware that interfaces with it, to ensure that the strategy is written so that the
controller correctly interfaces with the HVAC equipment. The HVAC equipment will need to be maintained;
therefore, it is necessary to know the maintenance intervals of the pieces of HVAC equipment so that this can be built
into the strategy. It is also necessary to understand how the system is to be used so that the appropriate adjustments
can be included. This is helpful in deciding on the setpoints, OSS settings etc.
When engineering a system that uses the Trend network, it is not only necessary to understand the requirements of the
control strategy within individual controllers; it is also necessary to understand how various controllers interact with
each other. This enables ic comms to be set up, and the device's addresses can be set up correctly.
If the strategy is to be BTL compliant you should follow the advice in the 'Create a BTL Compliant Strategy' section
of this manual.
9.2 Specify the IQSET Project
Having planned the system, the next stage is to specify the IQSET project that is to be used. This is done by either:
Creating a new IQSET project
Opening an existing project
Importing a IQSET project
Once the project has been specified it is necessary to set up the project's remote devices.
3. In the folder list click the zip file for the required project. To select a file stored in a different location, click
the drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list
until the file is displayed.
4. Change the project details as required by entering the required text into the appropriate box.
5. Click OK.
9.2.5 Delete a IQSET Project
IQSET does not provide a facility for deleting a project. To remove a project from the system it is necessary to delete
the subdirectory for the required project and all its contents from the c:\set projects directory using Windows Explorer.
3. In the Remote Devices area select clear the Not Sent check box.
4. In the Remote Devices box click the remote device that is to be set up. A is displayed.
5. Click . The Remote Device dialogue box is displayed.
6. In the Device Address box enter the host name or IP address of the remote device.
7. In the Subnet box enter the device's subnet mask.
8. Click OK.
9. Repeat steps (4) to (8) until all the required devices have been specified. There is a maximum of 20 devices.
10. Click Set Project Defaults.
11. Click OK.
4. To only show choices for controllers with node controller functionality select the Node Controllers check
box.
5. Click the required option (IQ1, IQ2, IQ3, IQ4, IQECO) in the Range area to specify the range of the
controller that is to be added. Clicking the Other option enables a custom controller type to be added,
providing the .IQD file exists in the 'C:\Program Files\Trend Control Systems\System Engineering
Tool\Devices' folder.
6. In the Device Type box click the required device type.
7. In the Firmware Version box click the firmware version of the controller that is to be added.
8. In the Hardware Variant box click the hardware variant of the controller that is to be added.
9. In the Options area select the required check box(s) to select any required options (e.g. BACnet). If Fixed is
selected, you must use a solution to add the strategy to the controller - see 'Add Controllers using Solutions'.
Important: Some features of Time Schedule modules in IQ4v3.50 firmware or greater are not compatible
with Trend supervisor products (963, IQ®VISION, IQ®VIEW8, and IQ®VIEW4). To maintain
compatibility with these products, ensure that the B-BC Sched option is NOT selected.
Note: These options are only displayed if available with the option selected in the Firmware Version box.
11. In the Address box enter the network address of the controller. (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
Note: It is recommended that IQECOs are in the address range 11 to 64.
12. If more than one controller of the same type is to be added in the Controller Count box enter the number of
controllers that are to be added. The address of the first controller added is the one specified in the Address
box. The address is then incremented to the next valid address in the range (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2,
3, and 10) for the next controller that is added. This process is repeated for all the controllers that are to be
added.
13. In the Name box enter a name for the controller.
14. In the Details box enter details about the controller.
15. In the Engineer box enter the name of the engineer designing the strategy.
16. Click OK. The Address Module dialogue box is displayed. The appearance of this dialogue box will vary
depending on the type of controller being added.
17. Specify the address module parameters by entering the required value for each address module parameter
into the appropriate box, or clicking the required options.
18. Click OK. The User Parameters dialogue box is displayed.
19. Specify the Admin User. This user must have a PIN level of 100.
20. Click OK. For IQECO controllers the process is complete goto to step (27) for IQ4NC controllers the NC
Configuration dialogue box is displayed, goto step (21) for other types of controllers the Sensor Type
dialogue box is displayed goto step (23).
21. Specify the controller's network configuration.
22. Once all the network configuration is specified click OK.
23. Specify the sensor type modules as required.
24. Once all the required sensor types are specified, click Exit. For pre IQ3 controllers the process is complete
goto to step (25). For IQ3 controllers with I/O available the I/O Set up dialogue box is displayed goto step
(23).
25. If adding an IQ3 or IQ4E with external I/O available set up the I/O modules.
26. Once all the I/O modules are specified click Exit.
27. IQSET displays a blank strategy page for the new controller.
28. If more than one controller is being added steps (16) to (25) will be repeated for each controller being added.
5. In the Lan box enter the LAN number for the new controller (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
6. In the Node box enter the network address of the controller (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
7. Click OK. The controller will be added to the project.
2. Enter the keywords that are to be matched in the box, or select them.
Note: The List/Heatmap button toggles the keyword display between a list of heatmap.
Drag the solution on to the Display Area. toggles the display of the block description. indicates
an IQ4 solution. The Enter Destination dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Lan box enter the LAN number for the new controller (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
5. In the Node box enter the network address of the controller (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
6. Click OK. The controller will be added to the project.
4. If required specify the required controller range, device type, firmware version and hardware variant in the
Device Type, Firmware Version and Hardware Variant boxes, and the options for the controller in the
Options area.
5. If the required controller range, device type, firmware version and hardware variant were specified in step
(4) click OK if not click Cancel. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.
6. In the Address box enter the network address of the controller. (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
Note: It is recommended that IQECOs are in the address range 11 to 64.
7. If more than one controller using the same solution is to be added in the Controller Count box enter the
number of controllers that are to be added. The address of the first controller added is the one specified in the
Address box. The address is then incremented to the next valid address in the range (1 to 119 excluding
addresses 2, 3, and 10) for the next controller that is added. This process is repeated for all the controllers
that are to be added.
8. In the Name box enter a name for the controller.
12. Select the required solution from the list. Details about the controller type, hardware variant, and options of
the controller for which the solution was designed are displayed along with a description of the solution's
functionality.
Solutions for older firmware versions can be hidden/displayed using the Hide Older Versions check box.
To display all the solutions in the library, clear the Show Compatible Solutions Only check box. The list
can be filtered to display only strategies designed for use in fixed strategy controllers by clearing the Show
Compatible Solutions Only check box and selecting the required library from the Licenced Library box.
Note: Fixed strategy controller will only be able to run a strategy from the library it is licensed to use but
IQSET will not warn you that the solution is not compatible with the actual controller. Programmable
controllers (no license restrictions) will be able to run any solution designed for their controller type.
13. Click OK to return to the Device Details dialogue box. The Select Device button is disabled to prevent the
controller type from being changed.
14. Click OK. The controller(s) will be added to the project.
If the solution used is part of a licensed library the Fixed option will be set for the controller. If you intend to
download this strategy to a programmable controller you should edit the device details to clear the Fixed
option. The controller licence file is also copied to the project's 'License' directory and will be use when the
strategy is downloaded to the controller.
9.3.3 Add Controllers by Copying
If several controllers are to use the same, or similar, strategy it is possible to duplicate controllers by copying them to
a different address. This method can only be used to duplicate controllers within the same project. Copying, and
renaming the .IQ files in the Set Projects directory using Windows Explorer enables controllers to be copied between
projects.
E.g. If controller 27 on LAN 24 was to use the same strategy as controller 26 on the same LAN, the file L024n026.IQ
in the Lan024 sub directory of the Set Projects directory should be copied into the same directory after renaming as
L024n027.IQ. When the project is loaded next time, the new controller will appear in the Project View. The two
controllers will now be identical, and if necessary, changes can now be made to the duplicate strategy.
TIP: If you regularly use the same controller configuration you could create a solution.
To copy a controller:
1. Open the project containing the controller that is to be duplicated.
4. In the Project box click the project into which the controller is to be copied.
5. In the Lan box enter the LAN number for the new controller (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
6. In the Node box enter the network address of the controller (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
7. Click OK. A copy of the controller will be added to the project at the new address leaving the original
unchanged.
9.3.4 Add Controllers by Importing Files
IQ2 files from pre IQ3 controllers with version 2.1 firmware or above, IQ3 files, IQ4 and IQe files can be imported
into an IQSET project. This enables controllers for which the strategy is not available in IQSET to be added to an
IQSET project. This allows strategy modification, or documentation to be carried out using IQSET.
To add a controller by importing a file:
1. Open the required project, or create a new one.
If using an existing project, ensure that it does not already contain a controller with the same network address
as the one that is to be imported.
2. Display the Project View.
3. On the Project menu click Import IQ2 File (V2.1> Firmware Only), Import IQ3 File, Import IQ4 File,
or Import IQe File. A dialogue box is displayed.
If a file does not exist for the controller you can upload the required file from the controller using the System
View.
4. In the folder list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the
drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file
is displayed.
5. Click Open. The file will be imported, and the controller added to the project.
If the x, y, and page parameters have been defined in the modules, the appropriate pages will be created, and the
modules positioned accordingly. If the x, y, and page parameters are not defined, the modules will be added to the
strategy but will subsequently need to be placed on the strategy pages as required.
Select the type of module that is to be added. Selecting 'Undefined' will add modules without specifying
their type. This allows multiple modules to be added when they are to be of different types. The module
type must be specified as below before committing the changes.
In the same row specify the module sub type in the SubType column, see below. For details of the
module identifier, see the appropriate module section of this manual.
Module Sub Type Module
1 Digital Driver
Drivers 2 Analogue Driver
3 Time Proportional Driver
5. In the Lan Number box enter the number of the LAN (0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10). 0 specifies
a stand-alone LAN.
6. In the Type box specify the LAN type. For a LAN of BACnet NTDs select BACnet (NTDs are only required
if IC Comms messages are to be sent to BACnet devices.). For a LAN on MS/TP (for IQECOs) select Trend-
MSTP, otherwise select Trend-IQ. If an MSTP LAN is added an IQ4NC must be added to the LAN to
enable communications with devices on other LANs.
7. In the Label box enter a label for the LAN.
8. In the Details box enter a description for the LAN.
9. Click OK.
The dialogue box displays a list of strategies in the same library as the original strategy as it is only possible
to change the strategy to use a solution form the same library as the original. Solutions for older firmware
versions can be hidden/displayed using the Hide Older Versions check box.
3. Select the required solution from the list in the Solution box.
4. Click OK to return to the Device Details dialogue box.
5. Click OK. A message is displayed.
6. Click Yes to continue. A message is displayed asking if changes made to module parameters are to be kept.
7. Click Yes to preserve the changes or No to use the parameter values from the solution. After the selection,
the strategy is changed.
4. Select the check boxes for the controllers for which the strategies are to be changed. Only select controllers
with strategies from the same library. To select all the controllers with strategies from the same library right
click a controller with a strategy from the required library and select Select All In Library. To clear any
selection right click on a controller and select Unselect All.
5. Click Select New Strategy. The Solution Selector dialogue box is displayed. It displays a list of strategies
in the same library as the original strategy as it is only possible to change the strategy to use a solution form
the same library as the original. Solutions for older firmware versions can be hidden/displayed using the Hide
Older Versions check box.
Note: The appearance of this dialogue box will vary depending on the type and version of controller.
3. Specify the address module parameters: IQ4 and IQ3v1.3 or greater controllers, Pre v1.3 IQ3 controllers,
IQECO controllers, or Pre IQ3 controllers.
IQ4, and IQ3v1.3 or greater controllers:
If the identifier is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and enter the controller's identifier in the
Identifier box (30-characters).
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
If Attributes F, G, H, I, J and K are to be specified in the Attribute boxes enter 30-character attributes
for the controller as required.
If the LAN number and network address is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and specify the
parameters. In the Local Lan box enter the required LAN number (1, 4 to 119 excluding 10) and in the
Local Node box enter the required network address (1, 4 to 119 excluding 10).
Note: Changing the LAN number and Local node in this way is not recommended, it will not move the
controller in the LAN structure, however these values will have downloaded to the controller.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created. Adding these parameters to the data file may cause duplicate
addresses when the file is downloaded.
languages in the Available Display Languages box and click . Languages that are to be downloaded
are indicated by an . Languages that are not going to be downloaded are indicated by an . To specify
a language not to be downloaded click it and then click . The default language is always downloaded.
Pre v1.3 IQ3 controllers:
If the identifier is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and enter the controller's identifier in the
Identifier box (30-characters).
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
If Attributes F (2), G (3), H (4), I (5), J (6) and K (7) are to be specified in the Attribute boxes enter 30-
character attributes for the controller as required.
If the LAN number and network address is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and specify the
parameters. In the Local Lan box enter the required LAN number (1, 4 to 119 excluding 10), and in the
Local Node box enter the required network address (1, 4 to 119 excluding 10).
Note: Changing the LAN number and Local node in this way is not recommended, it will not move the
controller in the LAN structure, however these values will have downloaded to the controller.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
If the controller's local supervisors port is to be set up clear the Not Sent check box and specify the
parameters. In the Supervisor Port Address box enter the address of the local supervisor port. (0, 4 to
119 excluding 10). If set to 0 the device connected using the local supervisor port will only be able to
communicate with the local controller.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
If the Ethernet information (IP address, subnet mask, default router, and UDP port) is to be specified
clear the Not Sent check box in the Ethernet area and specify the addressing information. In the
Addressing Mode box select Enter Manually, or Obtain Automatically to specify whether the
controller is to use automatic or manual addressing. If 'Obtain Automatically' is selected the IP Address,
Subnet Mask, WINS Servers, and DNS Servers boxes cannot be edited and the controller will obtain
their values from the DHCP server.
If the addressing mode has been set to 'Enter Manually' specify the IP address, subnet mask, default
router, and UDP port.
To specify the UDP port:
In the UDP Port box enter the UDP port number.
Note: It is recommended that the UDP port is not changed.
To specify the default router:
Enter IP address of the router to which messages are sent if the destination address is not on the
local subnet in the Default Router box in the format below:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Available Display Languages box and click . Languages that are to be downloaded are indicated
by an . Languages that are not going to be downloaded are indicated by an . To specify a language
not to be downloaded click it and then click . The default language is always downloaded.
IQECO controllers:
If the identifier is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and enter the controller's identifier in the
Identifier box (30-characters).
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
If Attributes F (2) and G (3) are to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and in the Attribute boxes
enter 30-character attributes for the controller as required.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must
be cleared when the file is created.
For IQECO v1.0 only if the alarm LAN and alarm address parameters are to be specified clear the Not
Sent check box and specify the parameters. In the Alarm Lan and Alarm Address boxes enter the LAN
number of the device to which alarms are to be sent (0, 4 to 119 excluding 10), and the network address
of the device to which alarms are to be sent. (0, 4 to 119 excluding 10). If the alarm LAN is set to 0
alarms are not sent to the local LAN. If the alarm address is set to 0 alarms are not sent if set to 2 alarms
are sent to the device directly connected to the controller.
3. Select the required configuration from the selection on the left. To configure the configuration manually
select 'Manual' and set up the configuration as required by selecting the required options from the drop-down
list and entering the required values. Information that can be edited is highlighted in orange; information that
can't are highlighted in green.
Configuration Description
Configures the IQ4NC to interface (INC) between an internetwork running over an
Ethernet to MSTP Ethernet network and a LAN running on an MS/TP network. This is intended for
connecting a LAN of IQECO controllers to an internetwork on Ethernet.
Configures the IQ4NC to interface (INC) between an internetwork running over a Trend
Trend
current loop network and a LAN running on an MS/TP network. This is intended for
Internetwork to
connecting a LAN of IQECO controllers to an internetwork on a Trend current loop
MSTP
network.
Configures the IQ4NC to interface (INC) between an internetwork running over an
Ethernet to Trend Ethernet network and a LAN running on a Trend current loop network. This is intended
LAN for connecting a LAN of controllers on a Trend current loop network to an internetwork
on Ethernet.
Ethernet to Trend Configures the IQ4NC to interface (INC) between an internetwork running over an
Internetwork Ethernet network and an internetwork running on a Trend current loop network.
Enables the IQ4NC to be configured to operate in other modes not covered by the
Manual
standard configuration described above.
3. For IQ3 v2.3 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers in the LAN Label box enter the label for the
controller's LAN.
4. For IQ3 v2.3 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers in the Alarm Group box specify the alarm group to
which all IQ LAN network alarms are sent. If set to zero alarms only sent to connected supervisor devices.
5. If the module enable and baud rate are to be specified clear the Not Sent check box and specify the
information:
Enable/disable the module as required by selecting or clearing the Module (Disabled) check box.
Note: For IQ4 Ethernet only controllers, and IQ4 controllers that are to build LANs and internetworks
over the Ethernet network this module must always be disabled.
For IQ4 controllers specify whether the baud rate is to be determined automatically or entered manually,
by selecting or clearing the Autobaud (Enabled) check box.
For IQ4 controllers when the 'Autobaud' option is disabled select the required baud rate from the Baud
Rate box.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must be
cleared when the file is created.
6. Click OK.
9.4.9 Set up the Ethernet IP Module
The Ethernet IP module determines the Ethernet settings for IQ4 and IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or
greater. It needs to be to be set up if the controller is to connect to the Trend network using Ethernet, if its virtual CNC
is to be used, if IP alarms are to be used, or the controller’s web server is to be accessed. For details of the Ethernet IP
module see the IQ3 Configuration Reference Manual (TE200768) or IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual
(TE201263).
Note: For IQ4 controllers that are to build LANs and internetworks over the Ethernet network the IQ LAN network
module must be disabled.
To set up the Ethernet IP module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the Ethernet IP module is to be specified.
3. For IQ3 v2.3 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers in the LAN Label box enter the label for the
controller's LAN.
4. If the IP address is to be specified clear the Not Sent check box in the Ethernet area and enter the controller's
IP address in the IP Address box in the format below.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
E.g. 128.1.24.34
The IP address for each controller must be unique to avoid address clashes. IP address in the following ranges
should not be used:
IP Address Reason
127.x.x.x.x Reserved for loopback.
The non-masked part of the IP address cannot be all 1’s or 0’s e.g. if IP address
Non-masked part of IP
is 1.2.x.x and subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 then x.x. cannot be either 255.255 or
address
0.0.
224.0.0.0 to
Reserved for multicast.
239.255.255.255
Addresses 240.0.0.0 to
Reserved for experimentation and development.
247.255.255.255
x.x.x.255 Reserved for broadcast.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must be
cleared when the file is created. Adding these parameters to the data file may cause duplicate addresses
when the file is downloaded.
5. If the Ethernet information (subnet mask, default router, and UDP port) is to be specified clear the Not Sent
check box in the Ethernet area and specify the addressing information:
Option Description
Off Both the HTTP and HTTPS web servers are OFF
HTTPS (HTTP HTTPS web server is ON and requests to the HTTP web server are redirected to the
Redirect) HTTP server, HTTP server is OFF
HTTPS Only HTTPS web server is ON, HTTP server is OFF
HTTP & HTTPS Both the HTTP and HTTPS web servers are ON (not recommended)
HTTP Only Only the HTTP web server is ON (not recommended)
8. If the HTTP web server is being used (not recommended) specify the port number for the HTTP web server
in the Web Server Port box.
Option Description
XML interface
The controller's XML Web services are disabled.
OFF
Basic IQ
The controller's XML Web services are enabled.
authentication
Write IQ4 v3.1 or greater only. The controller's XML Web services are enabled, and writes to
authentication the controller using the XML web services are protected using HMAC_MD5 security.
Note: For IQ3 controllers the XML server functionality requires a licence. Contact Trend Customer Support
for details.
12. For IQ3 v2.3 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers in the Alarm Group box specify the alarm group to
which all Ethernet IP network alarms are sent. If set to zero alarms only sent to connected supervisor devices.
13. If the controller is to send emails enter the IP address or host name of the email server that is to be used in
the Email Server Addr box.
14. For IQ3 v3.0 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers if the controller is to send emails and the mail server
requires security enter the required user name and password in the Email User Name and Email Password
boxes.
15. For IQ4 v3.30 controllers or greater specify the TCP port used by the email server in the Email Port box.
16. For IQ4 v3.30 controllers or greater specify the security to be used for email alarms in the Email Security
box.
17. For IQ4 v3.30 controllers or greater specify whether Email certificates are to be ignored using the Email
Certificate ignore check box. It should normally be enabled, but can be disabled if the IQ4 has problem
authenticating the certificate.
18. Specify the minimum email TLS version in the Email Min TLS version box.
19. If the controller's host name, WINs servers, and DNS servers are to be specified clear the Not Sent check
box in the DHCP area and specify the information.
In the Host Name box enter the controller's host name. It provides a network communication name for
the controller. It is separate from the Identifier. It must be unique on the network, and must not be greater
than 15-characters in length and can only contain 7-bit ASCII characters in the range A-Z, a-z or 0-9
plus ‘-‘ or ‘_. It must start with a character in the range A-Z or a-z and must not end with ‘-‘ or ‘_’.
For IQ3 controllers only specify whether the controller's default hostname is enabled or disabled by
selecting/clearing the Disable Default Hostname check box.
Click in the WINS Servers area, the WINS Server dialogue box is displayed. In the IP Address
box enter the IP address of the WINS server, and click OK.
Click in the DNS Servers area, the DNS Server dialogue box is displayed. In the IP Address box
enter the IP address of the DNS server, and click OK..
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must be
cleared when the file is created.
20 If the internetwork is to be built across routers clear the Not Sent check box in the Remote Devices area and
specify the remote devices.
In the Remote Devices box click the remote device that is to be set up a is displayed.
Click the Remote Device dialogue box is displayed.
In the Device Address box enter the IP address or host name of the remote device.
In the Subnet box enter the device’s subnet mask.
Click OK.
Or
Click Use Project Defaults to use the list of remote devices specified for the project.
Note: For these parameters to be included in the data file when it is created the Not Sent check box must be
cleared when the file is created.
3. If there is an Enable BACnet Module button click it to enable the module. If there is a Disable BACnet
Module button the module is already enabled.
4. In the Manual Device Instance box click Automatic or Manual to specify whether the controllers address
on then BACnet network is determined manually or automatically. If determined automatically the address
is calculated using the formula below:
(LAN Number*100) + Local node
5. If the address is to be specified manually in the Device Instance box enter the controller's address on the
BACnet network.
6. In the UDP Port box enter the UDP port of the controller. This defines the UDP port used by the controller
to send messages to other Trend system devices on BACnet.
7. In the Network Number box enter the controllers BACnet network number. Range = 0 to 65534. Only a
single network number is allowed on a single Ethernet subnet, and must be unique on the Ethernet network.
8. If the controller is to send an 'I am' message over the BACnet network when it powers up, click Disabled
(Send I-Am at Startup).
9. By default, the BBMD functionality is disabled which should be satisfactory in most cases, but if the BACnet
segment does not have a BBMD set up the IQ3 controller can act as the BBMD in which case the BDT list
must be set up. BBMDs enable BACnet devices to communicate across IP routers, only one BBMD device
is allowed on each IP subnet. The list should include the BBMD device for each IP subnet containing devices
that are to be communicated with.
To set up the BBMD list:
Click Disabled (BBMD) to enable BBMD. If there is an Enable button BBMD is enabled.
In the Remote BACnet IP Address box enter the IP address of the BBMD device that is being specified.
In the Remote BACnet Subnet box enter the BACnet subnet of the BBMD device that is being
specified. It is recommended that this is set to 255.255.255.255.
In the Remote BACnet UDP Port box enter the UDP port used by the BBMD device that is being
specified.
Click OK.
To remove a device from the BDT list right click it and click Delete. Devices can be edited as described
above.
Note: Only one BBMD device is allowed on each IP subnet The BBMD functionality will not work with
devices that use automatic IP addressing (DHCP), and under such condition should be left disabled.
10. By default, BTL compliance is enabled which means that the controller's schedules are read only over
BACnet. To maintain BTL compliance ensure that the button next to 'BTL Compliance' is set to 'Enabled'. If
schedule offset modules are required to be read only over BACnet click Enabled (BTL Compliance) to
disable BTL compliance the button will change to Disabled.
Note: Disabling BTL compliance could cause problems if devices attempt to write to the Schedule Offset
modules over BACnet.
11. Click OK.
9.4.11 Set up the BACnet IP Network Module
IQ4/BACnet, IQ4NC controllers and IQ3/BACnet controllers with firmware v2.30 or greater. The BACnet IP network
module determines the controller's BACnet IP settings. It needs to be to be set up if the controller is to connect to a
BACnet network. For details of the BACnet network module see the IQ3 Configuration Reference Manual
(TE200768), or the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
To set up the BACnet IP network module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the BACnet network module is to be specified.
2. Right-click the strategy page, point to Device, point to BACnet and click BACnet IP, or on the Device menu
click BACnet IP. The BACnet IP Module dialogue box is displayed.
In the Remote BACnet IP Address box enter the IP address of the BBMD device that is being specified.
In the Remote BACnet Subnet box enter the BACnet subnet of the BBMD device that is being
specified. It is recommended that this is set to 255.255.255.255.
In the Remote BACnet UDP Port box enter the UDP port used by the BBMD device that is being
specified.
Click OK.
To remove a device from the BDT list right click it and click Delete. Devices can be edited as described
above.
8. Click OK.
9.4.12 Set up the BACnet Application Network Module
IQ4/BACnet, IQ4NC controller and IQ3/BACnet controllers with firmware v2.30 or greater. The BACnet Application
network module determines the controller's BACnet settings. It needs to be to be set up if the controller is to connect
to a BACnet network. For details of the module see the IQ3 Configuration Reference Manual (TE200768), or the IQ4
Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
To set up the BACnet application network module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the BACnet network module is to be specified.
2. Right-click the strategy page, point to Device, point to BACnet and click BACnet Application, or on the
Device menu click BACnet Application. The BACnet Application Module dialogue box is displayed.
3. For IQ3 controllers with BINC functionality and IQ4NC controllers. In the Module Label box enter a label
for the module (30-characters).
4. For IQ3 v2.3 controllers or greater and IQ4 controllers in the LAN Label box enter the label for the
controller's LAN.
5. For IQ3 controllers with BINC functionality and IQ4NC controllers. In the Manual Network Number box
click Automatic or Manual to specify whether the controller's address on the MSTP network is determined
manually or automatically. If determined automatically the address is set to the number specified by the 'Lan
Number' parameter. If the network number is to be specified manually in the Network Number box enter
the controller's MSTP network number. (range 0 to 65534).
Note: It is strongly recommended that the network number is determined automatically.
6. Enable/disable the module as required by selecting or clearing the Module (Disabled) check box.
7. For IQ3 controllers with BINC functionality and IQ4NC controllers. In the Manual MAC Address box click
Automatic or Manual to specify whether the controller's MAC address on the BACnet MS/TP network is
determined manually or automatically. If determined automatically the MAC address set to '0'. If the
controller's MS/TP MAC address is to be specified manually in the MSTP MAC box enter the controller's
BACnet MS/TP MAC address. (range 0 to 255).
Note: It is strongly recommended that this be left as automatic. Setting to some other MAC address will
compromise system performance.
3. In the Number box click the sensor type module that is to be defined.
4. In the Sensor Part Number or the Unique Sensor Reference box click the required definition,
5. In the Scaling Range box click the required range. The Filter button can be used to reduce the number of
sensors that can be selected. Click Filter to display the Sensor Type Filter dialogue box, and then click the
appropriate check boxes.
6. Click Apply. The parameters of the selected definition will be applied to the selected sensor type module.
The parameters for that sensor are displayed on the right of the dialogue box. The graph shows the sensors
characteristics.
7. Repeat steps (3) to (6) for each sensor type module that is to be set up.
8. Click Exit.
3. In the Number box click the sensor type module that is to be defined.
4. In the Sensor Part Number box enter the part number of the sensor.
5. In the Scaling Range box enter the range of the sensor. The drop-down list is empty when a new sensor is
being added to the library.
6. In the Unique Sensor Reference box enter the reference for the sensor. It is recommended that this reference
consist of the part number followed by the range (e.g. PIL/4).
7. Click Edit.
8. In the Scaling box click the scaling type. The Sensor Type dialogue box changes to allow the appropriate
parameters to be specified. For IQ3and IQ4 controllers you must use characterise scaling.
Option Description
This type of scaling must be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It allows a sensor’s
characteristics to be defined by specifying up to twenty scaling points between which it
Characterise interpolates. This provides higher accuracy than the other scaling types for non-linear
scaling characteristics. It is therefore recommended for use with all non-linear sensors providing
the controller has version 2.1 firmware or greater. It is also used for lookup function
modules.
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for
Linear scaling sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a linear characteristic between the
top and bottom of the range
Option Description
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. Can be used instead of
linearise thermistor volts. It should be used for non-Trend sensors where the
resistance/temperature characteristic is known, as it requires entry of ohms against
Linearise
temperature directly from the characteristic. It enables the linearisation points on the
thermistor
temperature scale to be individually chosen so that they can be closer together over a part
ohms
of the characteristic where the gradient is changing rapidly, and further apart where the
gradient changes only gradually. It is not recommended for use with Trend sensors (use
Linearise thermistor volts for these).
Linearise
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for
thermistor volts
thermistor sensors providing a voltage signal that needs to be linearised.
scaling
Linearise volts This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It should be used for
scaling sensors providing voltage or current signals that need to be linearised.
This type of scaling cannot be used on IQ3 and IQ4 controllers. It is not normally used; it
Log scaling is for sensors providing either a voltage or current signal with a logarithmic characteristic
between the top and bottom of range.
9. Specify the sensor type's parameters by entering the required value for each parameter into the appropriate
box, or clicking the required options, or choosing the required value from a list.
Note: When entering the values in the Input (X) and Output (Y) boxes the value of the input points (X) must
increase, not decrease.
Clicking Refresh will display a graph of the sensor’s characteristics as defined by the current parameters.
This can be used at any point to check how the sensor reading will be scaled.
10. Once the parameters are correctly specified, click Save.
11. Repeat steps (3) to (10) to set up other sensor type modules.
12. Click Exit.
9.4.15 Add a States Category Module
IQ4 v3.50 or greater. States Category modules must be added if multistate values are to be used in the strategy.
Add a states category module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller to which the module is to be added.
2. Right-click the page and point to Device and click States Categories, or on the Device menu click States
Categories. The States Categories dialogue box is displayed.
Option Description
/XNC variants only. Adds a Type 17 (Trend Serial) Network module with the 'Mode'
XNCSerial -
parameter set to 'RS232'. For use with IQ4 /XNC variants that are to communicate via an
RS232
RS232 connection.
/XNC variants only. Adds a Type 17 (Trend Serial) Network module with the 'Mode'
XNCSerial -
parameter set to 'RS485'. For use with IQ4 /XNC variants that are to communicate via an
RS485
RS485 connection.
/INT variants only. Adds a Type 8 (MODBUS Serial) Network module'. For use with IQ4
MODBUS
/INT variants that are to communicate using MODBUS via a serial connection (RS232 or
Serial
RS485).
/INT variants only. Adds a Type 19 (MODBUS IP) Network module. For use with IQ4 /INT
MODBUS IP
variants that are to communicate using MODBUS via an IP connection.
/INT variants only v4.30 or greater. Adds a Type 15 (M-bus) Network module. For use with
MBus
IQ4 /INT variants that are to communicate using M-bus.
Adds a Type 14 (Wallbus) Network module, used when connecting a Wallbus device to an
Wall-bus
IQ4 or IQECO.
Note: The RS48, RS232 ports cannot be used for XNC, MS/TP, M-bus, or MODBUS at the same time.
4. In the Module label box enter the label for the module.
5. Configure the module's parameters (/INT variants only).
Modbus IP:
In the Hostname/IP Address box enter the IP Address or host name of the Modbus device the IQ4 is to
communicate with.
In the TCP Port box enter the TCP port for the Modbus communications.
If the module is to be disabled select the Disable box.
Modbus Serial:
In the Communication Channel box select the port (RS232, RS485, or Not used) connecting the IQ4
to the Modbus system.
In the Communication Mode box select communication mode used by the Modbus connection.
4. Click the button next to Module State to ensure that the module is enabled.
5. In the Label box enter the module's label.
6. In the Network Module box select n12 - Wallbus.
7. In the Address box enter the devices address on the Wallbus (1 to 15).
8. In the Device Profile box enter a name for the configuration.
9. Specify the number of inputs.
Select the Inputs tab.
Click Change next to the Total box. The Change Input Total dialogue box is displayed.
4. Click the button next to Module State to ensure that the module is enabled.
5. In the Label box enter the module's label.
6. In the Network Module box select the required Modbus network module to which the module is connected.
7. In the Address box enter the device's address on the Modbus (Serial = 1 to 247, IP = 1 to 255).
8. In the Device Profile box enter a name for the configuration.
9. In the Byte Order box select the order of the bytes in the device.
10. In the Register Addr Mode box select the address mode used by the device.
11. Select either Decimal or Hex option to specify the required entry mode.
12. In the Inputs Base reg Addr box enter the base value to apply to all Inputs Register Addresses.
13. In the Outputs Base reg Addr box enter the base value to apply to all Outputs Register Addresses.
14. Specify the number of inputs.
Select the Inputs tab.
Click Change next to the Total box. The Change Input Total dialogue box is displayed.
4. Click the button next to Module State to ensure that the module is enabled.
5. In the Label box enter the module's label.
6. In the Network Module box select the required M-bus network module to which the module is connected.
7. In the Primary Address box enter the address on the M-bus of the device to be read. (1 to 15)
8. In the Enhanced Sec box enter the enhanced secondary address (serial number) on the M-bus of the device
to be read.
9. In the Device Profile box enter a name for the configuration.
10. In the Refresh Period box enter the time in seconds between read requests (1 to 1800).
11. Specify the number of outputs.
Select the Outputs tab.
Click Change next to the Total box. The Change Input Total dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Telephone Number box enter the telephone number that is to be used to access the controller (max
29-characters).
0 to 9 Dialling characters
ABCD#* Considered as dialling characters on some systems
J Wait for secondary dial tone
K 2 second pause
L Pulse dialling
M Tone dialling
4. In the Auto-dial Pin box enter the PIN used to validate connections using the modem (4-digits).
5. Click OK.
9.4.20.2 Set up the Modem Module
It is only necessary to set up modem modules for controllers with ADL support.
To set up the modem module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the modem module is to be set up.
2. On the Device menu click Modem Module. The Modem Module dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Modem Initialise 1 box enter the initialisation string that is sent to the modem whenever it is re-
initialised. This can be up to 24-characters long and is set to 'ATH&F' by default. This should not normally
be changed.
3. In the Proxy Port box enter the network address of the modem that is to be used to send alarms.
4. In the LAN box enter the LAN number of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range 1 to 119
excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10.
5. In the Address box enter the network address of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. Range 1 to
119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10.
6. In the Telephone box enter the telephone number of the device to which the alarms are to be sent (max 29-
characters).
0 to 9 Dialling characters
ABCD#* Considered as dialling characters on some systems
J Wait for secondary dial tone
K 2 second pause
L Pulse dialling
M Tone dialling
7. Click OK.
3. In the Module column click the store module is to be set up. The module number is displayed in the Module
box.
4. In the Label box enter the required text (max. 40-characters).
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
For more details of the module see the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533).
3. Specify the number of inputs, outputs, and stores available by either linking the XNC application file (XNP
file) that is to be linked to the strategy, or specify the required inputs, outputs, and stores manually.
Note: If the XNC application file is not linked now it must be linked before the strategy and TCL code is
downloaded to the controller.
4. If interfacing with 3rd party system via a serial connection select, the Type 17 (Trend Serial) Network module
that is to be used from the Network Module box.
Note: This can be changed by the TCL application if the interface is to change between serial connections.
5. Specify the initial value of each of the stores by double-clicking the appropriate store's string and entering
the required value. Information can be copied and pasted by right-clicking on the label and clicking Copy
Label or Paste Label. Information can be pasted into more than one store by copying the required
information to the clipboard; the information for each store must be on a new line, selecting the required
stores, right-clicking, and clicking Paste. Clicking Select All will select all the values.
6. Specify the initial value of each of the inputs, and outputs by double-clicking on the value and entering the
value. If an XNC application file has been linked the values of the inputs, outputs, and stores can be reset to
those specified in the file by selecting the Overwrite Values check box and clicking Re-load.
7. Specify the labels of each of the inputs, and outputs by double-clicking on the label and entering the new
label. Labels can be copied and pasted by right-clicking on the label and clicking Copy Label or Paste Label.
Labels can be pasted into more than one input, or output by copying the required information to the clipboard,
the information for each input or output must be on a new line, selecting the required input or output, right-
clicking, and clicking Paste. Clicking Select All will select all the labels.
If an XNC application file has been linked the labels of the inputs and outputs can be reset to those specified
by the application file by selecting the Overwrite Labels check box and clicking Re-load.
5. In the folder list click the XNC application file. To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive,
or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is
displayed.
6. Click Open. The TCL application will be loaded and the applications file name added to the XNC App box.
Details of the application’s name, author, and ID are also displayed in the appropriate boxes; these are read
only.
Note: If the number of stores, inputs, or outputs in the XNP file is different to the number specified by IQSET a dialogue
box asking if you want to continue is displayed. Click Yes to continue and update the settings in IQSET with those in
the XNP file or click No to cancel the process.
9.4.22.3 Specify Stores, Inputs and Outputs Manually
The stores, inputs and outputs of a TCL application can be specified manually, without the need for the TCL
application. This enables the IQ strategy for a specific TCL application to be produced before the application has been
completed.
To manually link TCL inputs and outputs to IQ strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the device for which the XNC interface module is to be specified.
3. Click Change next to the Total box for the store, inputs, or outputs. The Change Total dialogue box is
displayed.
Or:
If the Search Library is not displayed, display the Strategy Library, and click .
7. Check the module availability. The dialogue box lists the number of modules used by the strategy block, or
part of the strategy block that is being used; it also lists the number of available modules in the controller. If
there are not enough available modules the number of available modules will be in red, if there are enough it
will be in green. If this happens you should click Cancel and adjust the strategy so that the strategy block
will fit. In the case of IQ3 controllers if there are not enough I/O modules clicking I/O Setup will enable
additional I/O modules to be added. The list of modules can be sorted by module by clicking will sort the
modules by module type, and clicking will sort the list by module label.
8. Check the modules being added by clicking next to the required module.
To change the module number, click , click the required module from the list in the dialogue box,
and click OK.
To change the I/O module number, click , click the required I/O module from the list in the dialogue
box, and click OK.
To change the channel number, click , click the required channel from the list in the dialogue box,
and click OK.
9. If the module parameters from the strategy block are to override the parameters of any modules that already
exist in the strategy select the Select/Override Module check box.
10. Click OK.
11. IQSET will now add the individual modules for the strategy block. Each time IQSET attempts to add a
module of a type for which IQSET has been configured to prompt for the module number and sequence step
a dialogue box is displayed. If required enter the required module number and sequence step in the
appropriate box. Clicking on will check to see that the module number is valid, and unused. When the
information is correct click OK to add the module.
If the Select/Override Module check box was selected when IQSET attempts to add a module that is already
in the strategy the Strategy Block Warning dialogue box is displayed. Click Yes to override the parameters
of the module in the strategy with those from the module in the strategy block or No to keep the parameters
of the module in the strategy.
2. Click on the Alarms toolbar, or right-click the page where the module is to be placed, point to Alarms,
and click Group to add an alarm group module for each required grouping of alarms.
3. Click on the Alarms toolbar, or right-click the page where the module is to be placed, point to Alarms,
and click Route to add an Alarm Route module for each group.
4. Click on the Alarms toolbar, or right-click the page where the module is to be placed, point to Alarms,
and click Trend Destination or BACnet Destination to add an Alarm Destination module for each device
to which alarms are to be sent.
Note: Do not add a BACnet Alarm Destination module as described above for pre IQ4 v3.40 controllers.
Tip: To quickly add an Alarm Group module, Alarm Route module and Alarm Destination module linked
together right click the page and select Alarms>Default or Alarm Block Alarms>BACnet Alarm Block.
5. Edit the module's configuration parameters. In the case of an alarm destination module, the node for the
destination failed status can be changed.
Note: If sending alarms to a 963 that has not learned the site it is recommended that the message format of
the alarm destination modules be set to 'Text'.
6. Add any other modules that are to provide inputs to the alarm route or alarm destination modules.
7. Link the modules together as required. Alarm Group modules can only be linked to the 'G' parameter of alarm
route modules. They can be linked to as many alarm route modules as required. The link between alarm route
modules and alarm destination modules must be made by dragging the link from the of the alarm
destination module to the ‘D’ parameter of the alarm route module. An alarm route module can be linked to
as many alarm destination modules as required.
Note: Alarm Group module zero cannot be placed on the page for a link to be made; therefore, the G
parameter of the alarm route module must be set to 0. 0 is the default value when the module is first placed
on the page, therefore, G can be left as the default, or an existing link deleted to return G to 0.
8. Enable/disable the required alarm.
9. Set up the alarm handling groups.
To configure BACnet compatible alarm handling strategy for IQ3 and pre v3.40 firmware:
1. Add a strategy page.
Note: This is not necessary but it is recommended so that the alarm handling strategy is kept separate to the
control strategy.
2. Click , or right click on the strategy page, and point to Alarms, and click BACnet Alarm Block. The
BACnet Alarm Configuration dialogue box is displayed.
3. Select the Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, or Sunday check boxes to specify
the day's alarms are to be sent to the destination.
4. In the Start boxes enter the start of the period during which alarms are to be sent to the destination.
5. In the End boxes enter the end of the period during which alarms are to be sent to the destination.
6. If an acknowledgement of the alarm is expected select the Use confirmed message delivery check box.
When selected, the controller will expect an acknowledgement of the alarm, and will continue to send the
alarm until one is received, or it determines that a failure has occurred. When not selected, the controller will
send the alarm once and will not expect an acknowledgement. In this case the failed bit is never set as the
controller has no way of knowing is the alarm transmission was successful.
7. If alarms are to be sent when the value returns to the normal range, select the To-Normal check box.
8. If alarms are to be sent when the value changes to one in the fault range select, the To-Fault check box.
9. If alarms are to be sent when the value changes to one that is not in the normal range, select the To-
OffNormal check box.
10. Click OK. The BACnet alarm block is added to the strategy page.
Note: It is possible to make modifications to the strategy created by the BACnet alarm block; however,
changes may invalidate the BACnet compliance. If such changes are made IQSET will warn you when the
strategy file is created and give you the option to continue. See the 'Create a BTL Compliant Strategy' section
of this manual for more details.
3. In the Alarm Address box enter the network address of the device to which alarms are to be sent. Range 1,
4 to 119 excluding 10. If set to 0, alarms are not sent. If set to 2, alarms are sent to a device that is directly
connected to the controller.
4. In the Remote Lan box enter the LAN number of the device to which alarms are to be sent. Range 1, 4 to
119 excluding 10. 0 specifies the local LAN.
5. Click OK.
6. Enable/disable the required alarms.
3. In one of the lists at the top of the dialogue box click the alarm group module containing the alarms that are
to be enabled/disabled.
4. Click the alarms that are to be enabled/disabled. The selected alarms will be highlighted. More than one
alarm can be selected by dragging the mouse over the required alarms, and then releasing the mouse button,
or by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required alarms. A range of alarms can be selected by
holding down the SHIFT key, and then clicking the first and last alarm in the range. Clicking Select All will
select all the alarms in the group displayed above. If required, the alarms displayed can be filtered to show
types of alarms by clicking the appropriate button in the Filter area.
5. Right-click one of the selected alarms and click Enable Alarms or Disable Alarms.
6. Repeat steps (3) to (5) until the alarms have been enabled/disabled as required.
7. Click OK.
4. From the lists at the top of the dialogue box the click the 2 alarm group modules between which the alarms
are to be moved.
When initially setting up the alarm handling groups, all the alarms will be assigned to default alarm group
module (g1 for IQ3 and IQECO controllers, and g0 for pre IQ3 controllers). Therefore, initially one of the
modules selected above should be the default alarm group module.
5. Click the alarm(s) that are to be moved into a different group. The selected alarms will be highlighted. More
than one alarm can be selected by dragging the mouse over the required alarms, and then releasing the mouse
button, or by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the required alarms. A range of alarms can be selected
by holding down the SHIFT key, and then clicking the first and last alarm in the range. Clicking Select All
will select all the alarms in the group displayed above. If required, the alarms displayed can be filtered to
show specific types of alarms by clicking the appropriate button in the Filter area.
3. In the I/O Module Setup box click the I/O module to which modules are to be assigned. If the required I/O
module is not available, it should be added.
4. In the I/O Assignment box click the module(s) that are to be assigned to the I/O module. To select a range
of modules, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the first and last module in the range. To select more than
one module, hold down the CTRL key, and click the required modules. Clicking Sensor, Digin, or Driver
will restrict the type of modules displayed in the I/O Assignment box. To restrict the display to modules that
have not been assigned to an I/O module click Not Set. To display the antiphase channel for a driver, select
the Show Antiphase check box. The list can be sorted by clicking on the top of each column.
5. Click Assign (IQ3/4). The selected modules will automatically be assigned to the I/O module using the next
spare I/O channels.
To assign a specific I/O channel to an input/output the I/O channel for the sensor, digital input or driver must
be specified by editing the module as described in the 'Assign I/O Channels By Editing the Modules' section
of this manual.
3. In the I/O Assignment box click the module inputs/outputs that are to be unassigned to the I/O module. To
select a range hold down the SHIFT key, and click the first and last item in the range. To select more than
one hold down the CTRL key, and click the required modules.
Clicking Sensor, Digin, or Driver will restrict the type of modules displayed in the I/O Assignment box.
To display the antiphase channel for a driver, select the Show Antiphase check box. The list can be sorted
by clicking on the top of each column.
4. Click Unassign.
5. Click Exit.
3. Edit the module’s parameters as required. , , and enable the display attributes to be specified. Clicking
will check all the check boxes. Clicking will clear all the check boxes, and clicking will return the
display setting to the current defaults.
Note: Clicking will set the default display options for the module to the ones currently selected.
4. Once all the parameters have been set up correctly click OK.
Note: Performing this action on an undefined connective enables it to be defined.
The values of a group of parameters in the strategy to be set using group edit.
3. In the Module Type box select the type of module that contains the parameter that is to be changed.
4. In the Parameter box select the parameter that is to be changed. The list only includes parameters common
to the selected module types.
5. If required the list of parameters can be filtered by value by entering the required value in the Filter box and
clicking on the =, >, or < buttons. C clears the filter. The parameter list now contains all the selected
parameters.
Button Description
Only parameters with a value equal to the value in the Filter box are displayed in the Parameters
=
list.
Only parameters with a value greater than the value in the Filter box are displayed in the
>
Parameters list.
Only parameters with a value greater than the value in the Filter box are displayed in the
<
Parameters list.
6. In the Parameters list click on the parameters that are to be changed. To select all parameters click Select
All, to deselect all parameter click Deselect All. To select more than one parameter hold down the CTRL
key and click the required parameters.
7. Once the required parameters have been selected enter the new value in the New Value box.
8. Click Apply New Value.
9. Click Close to close the dialogue box.
Group parameter edit can also be used live edit and live adjust mode in which case the values are sent straight to the
controller.
3. Click Channel, or Antiphase to specify whether the output channel or antiphase channel is to be changed.
4. Click OK. The Channel Output dialogue box is displayed.
5. Click the required channel. If necessary, use the scroll bars to locate the channel. Its number, type, and status
are displayed on the right of the dialogue box. The number specifies the channel number, the type specifies
whether it is analogue, digital, or internal, and the status specifies which driver is currently using the module.
Icons next to these parameters indicate this graphically.
Type
Analogue - can only be used for drivers with analogue outputs.
Digital Output - can only be used for drivers with digital outputs.
Universal output - can be used for drivers with either analogue, or digital outputs, providing the
hardware is set up accordingly.
Status
Free to be used
Used as a destination - Do not use again.
6. Click OK.
4. Click . This moves the selected sequence step to the Module's Sequence box.
Tip: If a module needs to be serviced more than once per cycle time, it can be added to the sequence table in more
than one place. However, it is recommended that this be done only in exceptional circumstances.
9.4.31.2 Change a Module's Sequence Step
Although when a module placed in the strategy its position in the sequence table is specified, it may be necessary to
change a module's sequence step to ensure that the strategy is executed in the correct order, or to set up fast sequencing
if it is required.
To change a module’s sequence step:
1. Display the strategy page containing the module whose sequence step is to be changed.
2. Right-click the module, and click Sequence Step. The Sequence Step dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Sequence Table box click the sequence step immediately before the first sequence step of the strategy
that is to be fast-sequenced, and click . This moves the selected sequence step to the Module's Sequence
box.
2. In the Label box at the top of the dialogue box enter or select the name for the Time Schedule module.
3. In the Pin Level box enter the PIN level required to make changes to occupation times (1 to 99).
4. Set up the operating times for each day as required by adding periods, and dragging each end of the bar to
specify the times. To add another period, click drag to the left, and then drag each end of the bar to specify
the times. The times can also be specified by clicking the required period and entering the start and stop times
in the Start Time and Stop Time boxes. To set occupation for the whole day, right-click the day and click
On all day. To set non-occupation for the whole day, right-click the day and click Off all day. Two periods
can be merged by right-clicking a period and clicking Merge Left, or Merge right. Occupation times from
one day can be copied and then pasted to another day, or the entire week, by right-clicking the day whose
times are to be copied, clicking Copy Day, right-clicking the day to which the times are to be pasted, and
clicking Paste Day. To paste the times to the entire week right-click and click Paste for week, and to paste
them just to the working week (Monday to Friday) week right-click and click Paste for working week. A
single period can be copied by right-clicking it, and clicking Copy, it can then be pasted where required in a
similar way to pasting the entire day. To set occupation for the entire week, right-click and click On all week.
To set non-occupation for the entire week, right-click and click Off all week.
Note: For pre IQ3 controllers there is a maximum of 3 periods.
6. Click Graphic or Data to specify the required display mode.
7. Click OK.
2. In the Label box enter or select the name for the module.
3. In the Pin Level box enter the PIN level required to make changes to occupation profile (1 to 99).
4. Specify date(s) the module's output is to be '1'.
Add a calendar entry:
Click +.
In the Label box enter a name for the entry.
In the Date option box select the required option.
Specify the date(s)
Date or date pattern
To specify a specific date:
Clear the Use Wildcard check box.
In the Start Date box select the start date.
To use wildcards:
Check the Use Wildcard check box.
In the Start Date box select the start date.
Select the required option in the Day box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the day part of the specified date.
Last Day> Uses the last day of the specified month.
Odd Days Uses the odd days.
Even Days Uses the even days.
As Specified Uses the day specified in the Start Date box.
Select the required option in the Month box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the month part of the specified date.
Odd Uses the odd months (January, March, May, July, September, November).
Even Uses the even days (February, April, June, August, October, December).
As Specified Uses the month specified in the Start Date box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the year part of the specified date.
As Specified Uses the year specified in the Start Date box.
Range of dates
Specify the start date:
To specify a specific date, clear the Use Wildcard check box and in the Start Date box select the start
date.
To use wildcards check the Use Wildcard check box. The Day, Month and Year boxes are displayed
with 'Unspecified' selected and this cannot be changed. When wild cards are used for the start date the
schedule will be ON from any date until the End Date.
Specify the end date:
To specify a specific date, clear the Use Wildcard check box and in the End Date box select the end date.
To use wildcards check the Use Wildcard check box. The Day, Month and Year boxes are displayed
with 'Unspecified' selected and this cannot be changed.
Week and Day
To use a specific day of the week, select the required day from the list in the Day of Week box. To use
any day, select 'Unspecified'.
To use a specific week of the month, select the required week from the list in the Week of Month box.
To use any week, select 'Unspecified'.
To use a specific month of the year, or any odd or even month select the required option from the list in
the Month of Year box. To use any month, select 'Unspecified'.
Note: Month of Year is a display name representing the 'Start Month' parameter.
Edit a calendar entry:
Click the calendar entry.
Edit the entry as necessary.
Delete a calendar entry:
Click the calendar entry.
Click -.
5. Click OK.
4. Click +.
5. Specify a label for the exception in the Label box.
6. Specify the priority in the Priority box (0 to 16).
7. Specify date(s) the exception is to apply.
Manual entry:
Select the required option in the Date Option box.
Specify the date(s)
Date or date pattern
To specify a specific date:
Clear the Use Wildcard check box.
In the Start Date box select the start date.
To use wildcards:
Check the Use Wildcard check box.
In the Start Date box select the start date.
Select the required option in the Day box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the day part of the specified date.
Option Description
Last Day Uses the last day of the specified month.
Odd Days Uses the odd days.
Even Days Uses the even days.
As Specified Uses the day specified in the Start Date box.
Select the required option in the Month box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the month part of the specified date.
Odd Uses the odd months (January, March, May, July, September, November).
Eve Uses the even days (February, April, June, August, October, December).
As Specified Uses the month specified in the Start Date box.
Select the required option in the Month box.
Option Description
Unspecified Ignores the year part of the specified date.
As Specified Uses the year specified in the Start Date box.
Range of dates
Specify the start date:
To specify a specific date, clear the Use Wildcard check box and in the Start Date box select the
start date.
To use wildcards check the Use Wildcard check box. The Day, Month and Year boxes are
displayed with 'Unspecified' selected and this cannot be changed. When wild cards are used for the
start date the schedule will be ON from any date until the End Date.
Specify the end date:
To specify a specific date, clear the Use Wildcard check box and in the End Date box select the
end date.
To use wildcards check the Use Wildcard check box. The Day, Month and Year boxes are
displayed with 'Unspecified' selected and this cannot be changed.
Week and Day
To use a specific day of the week, select the required day from the list in the Day of Week box. To use
any day, select 'Unspecified'.
To use a specific week of the month, select the required week from the list in the Week of Month box.
To use any week, select 'Unspecified'.
To use a specific month of the year, or any odd or even month select the required option from the list in
the Month of Year box. To use any month, select 'Unspecified'.
Note: Month of Year is a display name representing the 'Start Month' parameter.
Using a Calendar module:
Select the required Calendar module from the list in the Calendar box.
8. Specify the occupation time profile.
To specify the value for the entire day:
Right click the day and select Set value for entire day. The Add Time Value Pair dialogue box is
displayed.
2. In the calendar click the days the exception is to apply to. To select an exception that last more than a day
drag over the required days.
3. Click Add. The exception is added.
4. In the Label box in the Exceptions area, enter the name for the exception.
5. Check the day of the month the exception is to start in the Start Day box
6. Check the month the exception is to start in the Start Month box, and if necessary change it.
7. Check the day of the month the exception is to stop in the Stop Day box, and if necessary change it.
8. Check the month the exception is to stop in the Stop Month box, and if necessary change it.
9. In the Priority box click the priority of the exception.
10. In the Use box specify whether the exception is to occur, once only, be repeated every year, or not used at all
by clicking on the required option.
Option Description
Next Exception will occur only once.
Every Exception will be repeated every year.
Free Exception will not be used.
2. In the Label box in the Exceptions area, or in the calendar, click the exception that is to be deleted.
3. Click Delete. The exception is deleted.
4. Click OK.
2. In the Label box in the Exceptions area or in the calendar, click the exception that is to be edited.
3. The exception can now be edited in a similar way to when it was created.
4. In the Address box enter the Trend address of the NTD. (1 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10).
5. In the Name box enter a name for the NTD.
6. In the Details box enter details about the NTD.
7. In the Identifier box enter the NTD's identifier (30-characters).
8. If required in the Attribute 2 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
9. If required in the Attribute 3 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
10. If required in the Attribute 4 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
11. If required in the Attribute 5 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
12. If required in the Attribute 6 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
13. If required in the Attribute 7 box enter a 30-character attribute for the NTD. This can be used in conjunction
with the identifier and the other attributes to identify the NTD.
14. Specify the device to which the message is to be sent. It is recommended that the device instance is used, and
if the device to which the message is being sent uses automatic IP addressing the device instance must be
used. For devices that do not support device instance addressing the BACnet address is used. However, this
is not suitable when automatic IP addressing is being used.
NTDs can be quickly added for all the BACnet devices on a BACnet network by dragging the BACnet
network from the System View to the BACnet LAN in the Device View. This will display the Starting Node
Number dialogue box which enables the network address of the first NTD to be created to be specified. A
separate NTD will be added for each BACnet device, the network address being incremented for each one.
5. In the Node box enter the network address of the NTD, or if an entire BACnet network has been added the
network address of the first NTD.
6. If the MAC address information is to be included select the Include MAC address details in devices check
box.
Note: MAC addresses should only be included when device ID addressing is not supported by the BACnet
devices.
7. Click OK. The NTDs are created, the device instance, network number, MAC address, vendor name, model
name and firmware version are imported.
8. Edit the NTDs to specify their identifier and attributes.
9.4.37.2.1.3 Delete an NTD
To delete an NTD:
1. Display the Project View.
2. In the Device View right-click the NTD that is to be deleted, and click Delete Device. A dialogue box is
displayed asking for confirmation of the deletion.
3. Click Yes to delete it.
Icon Description
Enables a Data From IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables a Data To IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables a Global To IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables a Minimum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables a Maximum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables a Sum IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
Enables an Average IC Comms module to be added to the strategy page.
The IC Comms Number dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Module Number box specify the module's number. Clicking will check to see that the module
number is valid, and unused.
4. If adding data to, data from, or global to ic comms modules specify the output type by selecting the Analogue,
Byte, or Bit.
5. Click OK. The cursor will change to a hand .
6. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the
page.
Note: If auto edit is enabled, the Parameters dialogue box for the module will be displayed.
In the Module Type box select the type of module to which information is to be written.
In the Number box enter the number of the module to which information is to be written.
In the Parameter box specify the module parameter that is to be written. To specify other values, select
the Advanced check box, and in the Reference box enter the code for the required value.
Note that care should be taken when using the advanced option, to prevent making unwanted changes to
parameters.
If Protocol is Trend:
<Module>(<Module Parameter>)
<Module> specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1 specifies
sensor 1). For details of the module identifier, see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Parameter> specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. the value of
a sensor). The module parameter is specified using the parameter identifier (ID), and can be any
parameter available within the specified module.
E.g. K1V to specify the value of knob 1
If referencing a byte, the following format should be used:
B<Module Number>S
<Module Number> is the number of the module
E.g. B3S
If referencing a bit, the following format should be used:
B<Module Number>S<Bit Number>
<Module Number> is the number of the module. <Bit Number> is the number of the required bit.
E.g. B3S3
Note that if compatibility with pre IQ3 controllers is required Analogue, Bit, and Byte references must
be used.
If Protocol is BACnet:
<object type><instance><property>
<object type> specifies the type of object (e.g. AV specifies an analogue value object). <instance> is the
number of the required object. <property> specifies the parameter within the module that is to be
displayed (e.g. PV specifies the present value).
In the Module Type box select the type of module to which information is to be written.
In the Number box enter the number of the module to which information is to be written.
Click OK to return to the Parameters dialogue box.
Pre IQ3 Controllers
For analogue type modules in the Remote Analogue box enter the number of the analogue node that is
to be written.
For byte type modules in the Remote Byte box enter the number of the byte that is to be written.
For bit type modules in the Remote Bit box enter the bit that is to be written in the form:
<nn>,<yy>
Where <nn> is the byte containing the bit that is to be written and <yy> is the bit.
Note: The value that is to be written to can be specified by dragging the value from the System View on to
the module in the strategy. If a value from a Trend device, or a BACnet device for which an NTD has been
specified is dragged on to a module the values of the Remote LAN, Remote Address, and Remote Node
parameters will be overwritten those of the dragged value. If an NTD has not been set up for a BACnet device
only the value of the Remote Node parameter will be overwritten.
13. Specify the value to be read.
Data From
Specify the value that is to be read IQ4, IQ3 controllers, IQECO controllers or Pre IQ3 controllers.
IQ4, IQ3 Controllers
To specify normal values:
Click Look Up. The Module Reference Helper dialogue box is displayed.
If Protocol is Trend in the Module Type box select the type of module from which information is to be
read, or if Protocol is BACnet in the Object Type box select the type of BACnet object from which
information is to be read.
If Protocol is Trend in the Number box enter the number of the module from which information is to be
read, or if Protocol is BACnet in the Instance box enter the instance of the BACnet object from which
information is to be read.
If Protocol is Trend in the Parameter box specify the module parameter that is to be read.
Click OK to return to the Parameters dialogue box.
In the Module Type box select the type of module from which information is to be read,
In the Number box enter the number of the module from which information is to be read.
In the Module Type box select the type of module to which information is to be written.
In the Number box enter the number of the module to which information is to be written.
In the Parameter box specify the module parameter that is to be written. To specify other values, select
the Advanced check box, and in the Reference box enter the code for the required value.
Note that care should be taken when using the advanced option, to prevent making unwanted changes
to parameters.
If Protocol is Trend:
<Module>(<Module Parameter>)
<Module> specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1 specifies
sensor 1). For details of the module identifier, see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Parameter> specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. the value of
a sensor). The module parameter is specified using the parameter identifier (ID), and can be any
parameter available within the specified module.
E.g. K1V to specify the value of knob 1
If referencing a byte, the following format should be used:
B<Module Number>S
<Module Number> is the number of the module
E.g. B3S
If referencing a bit, the following format should be used:
3. In the Module Number box enter the number of the user module that is to be added.
4. Click OK. The dialogue box will be closed.
5. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the
page. If auto edit is enabled, the Parameters dialogue box for the module is displayed.
7. If the user is to be the Guest User select the Guest User (Not Logged In) check box.
8. IQ4 v3.30 or greater only. If the user is to only have access to the controller's web pages, select the Web Use
Only check box.
9. Enter the user module's username in the Name box.
10. Enter the user module's password in the Password box.
11. If Web Use Only is not selected enter the 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a
display, or must be sent by a tool /supervisor to authorise a change in the Pin box.
12. In the Level box enter the PIN level to be assigned to the guest user (Range = -1 to 99).
13. In the Timeout box enter the length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off
(Range = 1 to 15 minutes).
14. If editable select the required home page from the list in the Home Page box. To specify a GraphIQ, click
and select the required page from the dialogue box that is displayed. To specify other pages, enter the
required code.
15. For IQ4 and IQ3 controllers with v1.3 firmware or greater specify the information the user has access to
when the controller is accessed from a web browser by selecting the required check boxes.
3. In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be defined.
4. In the Level box enter the required PIN level (0 to 99).
5. In the Pin box enter the PIN number (4-digits).
6. Repeat steps (3) to (5) until all the required user modules have been set up.
7. Click OK.
Caution the controller's security is enabled as soon as a user module is set up; it is therefore important that the
first user module set up has a PIN level of 99.
9.4.38.4 Add User Modules to IQECO Strategy
User modules in IQECO strategy enable PIN protection to be set up, which prevents unauthorised changes from being
made to both the strategy, and items like setpoints. A user module defines the PIN required to log on and authorise
the change.
To add a User module to IQECO strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which user modules are to be set up.
2. Right-click anywhere on the page, point to Users and click User. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.
3. Click Disabled to enable the security. The button will change to Enabled and the Pin box made available.
4. In the Pin box enter the PIN number (4-digits).
Note: The PIN must not be set to '0000'.
5. Click OK.
9.4.38.5 Delete User Modules from IQ2 Strategy
To delete User modules from IQ2 strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which user modules are to be deleted.
2. Right-click anywhere on the page, point to Users and click User. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be deleted.
4. In the Level box set the PIN level to 0.
5. In the Pin box set the PIN to 0.
6. Click OK.
Caution if PIN protection is to be used at least one user module with a PIN level of 99 must be set up.
9.4.38.6 Delete User Modules from IQECO Strategy
To delete User modules from IQECO strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which user modules are to be deleted.
3. Click Enabled to enable the security. The button will change to Disabled.
4. Click OK.
9.4.38.7 Edit User Modules in IQ2 Strategy
To edit user modules in IQ2 strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which user modules are to be set up.
2. Right-click anywhere on the page, point to Users and click User. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the User Number box use the arrows to specify the user module that is to be edited.
4. Specify the PIN level, and PIN number as required.
5. Click OK.
Note: Setting the PIN level and PIN number to 0 removes that user module from the strategy.
9.4.38.8 Edit User Modules in IQECO Strategy
To edit IQECO user modules:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which User modules are to be set up.
2. Right-click anywhere on the page, point to Users and click User. The User Pins dialogue box is displayed.
2. In the Web Server Mode box specify the web server operation.
Option Description
Off Both the HTTP and HTTPS web servers are OFF
HTTPS (HTTP HTTPS web server is ON and requests to the HTTP web server are redirected to the
Redirect) HTTP server, HTTP server is OFF
HTTPS Only HTTPS web server is ON, HTTP server is OFF
HTTP & HTTPS Both the HTTP and HTTPS web servers are ON (not recommended)
HTTP Only Only the HTTP web server is ON (not recommended)
3. If the HTTP web server is being used (not recommended) specify the port number for the HTTP web server
in the Web Server Port box.
4. If the HTTPS web server is being used specify the port number for the HTTPS web server in the Secure
Web Server Port box.
Note: Use of the IQ4’s HTTP web server will reduce the IQ4’s security.
For details of Type 4 (Ethernet IP) Network modules and their parameters see Ethernet IP Network Modules.
3. In the Module Number box enter the number of the CNC User module that is to be added.
4. Click OK. The dialogue box will be closed.
5. Move the cursor to the position where the module is to be placed and click. The module is placed on the
page. If auto edit is enabled, the CNC User dialogue box is displayed.
6. Double click the module to display the User Parameters dialogue box if it is not already displayed.
3. If the Plant View has been set up, it can be used to form the structure required for the display and directory
modules. To do this in the Plant View box click the required part of the Plant View, and drag it onto the
Root area of the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse button in the correct place.
4. Add any other directory modules that are required.
5. Add any other display modules that are required. The Free Modules Count area will display the number of
free display and directory modules. If you use more modules than are available in the controller, you will not
be allowed to continue until the module count is zero or greater.
6. If necessary, change the order of the display modules.
7. Edit the display and directory modules. See the 'Edit a Directory Module in IQ3 or IQ4 Strategy', 'Edit IQ2
Directory Modules', 'Edit IQ2 Display Module Parameters', 'Edit a Dynamic Display Module', and 'Edit a
Static Display Modules' sections of this manual for more details.
Note: The parameters of IQ3 and IQ4 display and directory modules can also be edited using the Graphical
Display Page Editor.
8. Click OK.
The display and directory module structure in another controller can be imported, to save time when setting up the
display and directory module structure.
3. In the Display and Directory View box right-click P0, or the directory module to which the new module is
to be added, and click Insert Directory. The Directory Item dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Title box enter the name for the directory module. Maximum length 30-characters.
5. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to access the module (1 to 99), or use to set it.
6. Select the Colour check box then click Change to display the Color dialogue box, then click the required
background colour and click OK to return to the Styling dialogue box. Custom colours can be used by
clicking Define Custom Colors>> in the Color dialogue box. If a background colour is not required, clear
the Colour check box.
7. If required specify the backdrop for the page by clicking Change and selecting the required backdrop from
the list in the dialogue box that is displayed.
8. In the Refresh Rate box enter the required refresh rate in seconds.
3. If necessary, add the directory module to which the dynamic display item is to be added.
4. In the Display Items box click the item that the display module is to access and drag it on onto the required
directory module in the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse. If required, the items
displayed in the Display Items box can be limited to specific item types by clicking the appropriate button.
Option Description
Digin Displays all digital inputs in the strategy.
Driver Displays all drivers in the strategy.
Knob Displays all knobs in the strategy.
Sensor Displays all sensors in the strategy.
All Displays all items in the strategy.
Switch Displays all switches in the strategy.
Time Schedule Displays all time schedules in the strategy.
5. Click OK.
3. If necessary, add the directory module to which the static display item is to be added.
4. Right-click the directory module that is to contain the static display module and click Insert Static Display
Item. The Display Item dialogue box is displayed.
8. In the URL Type box click the required type of link from the list.
Option Description
Unknown Link Used to create a link to of a type not covered by the other URL types. E.g. a link to an FTP
Type site.
Used to create a link to a specified email address. When the link is selected the default email
Email Link
editor will be loaded with a new email loaded with the address already defined.
Website Link Used to create a link to a specified URL.
Directory Link Used to create a link to a page of information held within the controller itself.
9. In the URL box enter the destination of the link. What is entered depends on the type of URL selected above
see the table below for more information.
3. In the Display and Directory View box right-click Root, or the directory module to which the new module
is to be added, and click Insert Directory. The Display and Directory dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Label box enter the name for the directory module (Max 20-characters).
5. In the Pin Level box enter the PIN level required to access the module (1 to 99).
6. Click OK.
3. If necessary, add the directory module to which the display module is to be added.
4. In the Display Items box click the item that the display module is to access and drag it on onto the required
directory module in the Display and Directory View box, and release the mouse. If required, the items
displayed in the Display Items box can be limited to specific item types by clicking the appropriate button.
Option Description
Digin Displays all digital inputs in the strategy.
Driver Displays all drivers in the strategy.
>Knob Displays all knobs in the strategy.
Sensor Displays all sensors in the strategy.
All Displays all items in the strategy.
Switch Displays all switches in the strategy.
Time Schedule Displays all Time Schedules in the strategy.
5. Edit the module's parameters.
6. For Time Schedules, it is necessary to specify whether the display module displays the standard week, or the
current week.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
display module that is to be moved is displayed.
4. Hold down the SHIFT key and click the display module that is to be moved.
5. Drag the module up/down to the required position.
6. Release the mouse button.
7. Click OK.
9.4.41.3 Edit Modules
9.4.41.3.1 Edit a Directory Module in IQ3 or IQ4 Strategy
The parameters of directory modules in IQ3 and IQ4 strategy can be edited.
Note: Editing these modules changes the graphic display page that the module defines.
To edit a directory module in IQ3 or IQ4 strategy:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller containing the directory module.
2. Click , or on the Tools menu click Display and Directory Setup. The Display and Directory Setup
dialogue box is displayed.
3. Double click the module or right-click and click Edit Parameters. The Directory Item dialogue box is
displayed.
4. Edit the module's parameters as described in 'Specify the name of the module, PIN level, background colour,
backdrop, refresh rate, and size.
To specify the module's name:
In the Title box enter the name of the directory. Maximum length 30-characters.
Note that if engineering directories that are to be navigated using an IQView then it is recommended that
the length of the label does not exceed 12-characters
To specify the module's PIN level:
In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to access the module (1 to 99).
To specify the module's background colour:
Select the Colour check box. If a background colour is not required, clear the Colour check box.
Note that clearing the Colour check box will disable the Change button as it is not necessary to specify a
colour.
Click Change. The Color dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
display module that is to be set up is displayed.
5. In the Item Reference box enter the required item reference. This should be in the form shown below:
<Module><Module Parameter>
<Module> specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g. S1 specifies
sensor 1). For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Parameter> specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. the value of a
sensor). The module parameter is specified using the parameter identifier (ID), and can be any parameter
available within the specified module. For details of the parameters available for each module and their
identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual.
If the module parameter is not specified, the default overview parameters for the module type will be
displayed. E.g. S1 would display the sensor label, value, and units. The table below lists the overview
parameters for each module type.
6. In the Pin level box enter the PIN level required to view/use the module (1 to 99), or use to set it.
7. Specify the foreground colour for the item by selecting the Foreground Colour check box, clicking Change
to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required, colour and then clicking OK to return to the Styling
dialogue box. If a foreground colour is not required, clear the Foreground Colour check box.
8. Specify the colour used for the item when it is in an alarm by selecting InAlarm Colour check box, clicking
Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required, colour and then clicking OK to return to
the Styling dialogue box. If a background colour is not required, clear the InAlarm Colour check box.
9. Specify the background ground colour for the item by selecting the Background Colour check box, clicking
Change to display the Color dialogue box, clicking the required, colour and then clicking OK to return to
the Styling dialogue box. If a background colour is not required, clear the Background Colour check box
10. In the Font Type box click the required font.
11. In the Font Size box click the required font size.
12. In the Width box enter the width of the object in pixels. To size the text to fit click Width.
13. If the object width has been specified specifically in the Text Align box, click the required text alignment.
You should ensure that the Width check box is cleared.
14. If a link to the items detail page is required select the Make a link to the item’s detail page check box.
15. Specify the position on the page in the X and Y boxes.
16. Click OK.
17. Click OK.
3. Double click the module or right-click and click Edit Parameters. The Display Item dialogue box is
displayed.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
directory module that is to be edited is displayed.
4. Right-click the module that is to be edited, and click Edit Parameters the Display and Directory dialogue
box is displayed which enables the module's parameters to be specified.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
display module that is to be edited is displayed.
4. Right-click the module that is to be edited, and click Edit Parameters. A dialogue box is displayed which
enables the module's parameters to be specified. For most this is just the PIN level required to access the
module, but for Time Schedules it is also access to specify whether the module displays the time schedule's
standard or current week.
Dialogue box for editing most modules.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
display module that is to be is to be deleted is displayed.
4. Right-click the module and that is to be deleted, and click Delete Display Module. The module will be
deleted.
5. Click OK.
3. In the Display and Directory View box navigate down the display and directory module structure until the
directory module that is to be is to be deleted is displayed.
4. Right-click the module and that is to be deleted, and click Delete Directory. The module will be deleted.
5. Click OK.
Note: Every item below that directory will also be deleted.
5. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
6. Click Save.
4. If the imported display and directory module structure is to be appended to the existing structure, select the
Append Import check box. If this box is not selected the imported data will replace any existing display and
directory module structure.
6. In the file list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the drive,
or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file is
displayed.
7. Click Open.
5. Right-click the directory module that represents the page that is to be set up and click Edit Web Page. The
Graphical Display Page Editor is displayed with the selected page.
6. Right-click the page and click Properties. The Directory Item dialogue box is displayed.
7. Specify the page’s title, PIN level, background colour, backdrop, refresh rate, and size.
Option Description
Normal
Sets the value to operate normally i.e. no override and module is enabled.
Operation
Disable Module,
Disables the module and sets the value with the one in the Override Value box.
Set Output
Sets the module into override using the value in the Override Value box. The
Use Override
default is to the override value set in the strategy, changing it will change the value
Value
in the strategy.
Note: Depending on the selected value not all the options will be available.
Click OK
GraphIQs pages can be viewed by right clicking device 20 on the 'simIQ' site in the System View and
selecting Web page.
The current page including the live values can be printed by right clicking the page pointing to Page, and
clicking Print Page. A sensor or plot can be graphed by right clicking the module on the strategy page and
selecting Graph from the displayed menu. Live edit can be turned off by clicking . When in simulation
mode with Live Values only the background of the strategy page changes to .
5. To exit simulation mode, click . If the modules are left overridden or disabled a warning will be given
enabling all modules to have their overrides removed, or the module to be re-enabled.
3. Click , or on the Comms menu click Download. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed.
IQSET automatically inserts the LAN number, and address of the controller whose strategy file is to be
downloaded.
IQSET will check that the controller's time is within one minute of the PC time if there is a difference.
If there is a difference a dialogue box asking if you want to set the controller's time to match the PC is
displayed. Click Yes to adjust the time or No to leave the controller's time unchanged.
Note that the appearance of this dialogue box is different for different types of controller.
Click the required file in the list. To select a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in
box, and double-click the folders in the folder list to select the required directory.
Click Open.
To specify the download file:
Click Change or . The Open dialogue box is displayed.
Click the required file in the list. To select a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in
box, and double-click the folders in the folder list to select the required directory.
Click Open.
3. Click New.
4. In the PCN/Details box enter details about the issue.
5. In the Pages Affected box enter the numbers of the strategy pages that have been changed since the last
issue.
6. In the Date Approved box enter the approval date.
7. In the Approved box enter the name of the person who approved the strategy.
8. Click OK.
To delete the previous issue details:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which issue details are to be deleted.
2. Right-click the page and click Issue Details, or on the Device menu click Issue Details. The Drawing Issue
dialogue box is displayed.
3. Click Delete Last.
4. Click OK.
3. In the Name box click the required printer. Clicking Properties enables the printer properties to be adjusted.
IQSET will default to the Windows default printer, if a different printer is to always be used, it can be
specified as the default printer for IQSET.
4. In the Print what area specify what is to be printed by selecting the appropriate check box. To select all
options click Select All.
5. In the Print range area click the appropriate option to specify the range of pages that are to be printed.
6. In the Order box click the appropriate option to specify if all, odd, or even pages in the range are to be
printed.
7. In the Number of copies box enter the number of copies required.
8. Click OK.
Tip: clicking will automatically print all the project documentation for the selected controller.
3. In the Project box click the project that is to be exported from the list.
4. In the Destination box enter the destination of the zip file. Clicking on Browse displays the Browse for
Folder dialogue box, which allows the destination to be specified by viewing the directory structure on the
PC. To locate the required directory, click the directory, and then click OK to return to the Project Export
(ZIP) dialogue box.
5. To exclude all BAK file from the backup select the Exclude Backup Files check box.
6. Click OK. The project will be exported to a zip file named <Project Name>.Set.zip. A dialogue box is
displayed indicating the progress of the export. When the process is complete, another dialogue box is
displayed.
7. Click OK.
Note: It is possible to export a project a project while IQSET is running by displaying the Project View, and on the
File menu click Open/New Project to display the SET dialogue box.
10 IQ INTERFACING
IQ interfacing (/INT) is an optional feature that enables easy integration of Serial (RS485)and IP MODBUS devices
to the IQ4 and M-bus for v4.30 or greater, enabling the IQ4 to read and write values directly. Standard strategy blocks,
available in IQSET, allow easy strategy configuration using drag & drop for common meters and VSDs.
For each device, there are two strategy blocks, one labelled 'Energy Only' the other just the name of the meter. The
'Energy Only' strategy block only obtain the meter’s energy reading. The other strategy block reads the most
commonly used parameters.
If the required device is not available as a strategy block, or the block does not completely suit your requirements it
is easy to create strategy to interface with it by:
Adding and configuring an interface network module.
Adding and configuring a Modbus Interface module.
To use the IQ interfacing strategy blocks:
1. Ensure the IQ4 that is to be used has the IQ interfacing feature licenced.
2. Create the controller in IQSET. Ensure that the firmware variant is set to 4.2 or greater, and the IQ
Interfacing option selected.
3. Add a Modbus Serial, Modbus IP or M-bus Interface network module for the communications port that is to
be used by the interface and configure it as necessary to enable communications with the device (e.g. Baud
Rate). Refer the device documentation for details.
Note: Only one interface network module can be connected to a physical port. Therefore all devices
connected to that port must be capable of operating with the same network settings, e.g. baud rate.
Note: The RS485, RS232 ports cannot be used for XNC, MS/TP, or MODBUS at the same time.
11 COMPARING STRATEGIES
IQSET enables strategies to be uploaded from IQ controllers and compared with the strategy held by IQSET. The
compare process will compare any module parameter that can be configured in the IQSET strategy with the strategy
in the controller. IQSET can either compare a single strategy, or multiple strategies.
11.1 Compare Single Strategies
IQSET enables the strategy held in a project for an IQ controller to be compared with a data file uploaded from a
controller.
A tab delimited file (named LxxxNyyy.rep, where xxx = LAN number, and yyy = controller number) is produced
listing any differences between the strategy in the project, and the chosen file. If required, IQSET can update the
strategy in the project to make it the same as the file.
Note: It is only possible to compare a SCN file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware below version 2.0, and to
compare an IQF file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware of version 2.0 or above.
If required, the strategies of several controllers can be compared with the appropriate uploaded file.
To compare the strategy for a controller:
1. Upload the strategy from the required controller. For IQ4 controllers the file must be uploaded as an IQ4 file.
For IQ3 controllers the file must be uploaded as an IQ3 file For IQECO controllers the files the file must be
uploaded as an IQe file. For pre IQ3 controllers with version 2.0 firmware or greater, the file must be
uploaded as an IQ2 file. For pre IQ3 controllers with older firmware (less than v2.0) the file must be uploaded
in SCN format.
2. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the strategy is to be compared.
3. On the File menu point to Compare and. The Open dialogue box is displayed.
6. Click the required options. Update Database will cause IQSET to update its strategy to be the same as the
chosen file. Backup Database ensures that IQSET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it
allowing the strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable. Print Report File causes IQSET
to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified printer.
Note: If none of the options are selected, a .rep file listing the difference between the strategies is created in
the directory for the LAN containing the device.
7. If the module positions are to be updated select the Update Module Positions check box. When selected,
modules will be relocated using the p, x, y values in the uploaded file. If unchecked unplaced modules with
p, x and y values will be placed onto the correct page and all other modules will appear in the 'Unplaced
Modules' list. If a module already exists on a page its position will not change. Modules that do not exist in
the compared file will not be removed and remain as they are. Compare will report all module position
changes.
8. Click Start. The comparison will be performed. If IQSET cannot complete the comparison for one of the
selected controllers, a will be placed next to it in the Device View and a message box explaining the problem
displayed.
If the Update Database is selected, IQSET will modify the strategy pages and linking to reflect the changes.
Modules that have been added to the strategy will only be correctly positioned on the page, and linked if the
x, y, and page parameters have been specified (IQ4, IQ3 controllers and IQ2 firmware version 2.1 and above).
Modules that do not have the x, y, and page parameters will not be placed on a page, but will be added to the
strategy as unplaced modules. These modules are used in the strategy, and linked to other modules, but they
do not appear on any of the strategy pages. It is necessary to add any unplaced modules to a page and make
any links manually. If the strategy contains NTD modules there may be differences between NTD modules
in the controller, and those in the IQSET database, it is recommended that you view the NTD List for each
IQ3/BACnet controller that was compared and resolve any differences.
Differences between the NTD modules in the controller and the NTD modules in the IQSET database are
indicated by different colours. Selecting the Show Mismatches Only check box will change the display so
that only NTD modules for which there are problems are displayed.
Colour Description
There are differences between the NTD modules in the controller and the NTD modules in the
Red
IQSET database.
Blue The NTD module is missing from controller.
2. Resolve any differences between the NTD modules in the controller, and the NTD modules in the IQSET
database. There 2 types of differences, missing modules, and modules with differences.
Missing modules:
In the Controller List box click on the NTD module that is to be resolved. The details about the module
are displayed at the bottom of Controller NTD List dialogue box. The information from the controller
is displayed on the left (marked Strategy), and the information stored in the IQSET database is on the
right (marked Project).
Review all the information and decide which is to be used. To use the information from the controller
click Copy to Project >>>>, to use the information from the IQSET database <<<< Copy to Strategy.
12 UPDATE A PROJECT
The project update feature enables a project to be updated with information from strategy files (IQ4, IQ3, IQe, IQ2,
or SCN) uploaded for the site. It combines IQSET's import and compare functions. If a strategy file exists in the upload
directory, but there is no matching controller in the project it will be imported into the project (not SCN files), and if
the there is a matching controller in the project the uploaded file is compared with the strategy information in the
IQSET database.
A tab delimited file (named LxxxNyyy.rep, where xxx = LAN number, and yyy = controller number) is produced
listing any differences between the strategy in the project, and the chosen file. If required, IQSET can update the
strategy in the project to make it the same as the file.
Note: It is only possible to compare a SCN file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware below version 2.0, and to
compare an IQF file with a pre IQ3 controller with firmware of version 2.0 or above.
To update a project:
1. Upload the strategy files from the controllers that are required in the project.
2. Open the required project.
3. On the Project menu click Project Update. The Project Update dialogue box is displayed.
The dialogue box contains a list of the files available in the project's upload directory and the options available
for each one (import or compare). For compare the firmware version is also checked and an error message
displayed if the uploaded file's firmware version is greater than the firmware version of the strategy in
IQSET's database. The directory in which IQSET looks for the uploaded files can be changed.
To specify the directory:
Click Change. The Browse For Folder dialogue box is displayed.
Option Description
>Update
Causes IQSET to update its strategy to be the same as the chosen file.
Database
Backup Ensures that IQSET makes a copy of the existing strategy before updating it allowing the
Database strategy to be restored if the updated strategy is not suitable.
Print Report Causes IQSET to print out a report of the differences between the strategies on the specified
File printer.
When selected, modules will be relocated using the p, x, y values in the uploaded file. If
Update unchecked unplaced modules with p, x and y values will be placed onto the correct page and
Module all other modules will appear in the 'Unplaced Modules' list. If a module already exists on a
Positions page, then its position will not change. Modules that do not exist in the compared file will not
be removed and remain as they are. Compare will report all module position changes.
6. Click OK. The project will be updated accordingly.
If the Update Database is selected, IQSET will modify the strategy pages and linking to reflect the changes.
Modules that have been added to the strategy will only be correctly positioned on the page, and linked if the
x, y, and page parameters have been specified (IQ3 controllers and IQ2 firmware version 2.1 and above).
Modules that do not have the x, y, and page parameters will not be placed on a page, but will be added to the
strategy as unplaced modules. These modules are used in the strategy, and linked to other modules, but they
do not appear on any of the strategy pages. It is necessary to add any unplaced modules to a page and make
any links manually. If the strategy contains NTD modules there may be differences between NTD modules
in the controller, and those in the IQSET database, it is recommended that you view the NTD List for each
/BACnet controller that was compared and resolve any differences.
If a module is to be linked to a module on a different page, the connective will not be added by IQSET; this
must be done manually using the unplaced modules list.
5. To select a different controller, edit the LAN, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.
6. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site.
7. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection
is to be used in the Standard Comms box click the required connection. If none of the standard connections
are suitable the connection can be specified by clicking Edit Connection Details. This displays the
Connection Wizard which enables the connection to be specified using the TUA Editor or the Connection
Wizard.
To change the site's connection using the TUA Editor:
Click Edit Connection details. The Connection Wizard is displayed.
Select the Launching TUA Editor option.
Click Next>. The TUA Editor Window is displayed.
Use the TUA Editor to specify the connection.
14 LIVE EDITING
14.1 Live Editing Mode
IQSET enables a strategy to be modified in the controller (not IQECOs) at the same time as the drawing on the strategy
page is modified.
The IQSET Live Edit feature not only enables knobs and switches to be changed like Live Values, but also enables
any strategy changes to be made. The changes made to the strategy page are then downloaded to the controller. These
changes may include parameter changes, deletion, and addition of modules, and modification, deletion, or addition of
connections.
To see the effects of the strategy changes on the strategy page the live value commissioning feature may also be
selected. Using these two features together enables any strategy design faults to be detected, modified, and the effects
of the changes observed.
The IQSET strategy and the controller strategy must be identical or some of the values may not make sense. IQSET
will check to see if there are any differences, and if necessary display a warning message.
For IQ3 and IQ4 controllers IQSET will also perform a background compare which provides a detailed comparison
between the strategy in IQSET’s database, and the strategy running in the controller. IQSET checks that the module
parameters and values in the controller are the same as those in IQSET for each module on the page. Modules for
which the data does not match are highlighted in red, those for which the data is the same are highlighted in green.
Warning when using this feature the controller will be controlling any HVAC equipment to which it is connected;
using incorrect strategy may result in damage to HVAC equipment or injury to people.
Note: When using Live Edit on Time Schedule modules in IQ4 controllers with v3.40 and v3.41 firmware message
warning that parameter mismatches have been found with at least one module on the page. If this error occurs upgrade
the controller's firmware to the latest version.
To use live editing mode:
1. Open the project containing the required controller.
2. Ensure that the strategy held by IQSET (displayed on the page) and that in the controller are identical by
downloading the strategy first, or running a compare.
3. Ensure that there is a comms connection available that will enable IQSET to communicate with the controller.
4. Display the strategy page that contains the required piece of strategy.
5. Click or on the Comms menu click Live Edit. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed. IQSET
automatically inserts the LAN number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed,
and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it.
Note: If the PIN specified is incorrect a message is displayed to indicate that you will be unable to make any
changed.
10. You can now make changes to the strategy such as editing module parameters, adding/deleting modules,
linking the strategy; in the same way as for engineering IQ controllers and they will be sent directly to the
controller. When in live edit the background colour changes to light blue. If required live values can be
displayed while in live edit mode by clicking . When in live edit mode with live values displayed the value
of module outputs highlighted in blue can be set manually.
Option Description
Normal
Sets the value to operate normally i.e. no override and module is enabled.
Operation
Disable Module,
Disables the module and sets the value to the one in the Override Value box.
Set Output
Sets the module into override using the value in the Override Value box. The
Use Override
default is to the override value set in the strategy, changing it will change the value
Value
in the strategy.
Note: Depending on the selected value not all the options will be available.
Click OK.
The current page including the live values can be printed by right clicking the page pointing to Page, and
clicking Print Page. A sensor or plot can be graphed by right clicking the module on the strategy page and
selecting Graph from the displayed menu.
For IQ4, IQ3, and IQeco controllers a dialogue box that provides a comparison between the value of
parameters in the IQ SET project and those in the controller can be displayed by right clicking on the module
and selecting Module Properties - compare. If required changes can be made to the values of the parameters
in the controller. It is not possible to modify the values in the IQ SET project.
To stop live editing click . If the modules are left overridden or disable a warning will be given enabling
all modules to have their overrides removed, or the module to be re-enabled.
Note: If the PIN specified is incorrect a message is displayed to indicate that you will be unable to make any
changed.
10. You can now edit module parameters in the same way as for engineering IQ controllers and they will be sent
directly to the controller. If required live values can be displayed while in live adjustment mode by clicking
.
The current page including the live values can be printed by right clicking the page pointing to Page, and
clicking Print Page. A sensor can be graphed by right clicking the module on the strategy page and selecting
Graph from the displayed menu.
A dialogue box that provides a comparison between the value of parameters in the project and those in the
controller can be displayed by right clicking on the module and selecting Module Properties - compare. If
required changes can be made to the values of the parameters in the controller. It is not possible to modify
the values in the project.
6. Click Terms and Conditions. The Terms and Conditions dialogue box is displayed.
7. Read the terms and conditions carefully. You must agree to them to be able to place an order for IQECO
controllers with a custom strategy.
8. If you agree with the terms and conditions the select the I agree to the above terms and conditions check
box. To continue with the order, you must agree to the terms and conditions and select the check box.
9. Click OK to return to the Custom Strategy Export dialogue box. The Export Directory box is now enabled.
10. If required change the directory to which the strategy file is to be exported by clicking , selecting required
directory from the dialogue box that is displayed and clicking OK.
11. If you do not want to launch your email client with a pre-configured email clear the Launch Email Client
with attached file check box.
12. Click OK. The strategy file will be exported and if the Launch Email Client with attached file check box
is selected an email will be displayed.
Do not rename the file that is created as the file name is used as part of the order process to verify that the
strategy has not been changed.
13. Complete the email with detail of the required order including order number, and number of controllers
required.
14. Send the email.
16 GENERAL OPERATIONS
16.1 Add a Connective
Connectives allow links to be made between modules on different pages, modules on the same page (where linking to
the module would make the strategy hard to understand), or to nodes that have been defined as connectives- see 'Add
an Undefined Connective to a Node' for pre IQ3 controllers, and to the various alarm status information (e.g. the status
of a loop’s PV Fail alarm) for other controllers.
To add a connective:
1. Display the strategy page to which the connective is to be added.
2. Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, point to Other and click Connective.
The Connectives dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and any nodes
that have been defined as connectives.
3. Click the module parameter, or node to which the connective is to point. If configuring an IQ4, IQ3 or IQECO
controller when you click a module or node any associated connectives will be displayed in the Associated
Connectives box. If required these can be selected instead. The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate
button making it easier to find the required module.
Icon Description
All connectives
Knob connectives
Sensor connectives
Icon Description
Switch connectives
Undefined connectives
System connectives
The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label, enter the required label in the box below
the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the
box below the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to
loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1.
4. Once the required module parameter is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand .
5. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on
the page.
Note: There is no need to set up the parameters for the connective because it is a link to a module, which has
already been defined.
6. Repeat steps (3) to (5) for any other connectives.
7. Click Exit.
16.2 Add a Connective to Alarm Status Information
For IQ4, IQ3 and IQECO controllers, links to the various alarm status information (e.g. the status of a loop’s PV Fail
alarm) can be made using connectives that are automatically created when the module is placed on the page.
To add a connective to alarm status information:
1. Display the strategy page containing the module to which the alarm status is to be linked.
2. Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, point to Other and click Connective.
The Connective dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and any
connectives that are available.
Icon Description
All connectives
Knob connectives
Sensor connectives
Switch connectives
Undefined connectives
System connectives
The list can also be filtered by label or module. To filter by label, enter the required label in the box below
the Label Filter button, and then click Label Filter. To filter by module, enter the required module in the
box below the Type Filter button, and then click Type Filter. E.g. enter L to find all connectives relating to
loop modules, or L1 to find all connectives relating to loop 1.
4. In the Associated Connectives box click the connective that represents the required alarm status to highlight
it.
5. Once the required connective is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand .
6. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on
the page.
7. Click Exit.
16.3 Add a Connective to System Information
Links to various pieces of system information such as time, timing pulses, day of year, month of year etc. can be made
using connectives that are automatically created when the controller is added.
To add a connective to system information:
1. Display the strategy page containing the module to which the system information is to be linked.
2. Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and point to Other and click
Connective. The Connective dialogue box is displayed listing all the modules currently in the strategy, and
any connectives that are available.
3. Click to filter the list of connectives so that it only shows connectives to system information
4. Click the connective that represents the required alarm status to highlight it.
5. Once the required connective is selected, click Select. The cursor changes to a hand .
6. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on
the page.
7. Click Exit.
16.4 Add a Module Using the Command Line Toolbar
The Command Line toolbar enables modules to be added to a strategy page.
To add a module using the Command Line toolbar:
1. Display the strategy page to which the module is to be added.
2. If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line.
3. Click in the Command Line toolbar, press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move
cursor to the Command Line toolbar.
4. Specify the module that is to be added in the following format:
<Module Type>#<Module Number>#<Sequence Step Number>
<Module Type> is one of the commands that specifies a type of module.
Module Command
ABS Function Module F24
Add Function Module F20
Adder/Scaler Function Module F8
Adjustment Knob Module KA
Alarm Destination Module ALARM DEST
Module Command
Alarm Group Module ALARM GROUP
Alarm Route Module ALARM ROUTE
Analogue Driver Module D2
Analogue to Digital Function Module F18
Average Function Module F13
Binary Hysteresis Driver Module D5
Combination Logic Module G1
Comparator Function Module F15
Counter Logic Module G4
D to A Logic Module G8
Delay Logic Module G5
Digital Driver Module D1
Digital Input Module I
Divide Function Module F10
Enthalpy Function Module F16
External Digital Sensor Module S3
External Sensor Module S1
Fan Out Logic Module G7
Filter Function Module F1
Gate Function Module F14
Hours Run Logic Module G6
Hysteresis Band Function Module F17
Hysteresis Limits Function Module F21
Internal Digital Sensor Module S4
Internal Sensor Module S2
Knob Module K
Limit at Function Module F4
Limit to Function Module F5
Log Function Module F6
Lookup Function Module F19
Loop Module L
Maximum Function Module F12
Minimum Function Module F11
Multiply Function Module F9
Plot Module P
Power Function Module F23
Proximity Function Module F22
Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Module D7
Raise/Lower End Driver Module D4
Readback Logic Module G3
Rescale from Function Module F2
Rescale to Function Module F3
Schedule Module H
Square Root Function Module F7
Switch Module W
Time Proportional + O/R Driver Module D6
Module Command
Time Proportional Driver Module D3
Time Schedule Module TZ
Timer Logic Module G2
TRIG Function Module F26
TRUNC Function Module F25
<Module Number> is an integer that specifies the number of the module, and <Sequence Step Number>
specifies the location of the module in the sequence table.
E.g.
F1#7#103
This command would place function module 7 on the page as a filter module, and assign it to sequence step
103.
It is not necessary to type all parts of the code e.g. to add a type 1 function module using the next module
number and sequence step type F1.
5. Press ENTER to add the module to the page.
16.5 Add a Strategy Page
IQSET stores the strategy on strategy pages. Each strategy page is sized to ensure that the pages can be printed out.
Pages should be added as they are required. When a strategy page is added, IQSET inserts a gap in the sequence table
to allow modules to be added to the previous page without affecting the positions in the sequence table of the modules
on the new page. The size of this gap can be specified. This gap only included when the page is added using the New
Page button ( ) or from the Project View NOT when it is inserted before another.
Information about when a strategy page was created or modified is automatically stored. Text information can also be
stored about the page; e.g. to describe the function of the strategy on the page.
To add a strategy page from the Project View:
1. Display the Project View.
2. In the Device View, select the controller to which the strategy page is to be added.
3. Right-click Strategy Pages and click Insert Page. The new page will be added to the list of pages in the
Project View.
To add a strategy page using the New Page button:
1. Display a strategy page containing strategy for the required controller.
2. Click . The new page will be displayed.
To insert a strategy page before another:
1. Display the strategy page before another page is to be inserted.
2. Click , or right-click the page and point to Page and then click Insert Page. The new page will be
displayed.
Note: When a page is inserted in this way a gap in NOT inserted in the sequence table.
16.6 Add a To Connective
To connectives provide visual indication on the strategy page that a module is providing an input to modules on other
pages. They indicate all the modules on other pages linked to the module to which they are connected. They should
be added to strategy pages to make the strategy drawings easier to understand.
Note: Adding a To connective does not link modules together; they provide a visual indication of existing links.
To add a To connective:
1. Display the strategy page that contains the module providing the input to modules on other pages.
2. Click , or right-click anywhere on the page and point to Other and click To Connective. The cursor
changes to a hand .
3. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click.
4. Click the parameter that provides an input (source) to modules on other pages. The cursor will change to a
when it is moved over a parameter that can be linked.
5. Drag the mouse to the To connective, and release the mouse button. IQSET will display a green circle
when the cursor is in the right place.
16.7 Add an IQECO Display Device
IQECO v2.20 to 2.23 only. In order for values in the controller to be sent to the display from the strategy the display
device (I/O module 2) must be added to the strategy, and the strategy configured to make the required values available
in specific modules which are read by the display, and if appropriate written to. For details of the values that can be
shared between the controller and the display and the required location of values in the controller see the Wallbus
display's documentation.
If values from the display are to be read by the controller the display device (I/O module 2) must be added to the
strategy and the strategy configured to link the input channel of an external sensor to the appropriate output channel
on the display. For details of the values that can be read from the display see the display's documentation.
To add an IQECO display device:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller to which the display device is to be added.
2. Right-click the page and point to Device and click I/O Setup on the menu that is displayed, or on the Device
menu click I/O Setup. The I/O Setup dialogue box is displayed.
3. Click Add. The I/O Module Setup dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Mod ID box enter the module ID of the display. I/O module 1 cannot be selected. The module ID
defaults to 2 but can be changed between 2 – F (2-15).
5. In the Module Type box click WMB Display.
6. In the Fan Config box specify the way in which the fan speed is displayed on the display by selecting the
required option.
7. Click OK to return to the I/O Setup dialogue box.
8. Click Exit.
9. Assign I/O channels to the display device.
16.8 Add an Undefined Connective to a Module
An undefined connective to a module can be used to link a module to another that is not currently in the strategy.
Undefined connectives are indicated on the strategy page in red .
To add an undefined connective to a module:
1. Display the strategy page to which the undefined connective is to be added.
2. Click , or right-click the page where the connective is to be placed, and point to Other and click
Undefined Connective. The Undefined Connective dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Label box enter the label for the undefined connective
4. Click Analogue, Digital, Sensor, Digital Input, Knob, or Switch to specify whether the connective is for
analogue or digital value, or specifically for a sensor, digital input, knob, or switch.
5. Click OK. The cursor changes to a hand .
6. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click. The connective is placed on
the page.
Note: As soon as the module the undefined connective represents is added to the strategy, the undefined connective
should be defined accordingly.
Icon Description
Type
Convention. The node is normally used by the strategy for a specific purpose (e.g. storing 0). It can
either be used for its conventional use, or if the conventional use is never required, it can be used for
another purpose.
Fixed system node. This module is always written to by a specific module in the strategy.
Free
Read only. This node is used for a special purpose (e.g. time) by the controller. Its value can be read
by the strategy, but not changed.
System defaults (e.g. alarm enable bits) can be used with care.
Status
Free to be used.
Used as a destination. Can be used again with care.
7. Once the correct node is selected, click OK to return to the Undefined Connective dialogue box.
8. If the node is to provide a constant value, enter that value into the Fixed Node box.
9. Click OK. The cursor changes to a hand .
10. Move the cursor to the position where the connective is to be placed and click to place the connective on the
page.
5. In the Username box enter the username, and in the Password box enter the matching password that is to
be used to authorise the backup. This must match with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to
enable the backup.
If there are no users set up in any of the controllers that are to be backed up a username and password is still
required if this is the case use ‘IQ3’ as the username, and ‘user’ as the password.
6. If backing up controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater in the Pin box enter a PIN. This must match
with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to enable the backup.
Note: If more than one controller is being backed up, only one username, password and PIN can be specified,
if the controllers have different usernames passwords, and PINs the process will fail. It is therefore
recommended that all the controllers on a system have the same username, password and PIN.
If you want the username, password and PIN to be remembered for the next session select the Remember
Username, Password, and Pin check box.
7. In the Connection Speed box click Default to specify the of the connection speed. If problems are
encountered with communications the connection speed can be specified manually.
8. Click next to the Backup Root box and select the required directory from the dialogue box that is
displayed to specify the Backup Root directory that is to contain all the backups of the files from the
controllers.
9. Select the Enable Advanced Settings check box.
10. Click Advanced Settings. The Advanced Settings dialogue box is displayed.
Option Description
Backup Everything Backs up everything in the controller except the firmware alarm log, and logged data.
Strategy Folder only Only backs up the strategy folder i.e. only the strategy information.
14. Click OK to return to the Settings dialogue box.
15. Click OK to return to the IQ3 Upgrade Window.
16. Select the controllers in the list that are to be upgraded, by clicking the check box next to them. Clicking
Select All will select all the devices in the list.
17. Click Check Comms to check that there is an Ethernet connection with each of the selected controllers. Each
of the selected controllers will now be pinged to check that it is there.
18. Click Upgrade. A dialogue box is displayed asking if you are sure you want to proceed with the backup.
4. To only show choices for controllers with node controller functionality select the Node Controllers check
box.
3. In the Fixed Node box enter the value for the node.
4. Click OK.
16.16 Close a Project
If required a project can be closed without closing IQSET.
To close a project:
1. Display the Project View.
2. On the File menu click Close SET Project.
The appearance of the Trend system displayed in the System View is saved when IQSET is closed. What is saved
depends on how IQSET has been configured - see 'Specify the Loading and Saving of Site Data'.
16.17 Close a Strategy Page
To close a strategy page:
1. Click on strategy page's tab.
or
Display the strategy page that is to be closed, and on the File menu click Close Strategy.
16.18 Collect Controller Diagnostic Information
If you are having problems with a controller Trend technical support may request some diagnostic information. This
can be easily collected.
To collect diagnostic information:
1. Navigate to the required controller.
2. Right-click, and click Collect controller diagnostic information. A dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Username box enter the required user name.
4. In the Password box enter the password.
5. Click Examine the device. The applet will collect the diagnostic information. Once the information has been
collected a dialogue box is displayed.
6. Click OK to return to the original dialogue box.
7. Click Display Files. Windows Explorer opens shoeing the folder containing the collected files.
8. Send the files to Trend technical support e.g. by email.
4. To only show choices for controllers with node controller functionality select the Node Controllers check
box.
5. In the Range area click the required option.
6. In the Device Type box click the required device type.
7. In the Firmware Version box click the required firmware version.
8. In the Hardware Variant box click the required hardware variant of the IQ controller.
9. In the Options area select the required check box(s) to select any required options (e.g. BACnet).
Note: These options are only displayed if available with the option selected in the Firmware Version box.
10. Click OK.
4. Click OK. If any errors are detected when the file is created a dialogue box is displayed listing what they are
to continue creating the file with the errors, click Yes to abort the operation click No. To copy the error
messages to the clipboard click Copy to Clipboard.
3. Click the undefined connective that is to be defined. The list can be filtered to only show undefined
connectives by clicking .
4. Click Define. The pointer changes to .
5. In the dialogue box click the module to which the connective is to point. The Confirm dialogue box is
displayed.
6. Confirm the selection. To define the connective as specified in the Confirm dialogue box click Yes. To select
an associated connective, click No the Confirm dialogue box closes and the pointer changes to , click
the associated connective in the Associated box. The Confirm dialogue box is displayed again, click Yes.
3. Click the connective that is to be deleted. The list can be filtered by clicking the appropriate button at the
bottom of the screen, making it easier to find the required module.
Icon Description
All connectives
Knob connectives
Sensor connectives
Switch connectives
Undefined connectives
System connectives
3. Click Enabled.
4. Click OK.
To enable the module again repeat the process and click Disabled. To enable all disabled modules in the strategy on
the Device menu click Re-Enable All Modules or right-click the strategy page and point to Device and click Re-
Enable All Modules.
Note: The module can also be enabled and disabled by the strategy by linking a digital value to the required modules
enable input.
16.33 Display Information about Autodialling Devices
Information all the autodialling devices on the network can be displayed in the Dialler Window.
To view information about autodialling devices:
1. Browse the system.
2. Right-click the sites name and click Dialler window, or click . The Dialler Window is displayed.
To close the window, click at the top right of the window. The display can be cleared by right-clicking in
the main area of the window, and clicking Clear All. It is also possible to drop a connection by right-clicking
the connection that is to be dropped and clicking Drop link of selected. The information in the window in
the window can be refreshed by right-clicking in the main area of the window, and clicking Re-Inquire
status.
Note: When the Dialler Window is displayed by clicking it will use the current connection to access the
Trend network.
Or
1. Click on the Basic Comms Display . The Communications Window for the current site is
displayed.
Note: When the Communications Window is displayed in this way it will use the current connection to access
the Trend network.
Communications IN are on the left, and communications OUT are on the right. Each of the boxes has horizontal and
vertical scroll bars, which enable more information to be accessed. To close the window, click at the top right of the
window. The display can be cleared by right-clicking in the main area of the window, and clicking Clear entries. The
communications can be paused, logged to file, blank lines inserted, and more details about a frame can be viewed by
double-clicking the frame.
The Communications Window is described in more detail in the Communication Window Applet Manual
(TE200531).
16.35 Display Keyboard Short Cuts
To display the list of keyboard shortcuts
1. Run IQSET and display the System View.
2. Click .
16.36 Display the Item Selector
To display the Item Selector:
1. Click to toggle the Item Selector ON/OFF.
16.37 Display the Project View
To display the Project View:
1. Click , click the Project View tab , press CTRL+N or on the View menu click Project View.
To expand/collapse a view in the Project View:
1. Click the title bar of the view that is to be expanded/collapsed. This will toggle the view between expanded
and collapsed.
1. Click the System View tab , or on the View menu click Strategy Library.
To hide the Strategy Library:
1. Click the outside the Strategy Library.
Note: If the Strategy Library has been docked it must be undocked before it can be hidden.
16.39 Display the System View
To display the System View:
1. Click , click the System View tab , press CTRL+L, or on the View menu click System View.
To hide the System View:
1. Click the outside the System View or click .
Note: If the System View has been docked it must be undocked before it can be hidden.
16.40 Display the Tracker Window
If required a list of devices that displays the immediate children in the structure of the site, or user node of the object
currently selected in the System View can be displayed in the Tracker Window. As different devices are selected in
the System View the information displayed changes accordingly.
To display the Tracker Window:
1. On the View menu click Tracker View.
16.41 Display the Tip of the Day
If tip of the day is turned ON whenever IQSET is run the Tip of the Day dialogue box is displayed providing useful
information about IQSET and its use. It is possible to view the tip of the day at any time
To display the tip of the day:
1. Run IQSET.
2. On the Help menu click Tip of the Day. The Tip of the Day dialogue box is displayed.
3. If the Tell Me More button is available clicking it will display more information about the tip. To display
the next tip, click Next Tip.
IQSET automatically inserts the LAN number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is
displayed, and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it. These can be changed if necessary.
To select a different controller:
Edit the LAN, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.
Caution: If downloading to a different controller, ensure that its firmware version is the same or higher
than the controller for which the strategy was created.
IQSET will check that the controller's time is within one minute of the PC time if there is a difference. If
there is a difference a dialogue box asking if you want to set the controller's time to match the PC is displayed.
Click Yes to adjust the time or No to leave the controller's time unchanged.
5. In the folder list click the required application file. This file must be authorised to run on the selected /XNC.
6. Click Open.
7. Click Download. If the /XNC’s security is enabled a dialogue box is displayed asking for a username and
password. Enter a valid user name and password with a high enough authority and click OK. The file will be
downloaded. If the TCL application is not authorised to run on the selected /XNC an error message will be
displayed and the file will not be downloaded.
3. To select a different controller, edit the LAN, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.
4. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site.
5. The connection that is used will be the one specified for the currently selected site, if a different connection
is to be used in the Standard Comms Connection box click the required connection.
If suitable connection is not available an existing connection can be used as basis for new one that will be
associated with the site, by selecting the required connection from the Standard Comms Connection box,
and then clicking Edit Connection Details. This will display the TUA dialogue box that enables a connection
to be specified.
9. Type the required configuration command into the box at the bottom of the Config Session Window and
press ENTER or click Go to send the command to the device.
The system prompts the available functions; the uppercase character in each prompt is the key to be used to
select the function. Most functions also require an additional numeric value. To exit from any page of data
and save any changes, made, press X+ENTER. To exit from any page of data and not save any changes made,
press Q+ENTER. The commands are as explained in the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533) for
IQ controllers. If required keywords can be embedded in the commands to provide quicker access too
commonly used commands
It is also possible to send a previously used command or a favourite command to the controller, by selecting
the required command from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER or clicking Go.
If a module is selected, the next and previous module of the same type can be viewed by clicking < or >. To
send a Q, or X to the controller click Q or X.
10. To close the session, click X at the top-level configuration prompts to exit configuration mode.
Note: If no commands are sent to the device for a period it will automatically exit configuration mode and
the Config Session Window will close.
For more details of using the Config Session Window see the Config/Text Comms/Mapping Applet Manual
(TE200536).
16.47 Export Data to 963
The labels etc. defined for a controller or specified controllers can be exported to a 963 database. This saves time
when engineering 963 and ensures that the labels etc. are correct.
To export data to the 963:
1. Display the Project View.
2. In the Device View click the next to each controller for which data is to be exported. IQSET will indicate
the selected controllers with a .
4. Specify the type of file that is required by selecting the Excel, or CSV, or CSV (Unicode) Tab Separated
options.
5. Click OK. The Save As dialogue box is displayed.
6. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
7. Click Save.
4. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
5. Click Save. The data will be exported to a file called 'SET_Export.xml' in the specified location.
16.50 Export the Project Overview
The project overview provides an overview of all the controllers in the project. It lists the LAN number, address,
device type name, identifier, version, serial number/MAC address and presentation points (Sensor, Digital Input,
Knob, Switch, and Driver) of each controller. It also provides the total number of presentation points in the project
for use when calculating the required number of points for IQVISION.
To export the project overview:
1. Display the Project View.
2. In the Device View click the next to the required controllers. IQSET will indicate the selected controllers
with a .
3. On the Project menu point to Overview and click Export Overview. The Export Options dialogue box is
displayed.
6. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
7. Click Save.
16.51 Export Module Lists
Lists of the sensor, digital input, knob, switch, driver, directory, and display modules in a strategy can be exported to
an Excel file, comma separated file, or tab separated file.
Note: This functionality requires Microsoft Excel® to be installed on the PC.
To export module lists:
1. Open the IQSET project containing the required controller.
2. Display a strategy page for the controller for which module lists are to be exported.
3. On the Strategy menu click Export Data. The Export Options dialogue box is displayed.
4. Specify the type of file that is required by selecting the Excel, or CSV, or CSV (Unicode) Tab Separated
options.
5. Specify which modules are to be included in the file by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Tables
area. Click Select All to select all module types.
7. In the File name box enter the required file name. To store the file in a different location, click the drive, or
folder in the Look in box that contains the file, and double-click the folders in the folder list until the file is
displayed.
8. Click Save. The file is created. If CSV, or CSV (Unicode) Tab Separated was selected a separate file will
be created for each module type. If Excel was selected a single Excel file will be created.
16.52 Find a Module
IQSET allows modules used in the strategy to be located.
To find a module:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller containing the module that is to be located.
2. If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display
it.
3. Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move
cursor to the Command Line toolbar.
4. In the Command Line toolbar enter the code for the module that is to be located, in the format below.
<Module Type><Module Number>
<Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details
of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual. c specifies undefined connectives.
<Module Number> specifies the number of the module (e.g. to find sensor type S3).
5. Click or press CTRL. The Command Line toolbar will now display the page(s) containing that module.
6. To goto the module itself click or press CTRL again. If the module has been found on more than one
page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .
16.53 Find Fixed System Nodes
When the Digital Node Array dialogue box is displayed, it is possible to find the location of fixed system nodes, and
nodes that have been placed in the strategy from either array.
To find a node:
1. Display the Digital Node Array dialogue box.
2. In the Find box enter the code for the required node. The codes for the individual parameters are described
below:
<Module Type><Module Number><Bit Code>
<Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. W specifies a switch). For
details of the module identifier see the appropriate module section of this manual.
Module
Letter Description
Type
Critical Device acknowledge bit
ADA
Alarms ASA
Acknowledge status bit
Digital E
A
Inputs R
V
Maintenance alarm acknowledge bit
AR
EM
Drivers AM
ER
M
R
IC Comms F Fail Bit
Process variable alarm acknowledge bit
AS
EP
Loops AP ES
O
P
S
High alarm acknowledge bit
AL
AO
AR
EH
EL
Sensors AH
EO
ER
H
L
O
R
Switches V Status bit
Note: If you select a user module e.g. U2 IQSET will find the bit that indicates whether that user is logged
on.
Certain information can be entered without specifying a <Module Type> and <Module Number>.
Code Description
0 Default location for 0
1 Default location for 1
15m 5 minute timing pulse
1m 1 minute timing pulse
Code Description
24h Daily minute timing pulse
30m 30 minute timing pulse
60m Hourly timing pulse
CONL Controller on line alarm status bit
CONL INHIB Controller on line alarm inhibit bit
D1=INHIB Global Digital input alarm inhibit bit
DEF Emergency password in use bit
FAIL INHIB Global loop fail alarm inhibit bit
FBAT Battery failed status bit
FDRT Fail dual asynchronous receiver transmitter alarm status bit
FDRT INHIB FDRT alarm inhibit bit
FPIA Fail peripheral interface adapter alarm status bit
FPIA INHIB FPIA alarm inhibit bit
FPRM Fail programmable read only memory alarm states bit
FPRM INHIB FPRM alarm inhibit bit
FRAM Fail random access memory alarm status bit
FRAM INHIB FRAM alarm inhibit bit
FRTC INHIB FRTC alarm inhibit bit
FSWR Fail software alarm status bit
FSWR INHIB FSWR alarm inhibit bit
FTKA INHIB FTKA alarm inhibit bit
FTKP INHIB FTKP alarm inhibit bit
FTRC Fail real time clock alarm status bit
HELP Checksum failure alarm status bit
HELP INHIB Help alarm inhibit bit
HIGH INHIB Global Sensor high alarm inhibit bit
LOW INHIB Global Sensor low alarm inhibit bit
MINT INHIB Global maintenance interval alarm inhibit bit
Month Monthly timing pulse
OUTL INHIB Global Sensor out of limits alarm inhibit bit
READ INHIB Global Sensor read alarm inhibit bit
Reset Power reset bit
SDEV INHIB Global setpoint deviation alarm inhibit bit
SDGT INHIB Global driver grace time alarm inhibit bit
Test flag Alarm text flag
Week Weekly timing pulse
Year Yearly timing pulse
3. Select the modules that the find and replace is to search by holding down the CTRL key, and clicking the
required modules. To select a range, click the first module in the range, hold down the SHIFT key, and click
the last module in the range. To select all the modules click Select All.
The modules displayed in the Module List box can be reduced by filtering on the module type and label. To
filter on module type, enter the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies a sensor) in the
Module Filter box and click Apply Filter. For details of the module identifier see the appropriate module
section of this manual. To filter on module label, enter the module label in the Label Filter box and click
Apply Filter. To view all modules in the strategy click Show All.
4. In the Original text box enter the text that is to be replaced.
5. In the Replace with box enter the text that is to be used as the replacement.
Note: If required text can be copied and pasted into the Original text box and Replace with box.
6. Click Replace Partial Text in Selected module(s), or Replace Entire Label of Selected Module(s) to
specify whether the selected text or the entire label is to be replaced.
7. Click Replace.
8. Click Exit.
To replace labels using paste:
1. Copy the list of new labels. This can be done either from a text editor where the labels have been entered
(each label on a different line), or from another controller using this process but selecting Copy Label in step
(5).
2. Display a strategy page for the controller containing the labels that are to be replaced.
3. On the Tools menu click Label Find and Replace. The Label Find and Replace dialogue box is displayed
with a list of all module labels from the selected controller in the Module List box.
5. Click . The Command Line toolbar will display the module that uses the specified node.
6. To see which page that node is located on, click again. The Command Line toolbar will now display the
page(s) containing that module, to goto the module itself click again. If the module has been found on
more than one page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .
16.56 Find where a Sequence Step is Used
IQSET allows the module located at a sequence step to be found.
To find where a sequence step is used:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller containing the required module.
2. If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display
it.
3. Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move
cursor to the Command Line toolbar.
4. Specify the sequence step in the format shown below.
Q<Sequence Step Number>
<Sequence Step Number> is the sequence step that is to be found
5. Click . The Command Line toolbar will display the module located at the specified sequence step.
6. To see which page that module is located on, click again. The Command Line toolbar will now display
the page(s) containing that module to goto the module itself, and click again. If the module has been
found on more than one page, click the required page to highlight it, and then click .
16.57 Go to a Module
To go to modules connected to a module's output:
1. Right click the module's output and click the required module.
To go to the module references by a connective:
1. Right click the connective and click Goto Module.
4. In the folder list click the file that is to be imported. To select a file stored in a different location, click the
drive, or folder in the Look in box that contains the file, double-click the folders in the folder list until file
is displayed.
5. Click Open. The backdrops in the file will be imported into the backdrops directory for the current project.
A dialogue box is displayed indicating the progress of the process. Once the process is complete a dialogue
box is displayed.
16.60 Log in
If IQSET's autolock feature has been enabled and IQSET has locked due to a period of inactivity you will need to log
back in.
To log in:
1. If IQSET is locked the window below is displayed.
3. Drag the mouse on top of or to attach the pane to the side of the SET Window. To position the
pane as a floating box, drag the mouse to the required position.
4. Release the mouse button.
16.62 Perform an IQSET Command Using the Command Line Toolbar
The Command Line toolbar enables many of IQSET's commands to be performed simply by typing a command.
To perform an IQSET command using the Command Line toolbar:
1. If the Command Line toolbar is not already displayed, on the View menu click Command Line to display
it.
2. Click in the Command Line toolbar press CTRL+M, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to move
cursor to the Command Line toolbar.
3. Press CTRL+L, or on the Tools menu click Command Line to activate the Command Line toolbar.
4. Enter the required command.
Command Description
DUMMY Add a dummy IC comms module
TEXT Add text to a page
CIRCLE Draw a circle
LINE Draw a line
RECTANGLE Draw a rectangle
ELLIPSE Draw an ellipse
SQUARE Draw a square
EXTENT Fill the window with the used area of the strategy page.
NEXT Goto the next page
PREV Goto the previous page
REDRAW Redraw the screen
Z Zoom to a specific area
5. Press ENTER to carry out the command.
16.63 Position the Toolbars
The toolbars in the SET Window can be moved to any position on the screen to suit individual requirements. When
docked, the toolbars can appear on any edge of the window, when undocked, they are known as floating toolbars, and
can be positioned anywhere on the screen even outside the SET Window.
To move a toolbar:
4. In the Name box click the required printer. Clicking Properties enables the printer properties to be adjusted.
IQSET will default to the Windows default printer, if a different printer is to always be used, it can be
specified as the default printer for IQSET.
5. Specifies the required printing options.
6. Click OK.
10. In the Select COM port box click the COM port being used to connect to the controller.
11. In the Enter controllers MAC address box enter the controller’s MAC address. This can be found on the
label on the front of the controller.
12. In the Select Ethernet Connect box click the IP address of the network card being used to connect the PC
to the IQ3. If step (6) above has been followed there should only be IP address in the drop-down list along
with the word (Automatic), all other adaptors will have an IP address of 0.0.0.0. If this is not the case, ensure
that all other TCP/IP Ethernet connections are disconnected.
13. Power down the IQ3 controller, and click Go.
6. In the Username box enter the username, and in the Password box enter the matching password that is to
be used to authorise the operation. This must match with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to
enable the backup.
If there are no users set up in the controller that is to be restored a username and password is still required if
this is the case use ‘IQ3’ as the username, and ‘user’ as the password.
7. If restoring a controller with version 1.3 firmware or greater in the Pin box enter a PIN. This must match
with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to enable the backup. If you want the username,
password and PIN to be remembered for the next session select the Remember Username, Password, and
Pin check box.
8. In the Connection Speed box click Default to specify the of the connection speed. If problems are
encountered with communications the connection speed can be specified manually.
9. Select the Enable Advanced Settings check box.
10. Click Advanced Settings. The Advanced Settings dialogue box is displayed.
4. In either the Line 1 or Line 2 box enter a description for the page.
5. In Details box enter the required details.
6. Click OK.
16.76 Set up the Site Codes
This section describes how to set up the human readable and machine-readable (GUID) site codes for a site.
To setup the site codes:
1. Display the site for which the site codes are to be set up in the System View.
2. Right-click the site and click Site code manager. The Site Code Manager Window is displayed.
3. Click Discover site code(s). The Site Code Manager Applet will discover devices on the site.
4. If the site contains more than one human readable site code, or more than one machine-readable site code a
warning is displayed. Click Yes and goto (6) otherwise goto (5).
6. In the Human readable site code box specify the human readable site code, either click the required code
in the box to select an existing site code or enter the required code.
7. In the Machine readable site code box specify the machine-readable site code, either click the required code
in the box to select an existing site code, or click New to generate a new machine-readable site code.
8. If any of the controllers have security enabled in the Pin box enter the PIN that will authorise the change.
Note: Only one PIN is sent therefore if the controllers have different PINs the change will fail.
9. Click OK. The '$' parameter of the address module in the devices will be set to the text in the Human
readable site code box, and the 'O' parameter of the address module in the devices will be set to the text in
the Machine readable site code box.
16.77 Specify the BACnet Write Priority
If a client site is to write information to the BACnet system a write priority must be defined for each value that is to
be written to the BACnet site. A write priority can be assigned to a site, LAN, device or parameter. The same write
priority can be assigned to everything below the selected item in the System View.
An object’s write priority is used to determine whether the write affects the value in the BACnet system. If the priority
is higher than the priority of the value of the BACnet parameter, the value will be changed. If it is lower the value will
remember the value and its priority so that it can be used if the priority associated with the property's value changes.
Write priority values should be set in accordance with the system integration requirements for the site. The designer
of the site integration will have determined what priority levels should be used for what types of equipment (e.g.
Safety interlocks may have been assigned 4, HVAC control 10, and user overrides 16). The specification for the site
should therefore be sought before assigning any write priorities.
The gateway defaults to no write priority being used (Which in most cases will result in the target device interpreting
the write as a write priority 16 request).
To specify the BACnet write priority:
1. Run IQSET.
2. Ensure that the current user role is at least Commissioning engineer.
3. Right click the site, LAN, device or module for which the write priority is to be set, and click Set Write
Priority. If the priority is set to 'None' a dialogue box is displayed click OK to proceed. A dialogue box is
displayed.
4. Click the required option to select the required write priority. To use the same priority as the object
immediately above the selected object in the network structure select Using Parent Priority.
5. Click Apply. To apply the write priority to all item below the selected object in the network structure click
Apply to ALL children.
6. If Apply to ALL children was selected a dialogue box is displayed asking if you are sure you want to make
the change, click Yes.
7. Click Close.
3. Click Display on the left of the required configuration parameter. Selected indicates that the parameter will
be displayed.
Icon Description
Checks all the check boxes
Clears all the check boxes
Returns the display settings to the current defaults.
4. Click OK.
16.81 Turn the Status Bar ON/OFF
To turn the Status Bar ON/OFF:
1. On the View menu click Status Bar to tick/untick the option; a tick ( ) indicates it is turned ON.
Item Description
0 to 9 Dialing characters.
ABCD#* Considered as dialing characters on some systems.
J or : Wait for secondary dial tone.
K or ; or , 2 second pause (Note on some autodiallers this may be a 1 second pause).
<- Pulse dialing.
M or = Tone dialing
To use a previously used number, click to display the Telephone Number dialogue box, click the
required number and then click Select.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the Please choose the Baud Rate you want to use list In the Baud rate box select the baud rate for
communications between the personal computer and the modem. For ADL, it should be 2400.
In the Please choose the COM port number you want to use list select the number of the COM port
connected to the modem.
To specify a remote site with a serial auto dial connection:
Select the Remote Site option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Select the Dial into a remote site option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Select Auto Dial (TMN etc). This enables connection using TMN, MNC, TMNE, ANC, or XN28.
In the Please provide the telephone number you want to dial into box enter the phone number of the
site that is to be connected to. The number may be up to 20-characters in length, and include the following
characters.
Item Description
0 to 9 Dialing characters.
ABCD#* Considered as dialing characters on some systems.
J or : Wait for secondary dial tone.
K or ; or , 2 second pause (Note on some autodiallers this may be a 1 second pause).
<- Pulse dialing.
M or = Tone dialing
To use a previously used number, click to display the Telephone Number dialogue box, click the
required number and then click Select.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Select the Serial Port (COM Port) option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the Please choose the Baud Rate you want to use select the baud rate for communications between
the personal computer and the modem.
In the Please choose the COM port number you want to use list select the number of the COM port
connected to the dialling device.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the list select the required dialler. The list can be filtered by dialler type by selecting the required
dialler type in the Filter by box. If only one dialler is available this step will be missed.
To specify a remote site with an Ethernet auto dial connection:
Select the Remote Site option.
To use a previously used number, click to display the Telephone Number dialogue box, click the
required number and then click Select.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Select the Ethernet (TCP/IP) option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the list select the IP adapter that is to be used to make the connection. If only one IP adapter is available
this step will be missed.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the list select the Trend system that is to be connected to by clicking on a device from that system.
Devices on the same system have the same UDP port. If only one Trend system is available this step will
be missed.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Select the Choose from available VCNC ports option and click the vCNC from the list. To select more
than one press CTRL and click the required vCNCs.
vCNCs from the device selected in the previous step are already selected. If there are no vCNCs in that
device vCNCs from another device on the same UDP network are selected. If more than one vCNC is
selected, they must all be from the same device.
Note that the vCNC is referenced using the IP address of its device NOT the host name. If the hostname
is to be used the connection must be specified using the TUA Editor.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the list select the required dialler. The list can be filtered by dialler type by selecting the required
dialler type in the Filter by box. If only one dialler is available this step will be missed.
6. Click Next>. The wizard changes to show a summary of the site and its connection.
7. Click Finish.
16.84 Use the BUA Editor
The BACnet Universal Editor (BUA Editor) enables connection details to be specified for BACnet sites.
To use the BUA Editor:
1. In the Site name text box enter a name for the site.
2. Click the Connection tab.
2. In the Site name text box enter a name for the connection.
3. Set up the CNC tab to define the connection.
Click the CNC tab.
Click the appropriate option to specify the type of connection that is to be used. The display will change
to display the parameters that need to be set up for the selected type of connection.
Connection Description
Serial Specifies connection to the Trend network using a serial port connection.
Specifies connection to the Trend network using a virtual CNC in a device such as IQ3
TCP/IP
controller or EINC over Ethernet (TCP/IP).
Specifies connection to the Autodial Lite Trend network with a personal computer
ADL
modem.
Specifies connection to the Trend network using a software ANC. This uses a personal
SANC computer modem for communications. The modem may connect to sites with ANC/TMN
controllers as their autodialled connection.
Specifies connection to the Trend network using a serial port connection, to a site accessed
over an autodialled link using an autodialling device on the Trend network. When selected
Serial+TMN
an additional tab Auto dialing is displayed. The information in this tab must also be set up
for the connection to work.
Specifies connection to the Trend network using a controller or XTEND over Ethernet
(TCP/IP) to a site accessed over an autodialled link using an autodialling device on the
TCP+TMN
Trend network. When selected an additional tab Auto dialing is displayed. The
information in this tab must also be set up for the connection to work.
Specify the settings for the selected connection, Serial or Serial+TMN, TCP/IP or TCP+TMN, ADL
or SANC.
Characters Description
0 to 9 Dialing characters.
ABCD#* Considered as dialing characters on some systems.
J or : Wait for secondary dial tone.
K or ; or , 2 second pause (Note on some autodiallers this may be a 1 second pause).
< Pulse dialing
M or = Tone dialing.
If required enter the phone number of the personal computer in the personal computer phone
number (optional) box. This can include the same characters as the site phone number.
In the Link Pin box enter the four-digit code used to authorise the use of the CNC link.
4. If displayed, set up the Auto dialling tab to specify the autodialled connection. Ensure that the TUA auto
dialling data is valid check box is selected.
To set up the Auto dialing tab:
Click the Auto dialing tab.
Click the appropriate option to specify the type of dialler that is to be used.
Dialler Description
ANC Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the ANCs on the network.
ANY Enables any autodialling device on the network to be used.
MNC Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the MNCs on the network.
TMN Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the TMNs (not TMNE) on the network
TMNE Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the TMNEs on the network.
XN28 Restricts the autodialling devices that can be used to the XN28 s on the network.
8. In the Username box enter the username, and in the Password box enter the matching password that is to
be used to authorise the upgrade. This must match with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to
enable the upgrade.
If there are no users set up in any of the controllers that are to be upgraded a username and password is still
required if this is the case use 'IQ3' as the username, and ‘user’ as the password.
9. If upgrading to controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater in the Pin box enter a PIN. This must match
with one in the controller and be of level 90 or above to enable the upgrade.
Note: If more than one controller is being upgraded, only one username, password and PIN can be specified,
if the controllers have different usernames passwords, and PINs the process will fail. It is therefore
recommended that all the controllers on a system have the same username, password and PIN.
If you want the username, password and PIN to be remembered for the next session select the Remember
Username, Password, and Pin check box.
10. In the Connection Speed box click Default to specify the of the connection speed. If problems are
encountered with communications the connection speed can be specified manually.
11. Click next to the Backup Root box and select the required directory from the dialogue box that is
displayed to specify the Backup Root directory that is to contain all the backups of the files from the
controllers.
12. Click next to the Autosetup Folder box and select the required directory from the dialogue box that is
displayed to specify the Autosetup directory that containing the new firmware and other associated files.
13. Clear the Enable Advanced Settings dialogue box.
14. Click on OK to return to the IQ3 Upgrade Window.
15. If necessary add other controllers that are to be upgraded to the list by navigating down the site to locate the
controllers, and dragging them onto the IQ3 Upgrade Window. Clicking Clear List clears the list.
16. Select the controllers in the list that are to be upgraded, by clicking the check box next to them. Clicking
Select All will select all the devices in the list.
It is recommended that initially you only upgrade one controller at a time until you are confident that the
upgrade process will complete successfully, and not cause any problems.
17. Click Check Comms to check that there is an Ethernet connection with each of the selected controllers. Each
of the selected controllers will now be pinged to check that it is there.
18. Click Upgrade. A dialogue box is displayed informing you what the applet is about to do and asking if you
are sure you want to proceed with the upgrade.
Note: If any of the controllers being upgraded has pre-version 1.01 firmware an additional warning box is
displayed. This warns of the problems that may be encountered upgrading pre-version 1.01 controllers.
19. Click Yes. The upgrade will be carried out the progress of which is displayed in the progress bars in the
Controller List and at the bottom of the window. Clicking Abort stops the upgrade process. If a controller
is in the process of being upgraded that upgrade will be completed before the process is aborted.
20. Once the upgrade is complete a dialogue box will be displayed. Click OK.
21. Verify that the controller(s) can still be accessed by deleting the internetwork from the System View and
then refreshing the entire LAN structure to check that the controller is still communicating over the Trend
network.
4. To select a different controller, edit the LAN, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.
5. If connected directly to a controller, or using a local supervisor port that does not provide network access
click Direct Connection.
6. If the controller has security enabled specify the password that will authorise the upload.
IQ4 and IQ3 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
In the Password box enter the matching password.
For v1.3 or greater controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN.
Pre IQ3 and IQECO controllers:
In the Pin box enter the PIN.
7. If a different comms connection is to be used select the required one from the Standard Comms box. If none
of the standard connections are suitable the connection can be specified by clicking Edit Connection Details.
This displays the Connection Wizard which enables the connection to be specified using the TUA Editor
or the Connection Wizard.
IQSET will check that the controller's time is within one minute of the PC time if there is a difference. If
there is a difference a dialogue box asking if you want to set the controller's time to match the PC is displayed.
Click Yes to adjust the time or No to leave the controller's time unchanged.
Communications IN are on the left, and communications OUT are on the right. Each of the boxes has
horizontal and vertical scroll bars, which enable more information to be accessed. To close the window, click
at the top right of the window. The display can be cleared by right clicking in the main area of the window,
and clicking Clear entries from the displayed menu. The communications can be paused, logged to file,
blank lines inserted, and more details about a frame can be viewed by double-clicking the frame. The display
format can also be specified.
16.89 View Device Details
It is possible to view information about devices in the network structure.
To view details for a device:
1. Display a strategy page for which details are to be viewed.
2. On the Device menu click Device Details. The Device Details dialogue box is displayed.
3. In the Number box use the arrows to select the required issue.
4. In the Revision box use the arrows to select the required revision.
16.96 View the Next Module List
When configuring a controller, it is possible view a list of modules that indicates the next module number for each
module type, and the next sequence step that will be used. It also shows how many modules of each module type are
still free for use.
To view next module list:
1. Display a strategy page for the controller for which the list is required.
2. Click , right-click the page and click Next Module, or on the Tools menu click Free/Next Module List.
The Next Module List dialogue box is displayed.
4. In the Standard Comms Connections box click the required connection for the site. If none of the standard
connections are suitable the connection can be specified by clicking Edit Connection Details. This displays
the Connection Wizard which enables the connection to be specified using the TUA Editor or the
Connection Wizard.
To change the site's connection using the TUA Editor:
Select the Launching TUA Editor option.
Click Next>. The TUA Editor Window is displayed.
Use the TUA Editor to specify the connection.
To change the site's connection using the Connection Wizard:
Select the Launching Site Connection Wizard (Recommended) option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
Specify the connection as required.
Note: The connection specified here will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of standard
comms connections.
5. Click OK. The site is added to the System View.
When a site is first added to the System View it does not automatically connect and learn the devices on the
site, it is necessary to make the connection manually.
6. Right-click the site click Refresh. IQSET will connect to the site and learn the top level of the site structure.
If connecting to a vCNC IQSET may prompt for additional information or display a message before allowing
the connection - see Connect to a site.
17.1.2.2 Add a Site and Create a Site File
A site file stores information about the devices on a site, and modules in those devices, as well as the connections for
the site. This process will create a blank site file, and IQSET can then browse the system to find out what devices are
available, and add them to the file.
4. In the Project Name box enter a name for the project. If required the directory that the file is saved in can
be changed by clicking Change browsing to the required directory, and then clicking OK.
5. Click OK. The Site Name dialogue box is displayed.
6. In the Site Name box enter a name for the site. To change the location of the project click Change.
7. In the Type box select Trend.
8. Click OK. The Connection Wizard is displayed which enables the connection to be specified using the
TUA Editor or the Connection Wizard.
To specify the connection using the TUA Editor:
Select the Launching TUA Editor option.
Click Next>. The TUA Editor Window is displayed.
Use the TUA Editor to specify the connection.
To specify the connection using the Connection Wizard:
Select the Launching Site Connection Wizard (Recommended) option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
For Trend System sites, if the site is to use one of the standard comms connections select the required
connection in the Standard Comms Connections box.
Click Add. The Site Name dialogue box is displayed.
In the Choose type of network box select the type of site that is to be added.
Click OK.
If a Trend site was selected the New site connection details dialogue box is displayed.
In the Site name box enter a name for the site.
If the site is to use one of the standard comms connections select the required connection in the
Related connection box, and click OK, the site will be added to the System View. If the site is not
to use one of the standard connections, click Edit site details to display the Connection Wizard.
If a BACnet site was selected the BACnet Universal Address Editor dialogue box is displayed.
4. If the Connection Wizard or BUA Editor are displayed it is necessary to specify the connection. For
connections to a Trend network this is done using the TUA Editor or the Connection Wizard. For
connections to a BACnet network this is done using the BUA Editor.
To specify the connection using the TUA Editor:
Select the Launching TUA Editor option.
Click Next>. The TUA Editor Window is displayed.
Use the TUA Editor to specify the connection.
Note: This is not necessary for Trend sites if a standard connection is being used. Connections specified here
will only be used for that site; it will not be added to the list of comms connections.
To specify the connection using the Connection Wizard:
Select the Launching Site Connection Wizard (Recommended) option.
Click Next>. The wizard changes.
In the Site Name box enter the site's name.
Specify the connection as required.
To specify the BACnet connection:
Use the BUA Editor to specify the connection.
After completing the steps above the site will have been added to the System View. When a site is first added
to the System View it does not automatically connect and learn the devices on the site, it is necessary to
make the connection manually.
5. Right-click the site click Refresh. IQSET will connect to the site and learn the top level of the site structure.
If connecting to a vCNC IQSET may prompt for additional information or display a message before allowing
the connection - see Connect to a site.
2. Enter the CNC User module's name in the Name box (user name of any CNC User module in the device
containing the vCNC).
3. Enter the CNC User module's password in the Password box (password for the CNC User module specified
above).
4. Click OK. The connection will be made.
Note: IQSET does not remember the security details between sessions so when connecting again after IQSET has
been started it will prompt for the username and password.
Connect to a vCNC in 'Secure' mode without CNC users:
1. When IQSET attempts to make the connection the Service Button Validation dialogue box is displayed.
2. Go to the device containing the vCNC and press its service button within 10 minutes to prove you have
physical access to the device. The Secure Site Configuration dialogue box is displayed which allows the
device's vCNC connections to be configured.
2. Click to continue IQSET will connect securely (encrypted) without the need to specify a user name and
password.
Connecting to a vCNC that does not support secure communications:
1. When IQSET attempts to make the connection the Trend Security Warning dialogue box will be displayed.
Clicking on has the same effect as clicking Refresh, and clicking has the same effect as clicking
Refresh all. To stop a refresh once it has been started click . To prevent automatic refreshing click
.
17.1.6 Run an Applet
Applets that are associated with a type of system object can be run from the System View or the Item Selector.
Applets that are not associated with a type of system object can be run from the Tools menu. This allows different
tasks such as entering configuration mode, or displaying information about a device, or uploading a file can be carried
out on the selected part of the system. The tasks that are available are dependent on the part of the system that is
selected. For example, if an IQ controller has been selected it is possible to go into configuration mode where as if a
LAN is selected, the LAN can be mapped.
Note: Applets are only accessible if the current user role is equal to or higher than that required for access to the
applet.
To run an applet from the System View:
1. Navigate to the required part of the system.
2. Once you have reached the required part of the system right-click, and click the required applet.
To run an applet from the Item Selector:
1. Display the Item Selector.
2. In the Context box specify click the required part of the system. This tells IQSET what the object is e.g.
LAN, or device.
3. In the Action box click the required task from the list
4. Click Go.
To run an applet from the Tools menu:
1. On the Tools menu click the required applet.
If the applet opens a new window it is possible to move between then by clicking each window. The window can be
closed by clicking , or on the Window menu clicking More Windows to display the Arrange Windows dialogue
box, selecting the window in the list, and then clicking Close Window.
17.2 Configure an IQL Controller for use with an RD-IQL
If an RD-IQL is to be connected to an IQL controller the controller must be configured for use with the RD-IQL. The
RD-IQL is only compatible with IQL11+, IQL13+, and IQL15+ controllers. When using an RD-IQL certain features
of the controller are unavailable, depending on the type of RD-IQL being used. These are described below:
RD-IQL
Unavailable Features
Type
Precludes use of window contact on IQL11+, and PIR/pushbutton inputs on IQL11+, 131+, 151+. Fan
RD-IQL/K
speed control is inoperative on IQL13+, 15+.
RD-IQL
Unavailable Features
Type
RD- Precludes use of window contact on IQL11+, and PIR input on IQL11+, 131+, 151+. Fan speed control
IQL/KOS is inoperative on IQL13+, 15+.
RD-
Precludes use of PIR input.
IQL/KOSF
The controller must have a standard strategy or standard item allocations as described below.
Controller Standard Allocations
IQL11+ S1, S2, S3, S9, S10, and I9
IQL13+ S1, S2, S3, S7, S9, S10, S11 and I9
IQL15+ S1, S2, S3, S7, S9, S10, S11 and I9
To configure an IQL controller for use with an RD-IQL:
1. Connect to the LonWorks network segment containing the IQL controllers that are to be configured for use
with an RD-IQL.
2. Right-click the required controller and click Configure for RD a dialogue box is displayed.
3. Select the Uses RD check box. The dialogue box changes to allow the required options to be set up.
4. If available in the Local Temp Source area, select either the From RD or From Sensor check box depending
on where the RD-IQL is to get its local temperature.
5. If available in the fan speed select area select either the From RD or From Switch check box depending on
where the RD-IQL is to take its switch input.
6. Click Update.
7. Click .
The tool will send text comms messages to the selected controllers to configure them for use with an RD-IQL. Once
the changes are complete they will be written to flash memory, and the controller(s) restarted.
Note: It is also possible to perform this action from IQSET’s System View by connecting to the LonWorks network
segment as described above, navigating to the required controller, right clicking the controller, and clicking
Configure for RD-IQL.
3. Specify whether the vCNC port numbers are to be manually specified or to use the default value (10000 +
Address) by selecting/clearing the Use Default Port box.
Note: The 'Use Default Port' setting applies to all vCNCs in the controller.
4. Enable/disable the required vCNCs by clearing/selecting the Disable check box, (selected = disabled).
5. Specify the label for the vCNC in the Label box.
6. Specify the network address of the vCNC in the Address box (range 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10). It must be
unique on the Local LAN.
7. If the default port is NOT being used specify the port for the vCNC in the Port box.
8. Specify the security mode in the Security Mode box.
9. If the vCNC is to send device dead alarms select Device Dead Alarm.
10. If any of the vCNCs are operating in 'Secure' mode and you have not already added a CNC User module you
MUST add one.
11. Enter the CNC User module's name in the Name box.
12. Enter the CNC User module's password in the Password box.
13. Retype the password in the Retype Password box.
14. If the controller has security enabled enter the PIN required to authorise the change in the PIN box.
15. Click OK.
If a graph is already displayed, you will be prompted whether the graph is to be in a new window or be added
to the existing graph. Click Yes to add the graph to the existing window, or No to display it in a new window.
3. In the Interval box click the interval at which the sensor is being logged.
4. Click Compact comms (FAST).
5. Click OK. The graph is displayed.
Clicking will close the graph. The refresh rate of the chart can be changed. To view the time and the value
for a point on the graph press CTRL and then move the mouse to that point, the time and value will be
displayed. You can zoom in and out of the graph. If required other traces can be added to, or removed from
the graph. The scaling of the Y-axis can be fixed. A graph can be printed, or copied to the clipboard.
If a graph is already displayed, you will be prompted whether the graph is to be in a new window or be added
to the existing graph. Click Yes to add the graph to the existing window, or No to display it in a new window.
3. In the Interval box click the interval at which the sensor is being logged.
4. Click Longhand comms (ACCURATE).
5. Click OK. The graph is displayed.
Clicking will close the graph. The refresh rate of the chart can be changed. To view the time and the value
for a point on the graph press CTRL and then move the mouse to that point, the time and value will be
displayed. You can zoom in and out of the graph. If required other traces can be added to, or removed from
the graph. The scaling of the Y-axis can be fixed. A graph can be printed, or copied to the clipboard.
17.6 Display Properties
17.6.1 Display Device Properties
Information about a selected device on the Trend System can be displayed in the Device Properties dialogue box.
To display device information:
1. Display the device for which information is required.
2. Right-click the device, and click Properties. The Device Properties dialogue box is displayed. The
information can be updated by clicking Read.
Once the parameters are displayed in the grid the values of parameters in the controller can be:
Refreshed manually
Refreshed automatically
Edited.
The columns can be fitted to the content
17.6.3 Display a BACnet Module Properties
Information about a selected BACnet module can be displayed in the Module Properties dialogue box.
To display module information:
1. Display the module for which information is required.
The information can be updated by clicking Read. The module’s parameters can be displayed by clicking
the Parameters tab. This also enables the parameters to be changed.
17.6.4 Display Parameter Properties
Information about a selected module parameter on the Trend System can be displayed in the Parameter Properties
dialogue box.
To display parameter information:
1. Display the list containing the parameter for which information is required.
2. Right-click the parameter, and click Properties. The Parameter Properties dialogue box is displayed.
The colour of the box around the parameter indicates its status. Clicking Key displays a dialogue box that
explains the meaning of each of the colours. The information can be updated. This also enables the value of
the parameter can be changed.
If required a PIN can be specified for all the controllers on the site.
17.7 Enter Configuration Mode on Pre IQ3 Controllers
IQSET provides access to the configuration mode of pre IQ3 controllers on the network. Once the configuration mode
for a device has been entered, configuration commands can be entered and sent to the controller.
To enter configuration mode:
1. Display the strategy page for the controller that is to be accessed in configuration mode.
2. Click or on the Comms menu click Config. The Connection Details dialogue box is displayed. IQSET
automatically inserts the LAN number, and address of the controller for which the strategy page is displayed,
and uses the current site, and the connection associated with it.
3. To select a different controller, edit the LAN, and Node boxes to contain address of the required controller.
4. To connect to a different site in the Site Name box click the required site.
9. Type the required configuration command into the box at the bottom of the Config Session Window and
press ENTER or click Go to send the command to the device.
The system prompts the available functions; the uppercase character in each prompt is the key to be used to
select the function. Most functions also require an additional numeric value. To exit from any page of data
and save any changes, made, press X+ENTER. To exit from any page of data and not save any changes made,
press Q+ENTER. The commands are as explained in the IQ Configuration Reference Manual (90-1533) for
IQ controllers. If required keywords can be embedded in the commands to provide quicker access too
commonly used commands
It is also possible to send a previously used command or a favourite command to the controller, by selecting
the required command from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER or clicking Go.
If a module is selected, the next and previous module of the same type can be viewed by clicking < or >. To
send a Q, or X to the controller click Q or X.
10. To close the session, click X at the top-level configuration prompts to exit configuration mode.
Note: If no commands are sent to the device for a period it will automatically exit configuration mode and
the Config Session Window will close.
For more details of using the Config Session Window see the Config/Text Comms/Mapping Applet Manual
(TE200536).
4. In the Name box enter the name for the user node.
5. In the Refresh interval(s) box enter the rate in seconds at which any values contained in a user node are
refreshed.
7. In the Name box enter the name for the user parameter.
8. In the Significant change box enter the amount by which the user parameter must change before it is updated
in the user node.
Note: If the refresh for the user node containing the user parameter is not active it will not be updated, even
if the value changes by more than the significant change value.
9. In the User Role box click the lowest level user role that will have access to the user parameter from the list.
10. Once the settings are correct, click OK. If more than one parameter is selected, you can click OK All to
accept the changes to all parameters.
17.8.4.2 Delete a User Node
To delete a user node:
1. Run IQSET and display the System View.
2. Ensure that the current user role is at least 'Commissioning engineer'.
3. Right-click the user node that is to be deleted, and click Remove.
17.8.4.3 Delete User Parameters from a User Node
To delete user parameters from a user node:
1. Run IQSET and display the System View.
2. Ensure that the current user role is at least 'Commissioning engineer'.
3. Navigate down the user node structure to display the user parameter that is be deleted. User nodes with a +
next to them can be expanded by clicking the + to reveal what is below them in the structure.
4. Right-click the user parameter that is to be deleted, and click Delete.
To display a map of an individual LAN double click the LAN or right click and from the displayed menu
click Maximise Lan. To return to the view of the entire site double click inside the LAN, or right click and
from the displayed menu click Minimise Lan. The map can be refreshed by right clicking the map and on
the displayed menu clicking Refresh Lan or Refresh Internetwork.
To display a map of an individual LAN double click the LAN or right click and from the displayed menu
click Maximise Lan. To return to the view of the entire site double click inside the LAN, or right click and
from the displayed menu click Minimise Lan. The map can be refreshed by right clicking the map and on
the displayed menu clicking Refresh Lan or Refresh Internetwork.
Individual parts of the system (LANs or a media segment) can be hidden by clicking the appropriate on
the map. Clicking the appropriate will display the part of the system that has been hidden. To zoom in/out
of the map move the slider below the Overview Area. The map can be arranged to make it more readable,
the tool tips can be turned ON/OFF, labels can be turned ON/OFF, the key can be displayed, and applets can
be run.
3. It is possible to view maps of the internetwork by double clicking Iwrk, or other LANs by mapping the
internetwork, and then double clicking the required LAN.
The information on the screen is automatically refreshed; this refresh can be stopped by clicking Stop, and
started by clicking Start. To force a refresh for a device, right-click it and click Refresh. Tasks can be
performed by right-clicking the object in the map (e.g. LAN) and clicking the required one.
Note: It may be necessary to identify the device first so that the tasks that apply to the device can be worked
out.
4. To close the map, click at the top of the window.
6. In the Universal Pin box enter the PIN that is to be used to provide the tool with the necessary access to
create the electrical map. If the PIN for each device is to be entered individually select the Prompt pin input?
check box. This will cause the applet to prompt for a PIN for individual controllers if the PIN required for
each controller is different.
7. In the Timeout (second) box enter the time allowed to build the electrical map. Sometimes on large LANs
it will be necessary to increase the amount of time allowed.
8. If the K attributes are to be logged to an XML file, select the Log the K attributes to xml file check box.
Caution: Turning this feature off will mean that if the process fails the applet will be unable to return the K
attributes back to their original state.
9. If the K attributes are to be restored to their original state if a failure occurs, select the On failure k value
auto restore check box.
10. If the LAN has a mixture of IQ3, IQ4 and pre IQ3 controllers and there are pre IQ3 controllers that have
previously failed to map electrically clear the Include IQ3s check box.
11. Click OK. The electrical mapping process is carried out. When complete the electrical map is displayed
along with a summary of the LAN. To abort the process right click and in the displayed menu click Abort
current sorting.
To zoom in/out of the map move the slider below the Overview Area. The map can be arranged to make it
more readable, the tool tips can be turned ON/OFF, labels can be turned ON/OFF, the key can be displayed,
and applets can be run.
Note: If the process fails, or is aborted the K attributes may be left as ‘RaTzZz’ or 'Not CATZZZ' in some
devices. In this case, it is necessary to manually set the attribute back to the original value.
To send a directed text comms message, select the device. To send a global text comms message, select the
LAN. To send a global global text comms message select the internetwork. To send the text comms message
as a visitor message select the LAN, and specify the text comms session options to use visitor comms.
3. In the box at the bottom of the Text Comms Session Window enter the required text communications
message and press ENTER to send the command to the message.
The message will be sent as either a read, write with acknowledge, or write without acknowledge depending
on what has been set in the text comms session options. The default is Auto (REQ – OWH) which means if
the message contains an = it is sent as a write with acknowledge, otherwise it is sent as a read. If required
you can force the message to be sent as a read, or a write by clicking Read or Write.
It is also possible to send a previously used message, or a favourite message, by clicking the required message
from the appropriate list, and pressing ENTER. The last message sent can be repeated indefinitely by clicking
Repeat. Click Stop to stop the message repeating.
4. Select/clear Refresh is active check box. Selected indicates the refresh is on.
5. Once the settings are correct, click OK.
17.12 Upload/Download Strategy
17.12.1 Download a Single Strategy to Multiple Controllers
It is possible to download a single strategy to more than one controller over the network.
To download a single strategy to multiple controllers:
1. Create the file that is to be downloaded. Not required if a solution is to be used.
2. View the site in the System View containing the controllers to which the strategy is to be downloaded.
3. Right-click the site, LAN or device and click Add to Transfer List. The IQTool File Transfer Window is
displayed.
Note that the appearance of this window is different for different type of controller.
4. Select the Download option.
Select the required solution from the list. Details about the controller type, hardware variant, and options
of the controller for which the solution was designed are displayed along with a description of the
solution's functionality.
Icon Description
or press CTRL+A Selects all the devices in the grid. Devices excluded by a filter are NOT selected.
or press CTRL+U Unselects all controllers in the grid including any excluded by a filter.
10. If any of the controllers have security enabled specify the password that will authorise the download.
IQ3 or IQ4 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
In the Password box enter the matching password.
For IQ4 or IQ3 v1.3 or greater controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ4 or IQ3 controller has security enabled, it will request a username and password. The username and
password is sent must match with one in the controller and have a high enough level of authority.
Pre IQ3 and IQeco controllers:
In the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ controller has PIN protection enabled, it will request a PIN before a download is allowed. The PIN
that is sent must match with one in the controller that has a PIN Level of 99 or greater.
Note: Only one password or PIN is sent therefore if the controllers have different passwords, or PINs the
download will fail. It is therefore recommended that all the controllers on a system have the same username
and password, or PIN.
11. If downloading to IQ1 and IQ2 version <= 2.0 controllers the Send IQF and Send LDF options are displayed
select the format of the strategy file that is to be downloaded to those controllers.
12. To force the use of IQF protocol click and select Use IQ Lan.
Note: Normally this should not be selected, the appropriate protocol is automatically selected. It should only
be checked if you want to force the use of IQF When selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File
boxes are greyed out.
Option Description
Merges the User modules being downloaded by IQSET with those already present in the
Merge and
IQ4, leaving the User modules in the IQ4 unchanged if there are any duplicates (same user
Maintain
name and type).
Deletes all User modules in the IQ4 and replaces them with the User modules downloaded
Replace All
by IQSET.
Merges all User modules downloaded by IQSET with those in the IQ4, overwriting duplicate
Merge and
modules (same user name and type) in the IQ and leaving other User modules in the IQ4
Overwrite
unchanged.
Ignore Ignores any User modules defined in IQSET leaving those in the IQ4 unchanged.
17. If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files
used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.
Note: It is not necessary to download language files to IQ4 controllers as the necessary files are already in
the controller.
Note: Language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop.
18. If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have XNC functionality enabled
specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File check box.
Note: The XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop.
19. Click . IQSET will attempt to communicate with the controllers. If connecting to a vCNC operating in
'Secure' mode you will be prompted for the user name and password of a CNC User module in the device.
For other scenarios IQSET may prompt for other information or display a message before allowing the
connection - see Connect to the site.
Clicking will stop the download for all devices. After the download process has started if there
are devices in the list for download that are no longer required they can be deselected by right clicking
on the device's row and selecting Abort Device(s) providing the download to the device has not started.
If a device has not been selected it can be selected after the download has started by right clicking on the
device's row and selecting Add Device(s) to Transfer.
Note: Once the process has started additional devices cannot be added to the grid.
Note that the appearance of this window is different for different type of controller.
4. Select the Download option.
5. Specify the directory containing the file that is to be downloaded. Not required if a solution is to be used.
To specify the transfer directory:
Click next to the Transfer Directory box. The Browse For Folder dialogue box is displayed.
Icon Description
or press CTRL+A Selects all the devices in the grid. Devices excluded by a filter are NOT selected.
or press CTRL+U Unselects all controllers in the grid including any excluded by a filter.
9. Ensure that a file is NOT selected in Select Download File area.
10. If any of the controllers have security enabled specify the password that will authorise the download.
IQ3 or IQ4 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
In the Password box enter the matching password.
For IQ4 or IQ3 v1.3 or greater controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ4 or IQ3 controller has security enabled, it will request a username and password. The username and
password is sent must match with one in the controller and have a high enough level of authority.
Pre IQ3 and IQeco controllers:
In the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ controller has PIN protection enabled, it will request a PIN before a download is allowed. The PIN
that is sent must match with one in the controller that has a PIN Level of 99 or greater.
Note: Only one password or PIN is sent therefore if the controllers have different passwords, or PINs the
download will fail. It is therefore recommended that all the controllers on a system have the same username
and password, or PIN.
9. If downloading to IQ1 and IQ2 version <= 2.0 controllers the Send IQF and Send LDF options are displayed
select the format of the strategy file that is to be downloaded to those controllers.
10. To force the use of IQF protocol click and select Use IQ Lan.
Note: Normally this should not be selected, the appropriate protocol is automatically selected. It should only
be checked if you want to force the use of IQF When selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File
boxes are greyed out.
Option Description
Merges the User modules being downloaded by IQSET with those already present in the
Merge and
IQ4, leaving the User modules in the IQ4 unchanged if there are any duplicates (same user
Maintain
name and type).
Deletes all User modules in the IQ4 and replaces them with the User modules downloaded
Replace All
by IQSET.
Merges all User modules downloaded by IQSET with those in the IQ4, overwriting duplicate
Merge and
modules (same user name and type) in the IQ and leaving other User modules in the IQ4
Overwrite
unchanged.
Ignore Ignores any User modules defined in IQSET leaving those in the IQ4 unchanged.
18. If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files
used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.
Note: It is not necessary to download language files to IQ4 controllers as the necessary files are already in
the controller.
Note: Language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop.
19. If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have XNC functionality enabled
specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be downloaded by selecting the XNC File check box.
Note: The XNC file cannot be downloaded using the current loop.
20. Click . IQSET will attempt to communicate with the controllers. If connecting to a vCNC operating in
'Secure' mode you will be prompted for the user name and password of a CNC User module in the device.
For other scenarios IQSET may prompt for other information or display a message before allowing the
connection - see Connect to the site.
Clicking will stop the download for all devices. After the download process has started if there
are devices in the list for download that are no longer required they can be deselected by right clicking
on the device's row and selecting Abort Device(s) providing the download to the device has not started.
If a device has not been selected it can be selected after the download has started by right clicking on the
device's row and selecting Add Device(s) to Transfer.
Note: Once the process has started additional devices cannot be added to the grid.
Note: The appearance of this dialogue box is different for different type of controller.
4. The download file is automatically determined by the address of the controller but can be changed if required.
To specify the download file:
Click Change or . The Open dialogue box is displayed.
Click the required file in the list. To select a different location, click the drive, or folder in the Look in
box, and double-click the folders in the folder list to select the required directory.
Click Open.
If is displayed the download file cannot be located check the file exists, and is specified correctly.
5. If the controller has security enabled specify the security details that will authorise the download.
IQ3 or IQ4 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
Option Description
Merges the User modules being downloaded by IQSET with those already present in the
Merge and
IQ4, leaving the User modules in the IQ4 unchanged if there are any duplicates (same user
Maintain
name and type).
Deletes all User modules in the IQ4 and replaces them with the User modules downloaded
Replace All
by IQSET.
Merges all User modules downloaded by IQSET with those in the IQ4, overwriting duplicate
Merge and
modules (same user name and type) in the IQ and leaving other User modules in the IQ4
Overwrite
unchanged.
Ignore Ignores any User modules defined in IQSET leaving those in the IQ4 unchanged.
12. If downloading to IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language files
used for the display of web pages and alarms are downloaded by selecting the Language Files check box.
Note: It is not necessary to download language files to IQ4 controllers as the necessary files are already in
the controller.
Note: Language files cannot be downloaded using the current loop.
15. Click . IQSET will attempt to communicate with the controller. If connecting to a vCNC operating in
'Secure' mode you will be prompted for the user name and password of a CNC User module in the device.
For other scenarios IQSET may prompt for other information or display a message before allowing the
connection - see Connect to the site.
The progress is indicated at the bottom to the dialogue box. Clicking will stop the download.
Once the download is complete the text 'Download Complete' is displayed at the bottom of the dialogue
box.
If is not available the specified file does not exit, and a different file must be specified before the
download can take place.
Note: The appearance of this dialogue box is different for different type of controller.
3. Specify the directory in which the uploaded file is to be stored. It defaults to the Upload directory for the
current project.
To specify the upload directory:
Click .The Browse For Folder dialogue box is displayed.
Navigate to the required directory. A new directory can be created by clicking Make New Folder.
Click OK.
4. If the controller has security enabled specify the password that will authorise the upload.
IQ3 or IQ4 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
In the Password box enter the matching password.
For IQ4 or IQ3 v1.3 or greater controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN.
12. Click . IQSET will attempt to communicate with the controller. If connecting to a vCNC operating in
'Secure' mode you will be prompted for the user name and password of a CNC User module in the device.
For other scenarios IQSET may prompt for other information or display a message before allowing the
connection - see Connect to the site.
The progress is indicated at the bottom to the dialogue box. Clicking will stop the upload. Once
the upload is complete the text 'Upload Complete is displayed at the bottom of the dialogue box.
17.12.5 Upload from Multiple Controllers
It is possible to upload strategy from more than one IQ controller over the network.
The upload will generate a single strategy file for each controller from which strategy is uploaded. These files are
stored in the upload directory, and named in the following format.
L<xxx>n<yyy>.zzz>
Where <xxx> specifies the LAN number of the controller. <yyy> specifies the network address of the controller.
<zzz> indicates the file format (IQ3, IQ4, IQe, IQF, or SCN), e.g. L099n020.IQ4 would be the file name given to the
file uploaded from controller 20 on LAN 99.
Note: If uploading from IQ3 or IQ4 controllers the uploaded file will contain the IP address and LAN number and
device address.
To upload strategy from multiple controllers:
1. View the site in the System View containing the controllers to which the strategy is to be uploaded.
Note that the appearance of this window is different for different type of controller.
3 Specify the directory in which the uploaded files are to be stored. It defaults to the Upload directory for the
current project. The contents of the upload directory can be viewed by selecting Display Upload Dir.
To specify the upload directory:
Click .The Browse For Folder dialogue box is displayed.
Navigate to the required directory. A new directory can be created by clicking Make New Folder.
Click OK.
4. Add/Remove devices from the grid until it contains all the devices from which strategy is to be uploaded.
To add a single controller:
Navigate the site to locate the controller.
Right-click the controller, and click Add to Transfer List, or drag the controller from the System View
on to the File Transfer Window. The controller will be added to the grid.
Note: If the IQTool File Transfer window is not already displayed, this action will cause it to be displayed.
To add all the controllers on a LAN or site:
Navigate to the site or LAN.
Right-click the LAN or site, and click Add to Transfer List. All the controllers on the LAN/site will be
added to the grid.
Icon Description
or press CTRL+A Selects all the devices in the grid. Devices excluded by a filter are NOT selected.
or press CTRL+U Unselects all controllers in the grid including any excluded by a filter.
7. If any of the controllers have security enabled specify the password that will authorise the download.
IQ3 or IQ4 controllers:
In the User Name box enter the username.
In the Password box enter the matching password.
For IQ4 or IQ3 v1.3 or greater controllers in the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ4 or IQ3 controller has security enabled, it will request a username and password. The username and
password is sent must match with one in the controller and have a high enough level of authority.
Pre IQ3 and IQeco controllers:
In the Pin box enter the PIN.
If an IQ controller has PIN protection enabled, it will request a PIN before a download is allowed. The PIN
that is sent must match with one in the controller that has a PIN Level of 99 or greater.
8. If uploading from IQ1 and IQ2 version <= 2.0 controllers the Get IQF and Get SCN options are displayed
select the required option. By default, IQSET uses IQF files for IQ2 controllers earlier than v2.
9. To force the use of IQF protocol click and select Use IQ Lan.
Note: Normally this should not be selected, the appropriate protocol is automatically selected. It should only
be checked if you want to force the use of IQF When selected the Backdrops, Language Files, and XNC File
boxes are greyed out.
10. If uploading from IQECO v2.0 or greater, IQ3 or IQ4 controllers specify whether the strategy file is to be
uploaded by selecting the Strategy File check box.
11. If uploading from IQ3 or IQ4 controllers specify whether the backdrop files required for the controller's
Graphical Display Pages are uploaded by selecting the Backdrops check box.
Note: Backdrop files cannot be uploaded using the current loop. The use of backdrop files larger than 100k
is not recommended. Backdrops bigger than 200k will be prevented from being uploaded, the total size used
by all backdrops in the controller limited to 2Mb.
12. If uploading from IQ4 or IQ3 controllers with version 1.1 firmware or greater specify whether the language
files used for the display of web pages and alarms are uploaded by selecting the Language Files check box.
Note: Language files cannot be uploaded using the current loop.
13. If uploading from IQ3 controllers with version 1.3 firmware or greater that have XNC functionality enabled
specify whether the TCL program (.XNC file) is to be uploaded by selecting the XNC File check box.
Note: The XNC file cannot be uploaded using the current loop.
14. Click . IQSET will attempt to communicate with the controllers. If connecting to a vCNC operating in
'Secure' mode you will be prompted for the user name and password of a CNC User module in the device.
For other scenarios IQSET may prompt for other information or display a message before allowing the
connection - see Connect to the site.
Clicking will stop the upload from all controllers. After the upload process has started if there
are devices in the list for upload that are no longer required they can be deselected by right clicking on
the device's check box and selecting Abort Device(s) providing the upload to the device has not started.
If a device has not been selected it can be selected after the upload has started by right clicking on the
device's row and selecting Add Device(s) to Transfer.
Note: Once the process has started additional devices cannot be added to the grid.
17.13 View Alarms
17.13.1 View Current Alarms
All the current alarms (i.e. alarms that have occurred and are waiting to be cleared) that have occurred on the Trend
network that the Alarm Monitoring Applet is monitoring since the applet was loaded can be viewed as they arrive on
the Current Alarms tab of the Alarm Monitoring Window.
To view current alarms:
1. Ensure the devices on the network are configured to send alarms to the address being used by the applet.
2. Display the site for which alarms are to be monitored in the System View.
3. On the Tools menu click Monitor Incoming Alarms. The Alarm Monitoring Window is displayed.
4. Click the Current Alarms tab.
The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and is refreshed as new alarms occur. Colours are
used to indicate whether the alarm is a set alarm or a cleared alarm. A red bell indicates a set alarm, and a
green bell indicates a cleared alarm.
The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and displays the set alarm with its corresponding
cleared alarm on the same line.
17.13.3 View Incoming Alarms
All the alarms that have occurred on the Trend network that the Alarm Monitoring Applet is monitoring since the
applet was loaded can be viewed on the Incoming Alarms tab of the Alarm Monitoring Window.
To view incoming alarms:
1. Ensure the devices on the network are configured to send alarms to the address being used by the applet.
2. Display the site for which alarms are to be monitored in the System View.
3. On the Tools menu click Monitor Incoming Alarms. The Alarm Monitoring Window is displayed.
4. Click the Incoming Alarms tab.
The tab contains detailed information about each alarm, and displays the set alarm with its corresponding
cleared alarm on the same line. Colours are used to indicate whether the alarm is a set alarm or a cleared
alarm. A red bell indicates a set alarm, and a green bell indicates a cleared alarm.
17.14 View a Controller's Web Pages
For IQ3 and IQ4 controllers it is possible to access the web pages made available to over an Ethernet network. These
pages provide information about the module parameters in the controller, and enable alarms and graphs to be viewed,
adjustments to be made, as well as access to the controllers Graphical Display Pages if they have been setup.
To view a controller's web pages:
1. Browse the system to display the controller whose web pages are to be displayed application.
2. Right click on the device and click Web page. Internet explorer will be loaded and the controller accessed.
Having accessed the controller, you can navigate around the various pages to view the required information and make
adjustments. Clicking on the different parts of the screen will enable you to perform different tasks the display will
make is clear what can be done. When a reference to a module is displayed with an underline clicking on it will display
the module’s detail page.
Appendices
IQ4 Modules
IQECO Modules
Command Line Commands
Keyboard Short Cuts
3rd Party Software Licences
A1 IQ4 Modules
This section describes in detail all the configuration parameters for each module. For further information, see the IQ4 Configuration Manual (TE200768).
IQ4 Address Modules
IQ4 Alarm Destination Modules
IQ4 Alarm Group Modules
IQ4 Alarm Route Modules
IQ4 Calendar Modules
IQ4 CNC User Modules
IQ4 Directory Modules
IQ4 Display Modules
IQ4 Driver Modules
IQ4 Function Modules
IQ4 IC Comms Modules
IQ4 Input Modules
IQ4 Interface Modules
IQ4 I/O Modules
IQ4 Logic Modules
IQ4 Loop Modules
IQ4 Network Modules
IQ4 NTD Modules
IQ4 OSS Modules
IQ4 Page Modules
IQ4 Plot Modules
IQ4 Schedule Offset Modules
IQ4 Sensor Type Modules
IQ4 States Category Modules
IQ4 Time Modules
IQ4 Time Schedule Modules
IQ4 User Modules
IQ4 Virtual CNC Modules
Throughout this section module parameters will be referenced by their letter the E parameter would be referenced as E. The value of a module's parameter is referenced by the parameter
letter in brackets e.g. (E) refers to the actual Value of the E parameter.
For each module, the module identifier is listed which should be used when accessing the module with text comms, along with its default overview parameter, and size in brIQs. There
is also a description of how the module works and a table listing all the parameters associated with it, and a description of each parameter.
The Type column of the tables in this section indicates the parameter type.
Parameter
Text Description
Type
Input parameters provide an input to the module. They can be linked to another module's output, or set to a specific value. If linked to another module their value is
I Input
changed by that module. If set to a specific value it will remain at that value.
Output parameters are outputs from the module. Most are available in the strategy and can be connected to the input of other modules. Some are only available to
O Output
text communications and BACnet communications.
Internal parameters control the way the module functions, they cannot be connected to another module. They will remain at the set value unless they are changed
N Internal
by a supervisor or tool, or another controller using an IC communications message. Some internal parameters are updated by the module as part of its operation.
Parameters are classified by data types.
Data Type Description
+Full analogue As for full analogue, but these parameters can only have zero and positive values.
Digital Binary digits having two states (0 or 1). If they are connectable parameters, they can only be connected to digital inputs or outputs as appropriate.
v3.30 firmware or greater: Double precision numeric parameters. If they are connectable parameters, they can only be connected to analogue inputs or outputs as
Double Precision appropriate.
A double precision analogue value has a negative excursion -1020 to 0 and positive excursion 0 to +1020. However, the resolution is 16 decimal digits.
Enum A special data type that is limited to a set of predefined constants. The variable must be equal to one of the values that have been predefined for it.
Floating point numeric parameters. If they are connectable parameters, they can only be connected to analogue inputs or outputs as appropriate.
A full analogue value has a negative excursion -1020 to 0 and positive excursion 0 to +1020. However, the resolution is 7.5 decimal digits (the actual number is
Full Analogue
16777215), so any further digits are represented by zeros. Thus, the number 98765432100 would be represented by 98765430000.
Other analogue parameters operate over a restricted range.
Integer Any whole number.
Strings Alphanumeric strings (e.g. used for labels).
Time The value is a time in the format hh:mm.
When configuring a controller only the modules used in the strategy are added to the controller's memory. This enables the number of each type of module to be adjusted to suit the
requirements of the strategy, so long as the memory capacity of the controller is not exceeded. The available capacity is measured in brIQs see the appropriate controller data sheet for
details of the capacity of each type of IQ4 controller. Each type of module has memory requirement - see the IQ4 Configuration Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Enables/disables the module. When disabled the module is not serviced. Its internal states and output will
Disable Module 1=Disabled 0 I ~
be maintained at their values prior to disabling.
0=Enabled
0 to 30-characters. Any ASCII
Label User-friendly label for the module. Blank N $
character except \/(){};,:
Page Page number containing the module. 0 to 255 0 N p
IQ41x: 0 to 300
IQ422: 0 to 600
IQ4NC/00/..: 0 to 600
IQ4NC/12/24VAC: 0 to 600
IQ4NC/16/XNC/...: 0 to 600
IQ4NC/32/XNC/...: 0 to 640
IQ4E: 0 to 600
The sequence step at which the module is serviced. It may be entered into the sequence table more than IQ4E/32: 0 to 600
Sequence Step 0 N @
once. If set to ‘0’ the module will be event driven. IQ4E/64: 0 to 640
IQ4E/96: 0 to 960
IQ4E/96/XNC: 1280
IQ4E/128: 0 to 1280
IQ4E/160: 0 to 1600
IQ4E/192: 0 to 1920
IQ422/00/XNC: 0 to 1280
IQ422/12/XNC: 0 to 600
0 or 1
Sequence Table Specifies whether the module is sequenced (in sequence table) or event driven. 1 = Sequenced 0 N #
0 = Event driven
X Co-ordinate Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. 0 to 255 0 N x
Y Co-ordinate Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page. 0 to 255 0 N y
Note: Although these parameters are common they may not all exist in all modules.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Controller on CONL alarm - Indicates when the IQ4 restarts successfully due to power up or
1 = Successful restart - O S0
Line an internal soft reset and loads up and runs a valid strategy.
0 = unsuccessful restart
HELP alarm - Indicates when there is a checksum failure (corrupt strategy). Set 0 or 1
Corrupt
when the IQ4 starts due to power up or an internal soft reset and is unable to load 0 = OK 0 O S1
Strategy
up and run a valid strategy. 1 = Failure
0 or 1
Device
Indicates whether the IQ4 has been discovered by a tool. 0 = Not discovered 0 O -
Discovered
1 = Discovered
External I/O
Total number of external I/O channels connected. 0 to 176 - N o
Count
0 or 1
External IO
Indicates whether the external I/O modules may be connected 0 = No external I/O modules - N k
Enabled
1 = External I/O modules maybe connected
External IO
The number of external I/O channels that may be connected. 0 to 176 - N l
Limit
0 or 1
FSSL alarm - indicates that an email alarm has not been sent due to an SLL
Fail SLL 0 = OK - N -
failure. When the fault is rectified a CSSL alarm is generated.
1 = Fail
0 or 1
FRTC alarm - Indicates if any of the parameters of the real-time clock are outside
Failed RTC 0 = OK - O S3
the range i.e. the RTC has failed.
1 = Fail
0 or 1
FLER alarm - Indicates if the IQ4 is unable to load its current strategy file, or the
File Error 0 = OK - O E6
backup to this file, and has had to load the original downloaded file.
1 = Fail
A number which refers to a list of files included in this version of IQ4. For Trend
File List - - N f
use only.
General 0 to 500
The Alarm Group module to which general alarms from the IQ4 are sent. 0 N g
Alarm Group 0 = not Sent
A label which describes the IQ4. It is sent as part of a text alarm message to
Identifier identify its source and should be unique on the site. It is also used as attribute 1 Any ASCII character except \/(){};,: Null N D
for text communications.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Arabic, Czech, Dansk, Deutsch, English, English US,
Language The language used for the display of web pages and display and transmission of Espanol, Francais, Hebrew, Italiano, Nederlands, Norsk,
English N P
selection alarms. Polski, Portugues, Romanian, Russian, Simplified
Chinese, Suomi, Svenska
Local
The network address of the IQ4. It must be unique on the Local LAN. 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 20 N L
Address
Local Lan The LAN number of the IQ4. 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 20 N N
Onboard IO
Number of I/O channels available in the IQ4 0 or 16 - N h
count
Override The time (minutes) for which a module set to override will stay in override before 0 to 1440
0 N T
Timer (mins) reverting to normal control. 0 = No override
IQ41x: 1000000
IQ422: 1000000
IQ4NC: 1000000
IQ4E: 1000000
Plot Memory IQ4E/32: 1000000
Memory capacity for plots (log points). - N V
Size IQ4E/64: 1000000
IQ4E/96: 1000000
IQ4E/128: 1000000
IQ4E/160: 1250000
IQ4E/192: 1500000
Plot Memory
The amount of memory already used for plots. - - N w
Used
Power Reset Set to '1' on power up for one sequence table cycle. 0 or 1 - O P
Send Service 0 or 1
Causes the IQ4 to send its service PIN message. 0 N !
PIN 1 = Send message
Sequence 0 or 1
STOR alarm - Indicates when the IQ4 is unable to complete the sequence of
Table 0 = OK - O E1
modules in the required time.
Overrun 1 = Fail
Serial
The serial number for the IQ4. Any ASCII character except \/(){};,: 0 - N M
Number
A unique machine readable alphanumeric code that identifies the site to a
Site GUID - Null N O
computer.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
A human readable site identifier. All controllers on the site should have the same IQ4's MAC
Site Name 0 to 30-characters. Any ASCII character except \/(){};,: 0 N $
site name. Address
Strategy The revision of strategy. Incremented by IQSET each time strategy download file
1 to max 1 N d
Revision is created.
The network address of the local supervisor port on Local LAN. Unique on LAN.
Supervisor 0,4 to 119 excluding 10
If set to ‘0’ the device connected to the port can only communicate with the IQ4. 0 N U
Port 0 = Local device only
If set to non-zero it allows the connected device to talk over the network.
IQ41x,
IQ422,
Type Name The IQ4 type. IQ41x, IQ422, IQ4E, or IQ4NC N y
IQ4E,
IQ4NC
The network address of the sCNC associated with the local engineering (USB)
port. This port is for use by IQSET and enables it to access the whole network.
USB
If the set to ‘0’ a sCNC at address 125 is created for the period of the IQSET
Supervisor 0,4 to 119 excluding 10 0 N E
session. When the IQSET PC is removed the sCNC times out and no longer exists
Port
on the network. If set to non-zero, the sCNC remains on when the IQSET PC is
removed.
Version String indicating IQ4 type, firmware issue, I/O count and date. 25 characters. Any ASCII character except \/(){};,: 0 - N C
0 or 1
Indicates if XNC functionality is enabled - only applies to /XNC variants, set to
XNC Enabled 0 = Disabled - N x
‘0’ for all other variants.
1 = Enabled
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The BACnet device instance of the device to which the alarms are to be sent.
Device If set to ‘0’ the ‘Network Number’ and ‘MAC Address’ parameters are used to address the BACnet device to which the
0 to 4194393 0 N D
instance alarms are to be sent, otherwise it is addressed using the ‘Device instance’ parameter. It must be set up if remote device is
using DHCP.
IQ4v3.40 or greater. The end time of the period during which the alarms are to be sent to the destination in the format 00:00:00 to
End Time 00:00:00 I e
HH:MM:SS. 23:59:59
0 or 1
Indicates when the module is unable to reach the specified destination. Set to '1' when the destination device fails to
Failed 0 = Received 0 O F
acknowledge the receipt of an alarm after the second retry
1 = Failed
Hold The value defines the priority level below which alarms are held back. If an alarm is received above this level it, and all held
0 to 255 0 I H
Priority alarms, will be sent. It may be overridden if a high number of alarms are waiting to be sent.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
0 = Clear
Inhibit Clear Specifies whether the Alarm Destination module will send clear alarms. alarms sent 0 N C
1 = Clear
alarms not sent
The BACnet MAC Address of the device to which the alarms are to be sent. When the 'Device instance' parameter is set to
MAC ‘0’ it is used in conjunction with the ‘Network Number’ parameter to address the BACnet device to which alarms are to be Valid MAC
Blank N M
Address sent. address
Note: BACnet MAC addresses do not have colon separators (e.g. A5C3A1BABAC0).
The network number of the BACnet device to which the alarms are to be sent. When the 'Device instance' parameter is set
Network
to ‘0’ it is used in conjunction with the ‘MAC Address’ parameter to address the BACnet device to which alarms are to be 0 to 65534 0 N N
Number
sent.
An integer that can be used in alarm messages to identify the alarm and enable the device receiving the alarm to process it 0 to
Process ID 0 N P
in a specific way, e.g. a specific ID could be used to identify all HVAC alarms. 4294967295
Retry The interval (in minutes) between batches of attempts to send alarm to destination. The interval should be set to '0' for
0 to 32767 0 N R
Interval autodialling to allow continual retries at 30 seconds.
0 or 1
0 = Outside
Schedule IQ4v3.40 or greater. Indicates if the module is in the period alarms are sent to the destination i.e. time of day is between the
period 0 O O
Output start and end time and the valid day bit is set.
1 = Inside
period
Defines whether the IQ4 expects an acknowledgement for the alarm (Confirmed) or will just send once and not expect an
0 to 1
acknowledgement (Unconfirmed). If set to Unconfirmed the IQ4 acknowledges the alarm itself so the ‘Failed’ parameter
Service 0 = Confirmed
will never get set to ‘1’ as the IQ4 has no way of knowing if the alarm transmission was successful. When set to confirmed, 0 N T
Type 1=
the IQ4 will expect an acknowledgement of the alarm, and will continue to send the alarm until one is received, or it has
Unconfirmed
determined that a failure has occurred.
No
Source The Alarm Route module(s) from which the Alarm Destination module accepts alarms. Route modules I Sc
connection
IQ4v3.40 or greater. The start time of the period during which the alarms are to be sent to the destination in the format 00:00:00 to
Start Time 00:00:00 I s
HH:MM:SS. 23:59:59
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies the changes in status that cause alarms to be sent. There are three different changes in alarm state that can generate
alarms:
State Change Description
To OffNormal The value has changed to one that is not in the normal range.
Transitions 000 to 111 111 N R
To Fault The value has changed to one that is the fault range.
To Normal The value has returned to the normal range.
It is bit field containing 3-bits: the left most bit enables/disables the To-Normal alarm, the middle bit enables/disables the
To-Fault alarm, and the right most bit enables/disables the To-OffNormal alarm.
The type of destination to which alarms are to be sent. It is set up in IQSET, and cannot be changed from the web page. The 4
Type 4 N Y
available parameters change with the destination type. 4 = BACnet
IQ4v3.40 or greater. The days during which the alarms are to be sent to the destination formatted as a bit string where the 0000000 to
Valid Days 0000000 I w
first bit represents Monday and last bit Sunday. E.g. 1000001 would be Monday and Sunday'. 1111111
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.3.2 IQ4 Trend Alarm Destination Modules
Module Identifier e
Size in brIQs 14
Default Overview Parameters $, F
Trend Alarm Destination modules define the destinations on the Trend network to which alarms can be sent. They specify where the alarms are to be sent; the format in which the alarm
is sent, and can determine when the alarms are sent.
When an alarm is submitted for delivery the module will compare the priority of the alarm with the hold priority and if the alarm’s priority level is greater than the value of the hold
priority, the alarm will be sent. If the alarm is not sent, it will be stored until the priority of the alarm is higher than the hold priority. If an alarm is sent, then any other alarms being held
for that destination will also be sent. This allows calls to autodialled destinations to be limited to times when a high priority alarm is to be sent. The hold priority may be changed by a
time schedule to ensure that all low priority alarms are sent every day (e.g. during time of low call charges) if a high priority alarm is not generated.
Alarms can either be sent to an address on the Trend network, to a specific IP address or host name, or an email address. The available parameters change with the destination type:
A1.3.2.1 IQ4 Trend Alarm Destination Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', 'Page', 'X co-ordinate' and 'Y co-ordinate' - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Indicates when the module is unable to reach the specified destination. Set to ‘1’ when the destination device fails to
Failed 0 = OK 0 O F
acknowledge the receipt of an alarm after the second retry.
1 = Failed
Hold The value defines the priority level below which alarms are held back. If an alarm is received above this level it, and all
0 to 255 0 I H
Priority held alarms, will be sent. It may be overridden if a high number of alarms are waiting to be sent.
0 or 1
0 = Clear alarms
Inhibit
Specifies whether the Alarm Destination module will send clear alarms. sent 0 N C
Clear
1 = Clear alarms
not sent
Retry The interval (in minutes) between batches of attempts to send alarm to destination. The interval should be set to '0' for
0 to 32767 0 N R
Interval autodialling to allow continual retries at 30 seconds.
No
Source The Alarm Route module(s) from which the Alarm Destination module accepts alarms. Route Modules I Sc
connection
1 to 3
The type of destination to which alarms are to be sent. It is set up in IQSET, and cannot be changed from the web page. 1 = IQ Lan
Type 1 N Y
The available parameters change with the destination type. 2 = IP Address
3 = Email
If Type is set to IQ Lan the module has the following additional parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 4 to 119 excluding
Address The device address of the device to which alarms are to be sent. 10. 0 N A
0 = Not used
0, 1,4 to 119 excluding
LAN The LAN number of the device to which alarms are sent. 10. 0 N N
0 = Local LAN
0 to 3
The format of the alarm message. Coded and attribute alarms are for decoding by supervisors. Text alarms are
0 = Coded
Message man-readable.
1 = Text 0 N M
Format Always use Attribute alarms unless sending to a legacy supervisor or display that does not support them use in
2 = Attribute
which case ‘Text’.
3 = Enhanced (not used)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IP Address or host
Destination The IP address or hostname of the device to which alarms are to be sent. 128.1.1.4 N i
name
Destination
The TCP port on the device to which alarms are to be sent, where the receiving device will ‘listen’ for alarms. 0 to 65535 2774 N P
Port
0 to 3
0 = Coded
Message The format of the alarm message. Coded and attribute alarms are for decoding by supervisors. Text alarms are 1 = Text
0 N M
Format man-readable. 2 = Attribute
3 = Enhanced (not
used)
If Type is set to Email the module has the following additional parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 255
255 =
Hold Priority The priority of the alarm 0 I P
Highest
priority
Indicates when a new alarm occurs. It is set to ‘1’ for one sequence cycle whenever a new alarm, attached to the Alarm Group 0 or 1
New Alarm module, is generated. If alarms are occurring faster that once per sequence cycle, it will remain at ‘1’ until one sequence 1 = Alarm 0 O N
cycle after the last alarm occurred. 0 = No alarm
Alarm Route No
Output The Alarm Route module(s) used to route the alarms to their destination(s). O Oc
modules connection
User ACK
v3.50 or greater. Specifies which BACnet alarm state transitions require user acknowledgement. 000 to 111 000 O U
Enable
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Day of the The day of the week when the schedule will come ON. When set to 'Unspecified'
0 = Unspecified - N A
Week any day is used. Only available when 'Use' is set to 'Week and Day'.
1 to 7 = Day of week (1 = Monday)
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
The day of the month when the schedule will go OFF. When set to 'Unspecified' 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31.
End Day - N E
any day is used. Only available when 'Use' is set to 'Range of Dates'. 0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
The month of the year when the schedule go OFF. When set to 'Unspecified' any
End Month 0 = Unspecified - N T
month is used. Only available when 'Use' is set to 'Range of Dates'.
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The year when the schedule will go off. When set to 'Unspecified' any year is 0 to 9999
End Year - N R
used. Not used when 'Use' is set to 'Week and Date'. 0 = Unspecified
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
The month of the year when the schedule will come ON. When set to 0 = Unspecified
Month of
'Unspecified' any month is used. Only available when 'Use' is set to 'Week and 1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January) - N W
Year
Day'. 13 = Every odd month
14 = Every even month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34.
0 = Unspecified
The day of the month when the schedule will come ON. When set to
Start Day 1 to 31 = Day of month - N S
'Unspecified' any day is used. Not used when 'Use' is set to 'Week and Date'.
32 = Last day of month
33 = Every odd day
34 = Every even day
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
0 = Unspecified
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
The month of the year when the schedule will come ON. When set to
Start Month 13 = Every odd month (January, March, May, July, September, - N O
'Unspecified' any month is used. Not used when 'Use' is set to 'Week and Date'.
November)
14 = Every even month (February, April, June, August,
October, December)
The year when the schedule will come ON. When set to 'Unspecified' any year 0, to 9999
Start Year - N Y
is used. Not used when 'Use' is set to 'Week and Date'. 0 = Unspecified
0, 1, 2, 3
1 = Date or Date Pattern
Date Option Specifies how the Calendar entry is to define the date(s). 1 N u
2 = Range of dates
3 = Week and Date
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 4
0 = Serif
1 = Sans-serif
Font Name The font used to display the text on a GraphIQ page. 0 N N
2 = Cursive
3 = Fantasy
4 = Monospace
Font size The size of the font (in points) used to display the text on a GraphIQ page. 6 to 72 12 N S
The colour the text is displayed in on a GraphIQ page. Specified using standard HTML colour format using 2 hex characters in
Fore Colour #RRGGBB #000000 N F
the range 0 to 255 reflecting the colour intensity.
In Alarm The colour of the text if the parameter from the IQ4 being displayed is in an alarm condition. Specified using standard HTML Fore
#RRGGBB N A
Colour colour format using 2 hex characters in the range 0 to 255 reflecting the colour intensity. colour
The module parameter that is to be displayed in the form:
<Module><Module Parameter>
<Module> specifies the type of module using its module identifier and module number (e.g., S1 for sensor 1).
Note: Only Sensor, Digital Input, Knob, Switch, Driver, and Time Schedule modules should be used. Other modules can be
used. However, they are only for use on GraphIQs; use in supervisors and displays may cause problems.
Valid module
Item <Module Parameter> specifies the parameter within the module that is to be displayed (e.g. sensor value). The module parameter Blank N I
parameter
is specified using the text comms identifier, and can be any parameter available within the specified module.
If <Module Parameter> is not specified, the default overview parameters for the module type are used. E.g. S1 would display
the sensor label, value, and units. The default overview parameters for each module are described in the module section of this
manual. Although multiple parameters are used as the default overview parameters it is only possible to specify single
parameters.
Left
The horizontal position of the top left corner of the value when it is displayed on a GraphIQ page. 0 to 1600 0 N X
Position
Parent The Directory module to which this item applies. 0 to 500 0 N R
Top
The vertical position of the top left corner of the value when it is displayed on a GraphIQ page. 0 to 1200 0 N Y
Position
0 to 99
User Level The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. 0 = no PIN 0 N P
required
1 to 1600
Width The width of the text box in which the text is displayed. 0 N W
0 = Autosize
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The URL accessed if the user clicks on the module on a GraphIQ page. This link can be to a page of information held
within the controller itself, a web site that is not the IQ4, or an email address.
If linking to a page of information held within the controller the reference should be entered in the format shown below:
trendModule:<Page>
Where <Page> specifies the page that is to be displayed. The format of <Page> varies depending on the destination.
If linking to a Graphical Display Page <Page> should be in the format below:
GraphIQs\<Directory Module Structure>\index.htm
Where <Directory Module Structure> is the directory module structure of the Display module that defines the page.
If linking to a Modules List Page <Page> should be in the format below:
<Module Type>.htm
Where <Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the
module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual.
URL Valid Link Blank N U
E.g. type S.htm to display the sensor module list page.
If linking to a Modules Details Page <Page> should be in the format below:
<Module Type><Module Number>.htm
Where <Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details of the
module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Number> specifies the number of the module.
E.g. to display the module details page for sensor 3 type S3.
If linking to an email address enter the required email address E.g. john.smith@work.com
If linking to a web site, enter the website’s URL. E.g. http://www.trendcontrols.com To link to a page in another IQ4
controller enter the URL for that page. If the destination controller has security set up add ? autoLogin=TRUE to the end
of the URL. This will pass the current login information to the destination controller. It is then compared with the users
set up in the destination controller and if it matches access is granted.
0 to 99
User Level The level of the PIN required by the user to view the module. 0 N P
0 = no PIN required
1 to 1600
Width The width of the text box in which the text is displayed. 0 N W
0 = Autosize
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch override.
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to
Active priority level 4 = Override 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module.
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA input must be in an alarm condition before
Alarm Delay (secs)(HOA) 0 to 178200 0 I d1(D)
the maintenance alarm is generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The Alarm Group module to which the HOA alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N d1(G)
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The state of the HOA alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O d1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA alarm must be cleared before the clear
0 to 178200 0 I d1(C)
(HOA) alarm is generated.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
0 or 1
Enabled (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I d1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
The percentage of the output to which the 0% input level corresponds (i.e. 20 % offset means that 0%
Offset 0 to 100 0 I O
input corresponds to 2V output).
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output is
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
switched on.
The percentage of the output which corresponds to the 0 to 100% input range (i.e. a range of 60% means
Range 0 to 100 0 I R
that an input range of 0 to 100 % corresponds to an output range of 6 V).
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the HOA alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O d1(T)
(HOA)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.2 IQ4 Binary Hysteresis Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 54
Default Overview Parameters $, l
The Binary Hysteresis driver module provides an ON/OFF type output from an analogue input. It has an analogue input S and provides a single digital output l with an optional antiphase
output a. The state of l is calculated by comparing the value of S with the ON and OFF switching levels. If (S) goes above the ON switching level, l will be set to 1, and if it is below the
OFF switching level, l will be set to 0. If an antiphase output is used the state of a will always be opposite to the state of l.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The binary hysteresis driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand)
or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s).
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase
phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set as per the table below:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch override.
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to
Active priority level 4 = Override 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module.
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA input must be in an alarm condition before
Alarm Delay (secs)(HOA) 0 to 178200 0 I d1(D)
the maintenance alarm is generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The Alarm Group module to which the HOA alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N d1(G)
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The state of the HOA alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O d1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA alarm must be cleared before the clear
0 to 178200 0 I d1(C)
(HOA) alarm is generated.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
0 or 1
Enabled (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I d1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
Hours Run The time (in hours) for which the in-phase output (prior to inversion) has been ON. 0 to 87600 0 O H
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 or 1 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
Number of Starts The number of times the in-phase output (prior to inversion) has been transitioned from ‘0’ to ‘1’. 0 to 109 0 O N
The input level at and below which the Driver module will switch OFF. Can be connected to an analogue
OFF Level 0 to 100 0 I F
output.
The input level at and above which the Driver module will switch ON. Can be connected to an analogue
ON Level 0 to 100 0 I O
output.
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output is
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the HOA alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O d1(T)
(HOA)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.3 IQ4 Digital Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 52
Default Overview Parameters $, l
The Digital Driver module provides an ON/OFF type output controlled by the state of a digital bit. It has a single digital source S and provides a single digital output l with an optional
antiphase output a. The state of l is determined directly by the state of S; if used, the state of A is always opposite to (l).
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The Digital Driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand) or OFF or
to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s).
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase
phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) as per the table below:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation 3 = HOA switch override.
Active priority level writes to priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the 4 = Override 10 O u
module. 9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
Alarm Delay v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA input must be in an alarm condition
0 to 178200 0 I d1(D)
(secs)(HOA) before the maintenance alarm is generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before
Alarm Delay the maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already
includes a delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay (secs) readback alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the
alarm state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The Alarm Group module to which the HOA alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N d1(G)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The state of the HOA alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O d1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm state
The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
(maintenance)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 or 1 0 O a
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA alarm must be cleared before the
0 to 178200 0 I d1(d)
(HOA) clear alarm is generated.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) the clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the
alarm state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared
Clear Alarm Delay before the clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already
includes a delay.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I d1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
input - only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports 0 = Auto
HOA State Hand/Off/Auto operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board 1 = Hand 0 O h
outputs or on an I/O module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
Hours Run The time (in hours) for which the in-phase output (prior to inversion) has been ON. 0 to 87600 0 O H
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
longer than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 or 1 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
Module Status The module's status. 2 = Disabled 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
The number of times the in-phase output (prior to inversion) has been transitioned from ‘0’ to
Number of Starts 0 to 109 0 O N
‘1’.
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to
Override Status 0 or 1 0 I v
‘1’.
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
output is switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
date&time;yyyy-mm- 0000-00-
Time of Hours Run Reset The time that the cumulative hours run was last reset to ‘0’, in full date and time format. O t
dd&Thh:mm:ss 00T00:00:00
Time of Last Value date&time;yyyy-mm- 0000-00-
The time that the output last changed state, in full date time format. O c
Change dd&Thh:mm:ss 00T00:00:00
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time of Number of Starts date&time;yyyy-mm- 0000-00-
The time that the cumulative number of starts was last reset to ‘0’, in full date and time format. O e
Reset dd&Thh:mm:ss 00T00:00:00
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the HOA alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O d1(T)
(HOA)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level 0 or 1 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.4 IQ4 Multi Stage Digital Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 61
Default Overview Parameters $, _
Multi Stage Digital Driver modules enable the controller to sequence multiple outputs and is ideal for controlling fan speed relays or boilers. They switch several outputs ON and OFF
as the input value (Source (S)) changes between stages. The driver changes between stages as the input value passes through each integer up to the maximum number of stages determined
by the Number of Stages parameter depending on the selected switching type.
Note: The driver requires consecutive outputs channels e.g. for 3 stages it will automatically take 3 consecutive inputs station from the output specified by the 'in-phase Hardware
Channel' parameter. These outputs cannot be spread across I/O modules.
The way in which the outputs are turned ON/OFF is determined by the Switching Type parameter which can be set to one of 3 modes:
Sequenced (One output is turned ON at a time in sequence.)
Cascaded (Outputs turned on in sequence leaving previous outputs ON (each step adds to the next).)
Binary (The input value is decoded to switch any combination of outputs.)
Sequenced
In sequence mode, only one output is ever enabled. As the Source (S) increases, or decreases, the output turns OFF before the next output turns ON. There is a delay of 300ms when
switching between stages to ensure that only one relay is active at a time.
The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON
>=3<4 3 ON
>=4<5 4 ON
>=5<6 5 ON
>=6<7 6 ON
>=7<8 7 ON
>=8 8 ON
The first output turned ON (Lead Output) can be specified using the Lead Output parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned on if the Lead Output parameter is set
to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON
>=3<4 3 ON
>=4<5 4 ON
>=5<6 5 ON
>=6<7 6 ON
>=7<8 7 ON
>=8 8 ON
The number of stages can be specified (maximum of 8) using the Number of Stages parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases when
the Number of Stages parameter is set to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON ON
>=3<4 3 ON ON ON
>=4<5 4 ON ON ON ON
>=5<6 5 ON ON ON ON ON
>=6<7 6 ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=7<8 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=8 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The first output turned ON (Lead Output) can be specified using the Lead Output parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned on if the Lead Output parameter is set
to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON ON
>=3<4 3 ON ON ON
>=4<5 4 ON ON ON ON
>=5<6 5 ON ON ON ON ON
>=6<7 6 ON ON ON ON ON ON
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=7<8 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=8 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The number of stages can be specified (maximum of 8) using the Number of Stages parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases when
the Number of Stages parameter is set to '3'.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0 00000000
>=1<2 1 00000001 ON
>=2<3 2 00000010 ON
>=3<4 3 00000011 ON ON
>=4<5 4 00000100 ON
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=5<6 5 00000101 ON ON
>=6<7 6 00000110 ON ON
>=7<8 7 00000111 ON ON ON
>=8<9 8 00001000 ON
As the value increases the outputs will be turned ON accordingly. E.g. if the source value is 230 the bit array would be '11100110' and the outputs would be turned ON as shown.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=230<231 230 11100110 ON ON ON ON ON
The table below shows some more examples of which outputs are turned on for a specific value.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=45<45 45 00101101 ON ON ON ON
>=67<68 67 01000011 ON ON ON
>=85<86 85 01010101 ON ON ON ON
>=101<102 101 01100101 ON ON ON ON
>=134<135 134 10000110 ON ON ON
>=158<159 158 10011110 ON ON ON ON ON
>=179<180 179 10110011 ON ON ON ON ON
>=200<201 200 11001000 ON ON ON
>=255 255 11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. The way the HOA parameter's value is determined depends on the module’s Switching Type mode. For Cascade and Binary Mode if any of the
Driver’s outputs are not in Auto, the HOA parameter is set to Hand. For Sequenced mode if any of the Driver’s outputs are not in Auto, the HOA parameter is set to Hand. All other
outputs that are in Auto are set to OFF by the Driver module as soon as the Hand condition is detected, and if an error condition (3) is received from the I/O module, the channel shall
be assumed to be in Auto.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch override.
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to
Active priority level 4 = Override 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module.
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA input must be in an alarm condition
Alarm Delay (secs)(HOA) 0 to 178200 0 I d1(D)
before the maintenance alarm is generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The Alarm Group module to which the HOA alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N d1(G)
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm state (HOA) v3.70 or greater. The state of the HOA alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O d1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.70 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the HOA alarm must be cleared before the clear
0 to 178200 0 I d1(d)
(HOA) alarm is generated.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
sent to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
0 or 1
Enabled (HOA) v3.70 or greater. Enables/disables reporting of the HOA alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I d1(E)
0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
Hours Run The time (in hours) for which the in-phase output (prior to inversion) has been ON. 0 to 87600 0 O H
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 or 1 0 O l
Not binary. This defines the first output channel (relative to the In-phase Output) to be energised as
0 to maximum number of
Lead Output the input value increases from 0 (e.g. Lead Output = 2 with In-phase Output = 2, means channel 3 will 1 I D
stages
be energised first).
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
IQ41x = 0 to 6
IQ422 = 0 to 6
IQ4E = 0 to 8
The number of output channels used. The channels allocated will continue sequentially from the In-
Number of Stages IQ4NC/00. = 0 to 6 0 N R
Phase channel.
IQ4NC/12 = 0 to 6
IQ4NC/16/ = 0 to 8
IQ4NC/32 = 0 to 8
The number of transitions from the state where all the output channels are OFF to the state where any
Number of Starts of the output channels are on (i.e. from where the ‘State’ parameter is ‘0’ to where the ‘State’ parameter 0 to 109 0 O N
is non-zero).
The 8 status bits which indicate which output channels are energised (corresponds to the state
Output Status 000000000 to 11111111 00000000 O F
parameter).
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
is switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The current state of output channels as an analogue value whose binary equivalent indicates the output
channels which are energised (e.g. a value of 10 indicates that channels 4 and 2 are energised).
State 0 to 255 0 O B
This output is coded such that it may be connected to a Type 18 (Analogue to Digital Converter)
Function module so that the energised channels can be decoded.
0, 1, or 2
0 = Sequenced
Switching Type The type of sequencing. 0 N P
1 = Cascade
2 = Binary
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the HOA alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O d1(T)
(HOA)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.5 IQ4 Raise/Lower Continuous Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 57
Default Overview Parameters $, l
The Raise/Lower Continuous Driver module is designed to drive a split phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors with built-in positioning, limit switches,
or clutches.
It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to
accept a feedback-input F.
When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the
valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position.
When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position,
the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V causing the associated
relay module to lower for a period. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve
position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V.
The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback-input. If the feedback-input F is set to 0, the position of
the valve is estimated by using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and
the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50%
open, because the value has been driven open for half the full-scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by
driving continuously in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback-input is used, the position of the valve will be known exactly. The
module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The Raise/Lower Continuous Driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON
(Hand) or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s).
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase
phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set as per the table below:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to override.
Active priority level 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module. 4 = Override
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
The current HVAC equipment item’s position as a percentage of it full range as understood by the Driver
Drive Position module. If there is no feedback (boundless) it is estimated, otherwise it will reflect the ‘Feedback’ 0 to 100 0 O P
parameter.
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
A positional feedback input to the Driver module. This enables the HVAC equipment item’s actual
Feedback Full analogue 0 I F
position to be fed back to the Driver module. If set to a specific value, it will be ignored.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The time in seconds taken to drive the HVAC equipment item (e.g. actuator) over its full range. Can be 0 to 32767
full-scale Drive 0 I D
connected to an analogue output. 0 = Not enabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output is
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
When enabled the behaviour of the raise and lower channels are swapped enabling the drive direction to 0 or 1
Reverse Operation be reversed i.e. the in-phase channel becomes the anti-phase channel and the anti-phase channel becomes 0 = Disabled 0 N E
the in-phase channel. The OFF situation is unchanged. 1= Enabled
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
0 to 3
0 = OFF
State The current state of the module’s outputs. 1 = Stationary 0 O B
2 = Lower
3 = Raise
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.6 IQ4 Raise/Lower End Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 57
Default Overview Parameters $, l
The Raise/Lower End Driver module is designed to drive a split-phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors without any built-in positioning or where
there are no built-in limit switches, or clutches.
It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output. It also has the facility to
accept a feedback-input F.
When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the
valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position.
When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position,
the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V cause the associated
relay module to lower for a period. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve
position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V.
The module needs to know the position of the valve. This can be done either by estimating the position, or by using a feedback-input. If the feedback-input (F) is set to 0, the position
of the valve is estimated using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and
the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50%
open because the value has been driven open for half the full-scale drive time). The valve position is verified when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by
additionally driving for the full-scale drive time in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has reached the end stop. If a feedback-input is used the position of the valve will
be known exactly. The module then determines if the valve is where it is expected to be, and if not the output signal is changed to correct the error.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The Raise/Lower End Driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the drivers output to be set to ON (Hand)
or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the modules output channel(s).
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase
phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set as per the table below:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active
input.
3 = HOA switch
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to
Active priority level override. 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module.
4 = Override
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay
maintenance alarm is generated. 0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance)
Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm state
which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state
The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
(maintenance)
1=Alarm
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm state
and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay
alarm is generated. 0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance)
Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent to + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
The current HVAC equipment item’s position as a percentage of it full range as understood by the Driver
Drive Position module. If there is no feedback (boundless) it is estimated, otherwise it will reflect the ‘Feedback’ 0 to 100 0 O P
parameter’s value.
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
A positional feedback input to the Driver module. This enables the HVAC equipment item’s actual
Feedback Full analogue 0 I F
position to be fed back to the driver. If set to a specific value, it will be ignored.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The time in seconds taken to drive the HVAC equipment item (e.g. actuator) over its full range. Can be 0 to 32767
full-scale Drive 0 I D
connected to an analogue output. 0 = Not enabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input - only
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 3 = Hand (manually set 0 O _
on)
4 = Off (manually set
off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
When enabled the module will drive the actuator closed for 1.5 times the full-scale drive time. This enables 0 or 1
Position Synchronisation the actual actuator position to be re-calibrated regularly to ensure correct control. Once the synchronisation 0 = Disabled 0 I Z
is complete the Driver module will return to the required control position. 1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output is
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
When enabled the behaviour of the raise and lower channels are swapped enabling the drive direction to 0 or 1
Reverse Operation be reversed i.e. the in-phase channel becomes the anti-phase channel and the anti-phase channel becomes 0 = Disabled 0 N E
the in-phase channel. The OFF situation is unchanged. 1= Enabled
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
0 to 3
0 = OFF
State The current state of the module’s outputs. 1 = Stationary 0 O B
2 = Lower
3 = Raise
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to override.
Active priority level 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module. 4 = Override
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
(maintenance)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
The current HVAC equipment item’s position as a percentage of it full range as understood by the
Drive Position Driver module. If there is no feedback (boundless) it is estimated, otherwise it will reflect the 0 to 100 0 O P
‘Feedback’ parameter’s value.
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
The time in seconds taken to drive the HVAC equipment item (e.g. actuator) over its full range. Can be 0 to 32767
full-scale Drive 0 I D
connected to an analogue output. 0 = Not enabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O l
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules
Number of Starts 0 to 109 0 Status N
by linking it to the required modules.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
Period The amount of time (in seconds) being time proportioned. 0 to 32767 0 I P
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
is switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
0 to 3
0 = OFF
State The current state of the module’s outputs. 1 = Stationary 0 O B
2 = Lower
3 = Raise
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.9.8 IQ4 Time Proportional + O/R Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Size in brIQs 54
Default Overview Parameters $, l
The time proportional + override driver module is designed to operate a raise/lower relay module using an analogue output channel. Its output L can have one of 3 values 10 V, 7 V, or
4 V. The output (L) is set to 10 V when the override-input (O) is set to 1; otherwise the output is time-proportioned between 4 V (ON) and 7 V (OFF). It also has an antiphase output A,
which is not normally used, but is OFF when the value (L) is ON, and ON when the value of output (L) is OFF.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
The Time Proportional Driver module supports connection to an HOA module (XCITE/IO/8DO/HOA or XCITE/IO/4DO/HOA). This enables the driver’s output to be set to ON (Hand)
or OFF or to use the calculated value (Auto) using a hardware switch connected to the module’s output channel(s).
The HOA parameter (h) indicates position of the switch. When only the in-phase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel
the in-phase output (l) is connected to. When only the antiphase channel is being used the HOA parameter (h) indicates the position of the switch for the output channel the antiphase
phase output (a) is connected to. If both the in phase and antiphase channels are being used the HOA parameter (h) is set as per the table below:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 16
0 = Source unconnected
and no other active input.
3 = HOA switch override.
The current priority level of the input to the module's algorithm. Normal strategy operation writes to
Active priority level 4 = Override 10 O u
priority level ‘10’. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the module.
9 = IC comms write
10 = Strategy
16 = BACnet
0 = highest priority
The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be in an alarm condition before the
Alarm Delay maintenance alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(D)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be in an alarm condition before the readback
Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(D)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state which already includes a delay.
Alarm Group
The Alarm Group module to which the maintenance alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N m1(G)
(maintenance)
Alarm Group (readback) The Alarm Group module to which the readback alarm will be sent. 0 to 500 1 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (maintenance) Indicates if the maintenance alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O m1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (readback) Indicates if the readback alarm has been sent to the Alarm Group module. 0 = Not sent 0 O r1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm state (maintenance) The state of the maintenance interval alarm condition. 0=No alarm 0 O m1(S)
1=Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (readback) The state of the readback alarm condition. 1 = Alarm 0 O r1(S)
0 = No Alarm
Anti-phase Hardware 0 to 196
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver’s anti-phase output. 0 N A
Channel 0=not connected
Anti-phase Output The value of the anti-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O a
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N m1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback clear alarm. 1=Enabled 1 N r1(C)
0=Disabled
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the readback input must be cleared before the clear
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I r1(d)
(readback) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as it is normal practice to use a readback module to set the alarm
state and this already includes a delay.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the maintenance input must be cleared before the
Clear Alarm Delay clear alarm is generated.
0 to 178200 0 I m1(d)
(secs)(maintenance) Note: Should normally be set to ‘0’ as the alarm is normally set by strategy which already includes a
delay.
The amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet COV notification message is sent + Full analogue
COV Increment 0 N C
to those subscribers in the list of subscribers who have subscribed to this parameter. 0 = no notification
The current HVAC equipment item’s position as a percentage of it full range as understood by the Driver
Drive Position module. If there is no feedback (boundless) it is estimated, otherwise it will reflect the ‘Feedback’ 0 to 100 0 O P
parameter’s value.
0 or 1
Enabled (maintenance) Enables/disables reporting of the maintenance interval alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I m1(E)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (readback) Enables/disables reporting of the readback alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I r1(E)
0=Disabled
The time in seconds taken to drive the HVAC equipment item (e.g. actuator) over its full range. Can be 0 to 32767
full-scale Drive 0 I D
connected to an analogue output. 0 = Not enabled
0 to 30
The address of the physical I/O module that contains the input channel providing the module’s input -
Hardware Module 0 = IQ4 0 N i
only applies to IQ4E, set to ‘0’ for all other types of IQ4.
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0, 1, 2, 3
The Hand/Off/Auto status of the module’s output if it is on an I/O module that supports Hand/Off/Auto 0 = Auto
HOA State operation. Always ‘0’ when the module’s output is on one of the IQ4’s on board outputs or on an I/O 1 = Hand 0 O h
module that does not support Hand/Off/Auto operation. 2 = Off
3 = Error
0, 8, and 9
The module’s alarm status. The alarm state is shown if the alarm condition has been present for longer 0 = No alarm
In Alarm 0 O !
than that alarm’s delay time, and that alarm is enabled to be reported. 8 = Maintenance Alarm
9 = Readback Alarm
in-phase Hardware 0 to 32
The output channel on the specified I/O module used by the driver. 0 N L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase Output The value of the in-phase output channel. 0 to 1000 0 O l
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Invert Logically inverts the driver’s output. 1=Inverted 0 I I
0=Normal
0 or 1
Maintenance Input The maintenance interval alarm input to the Driver module. 0=No alarm 0 I s
1=Alarm
0 to 5
0 = Normal (automatic
control)
1 = Overridden
2 = Disabled
Module Status The module's status. 0 O _
3 = Hand (manually set
on)
4 = Off (manually set off)
5 = BACnet (BACnet in
control)
The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules
Number of Starts 0 to 109 0 N N
by linking it to the required modules.
0 or 1
Override Switches the module into override operation where it will drive the in-phase output to 10V. 1 = Override 0 I O
0 = No override
0 or 1
Override Output Overrides the Driver module’s output to the override value or status set in 'Override' parameter. 1 = override 0 I ^
0 = no override
Override Value The value to which the module is overridden when the ‘Override Output’ parameter is set to ‘1’. Full analogue 0 I v
Period The amount of time (in seconds) being time proportioned. 0 to 32767 0 I P
The period (in seconds) after the IQ4 is powered up or performs a soft restart before the driver output is
Power on Delay (secs) 0 to 1275 0 N T
switched on.
0 or 1
Readback Input The readback alarm input to the driver. 0=No alarm 0 I b
1=Alarm
Source The value input to the Driver module. Full analogue 0 I S
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 3
0 = OFF
State The current state of the module’s outputs. 1 = Stationary 0 O B
2 = Lower
3 = Raise
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the readback alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O m1(T)
(maintenance)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The elapsed time in seconds since the maintenance alarm state commenced. + Full analogue 0 O r1(T)
(readback)
Value The current drive level Full analogue 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Default Input The value used when the result of the calculation above is not 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. Full Analogue 0 I F
Destination D The module's output. Full Analogue 0 O D
Input a The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘0’ Full Analogue 0 I a
Input b The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘1’ Full Analogue 0 I b
Input c The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘2’ Full Analogue 0 I c
Input d The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘3’ Full Analogue 0 I d
Input e The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘4’ Full Analogue 0 I e
Input f The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘5’ Full Analogue 0 I f
Input g The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘6’ Full Analogue 0 I g
Input h The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘7’ Full Analogue 0 I h
The value subtracted form the value of the ‘Selector’ parameter. It allows support for base values of 0 and 1. It also supports
Offset Full Analogue 1 I O
the ability to cascade selector modules’. The default of 1 allows support for operation with BACnet multi-state objects.
Selector Determines which of the 8 analogue inputs is used for the ‘Destination’ parameter’s value. Full Analogue 0 I S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Bit
h 1
g 1
f 1
e 1
d 1
c 1
b 1
a 1
G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter out of the range 1 to 8 all the output bits are set. to 0.
Cascade
Cascade mode sets the output bits as the input value increases.
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter in the range 1 to 8 the output bits are set. as below
Bit
h 1
g 1 1
f 1 1 1
e 1 1 1 1
d 1 1 1 1 1
c 1 1 1 1 1 1
b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter out of the range 1 to 8 all the output bits are set. to 0.
Alarm Byte
The alarm byte associated with modules output is generated by OR'ing the alarm bits on the used inputs together. This information cannot be accessed directly, and an analogue node
module linked to the function module's output must be used. The function module's alarm bits will be replicated by the analogue node module's alarm bits.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.10.5.1 IQ4 Analogue to Digital Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination D The module’s output. 0 or 1 0 O D
0 or 1
1=
Invert Output When set to ‘1’ then the normal status of the ‘Destination D’ parameter is ‘1’ and the output will pulse to ‘0’. 0 I I
Inverted
2 = Normal
Full
Last Value The value of the ‘Source’ parameter when the pulse was last generated. Set to the ‘Source’ parameter on power up 0 N L
analogue
The duration of the output pulse, in seconds. If this is set to ‘0’ then the pulse will last for one complete cycle of the sequence Full
Pulse Duration 0 N P
table and in the case of event based execution the OFF event will follow the ON event directly. analogue
Significant +ve
The amount the value must increase or decrease before the output is pulsed. 0 N C
change Analogue
Full
Source The value that is to be monitored for changes. 0 I S
analogue
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.10.9 IQ4 Differencer Function Modules
Module Identifier F
Size in brIQs 14
Default Overview Parameters $, D
IQ4 v3.40 or greater
Differencer Function modules calculate the difference between the value of the ‘Source Value at Last Reset’ parameter and the value of the ‘Source’ parameter e.g. to calculate an
incremental consumption value from a cumulative consumption value. Setting the ‘Reset’ parameter to ‘1’ sets the ‘Source Value at Last Reset’ parameter to the value of the ‘Source’
parameter effectively resetting the calculation.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Double
Difference The difference between the value of the ‘Source Value at Last Reset’ parameter and the value of the ‘Source’ parameter. 0 O D
Precision
Double
Last Source Value The last value of the ‘Source’ parameter used in the calculation. It allows compensation following input changes 0 N Z
Precision
When set to ‘1’ sets the value of the ‘Source Value at Last Reset’ parameter to the value of the ‘Source’ parameter. Should
Reset 0 or 1 0 I F
be linked to a parameter that changes between ‘0’ and ‘1’ a at a regular interval.
Source Value at Double
The value of the ‘Source’ parameter when the ‘Reset’ parameter was last set to ‘1’. 0 I A
Last Reset Precision
Double
Source Value to be differenced. 0 I G
Precision
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.10.10 IQ4 Divide Function Modules
Module Identifier F
Size in brIQs 14
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Divide Function module calculates its output (D) by dividing the input (G) by a value (E) and multiplying the result by another value (F). The module uses the following formula:
(D)= ((G)/(E))(F)
The alarm byte associated with modules output is generated by OR'ing the alarm bits on the used inputs together. This information cannot be accessed directly, and an analogue node
module linked to the function module's output must be used. The function module's alarm bits will be replicated by the analogue node module's alarm bits.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.10.10.1 IQ4 Divide Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Parameter Description Range Default Type Text Comms
Destination The value of the output. Full analogue 0 O D
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Full
Destination The output (D) of the module. 0 O D
analogue
Specifies (E), filter factor, in the calculation. It is normally in the range 0 to 1 where 0 gives no filter action, and 1 gives an infinite Full
Source E 0 I E
filter (i.e. no change in output). analogue
Full
Source G Specifies (G) in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant value of 1. 0 I G
analogue
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.10.15 IQ4 Hysteresis Band Function Modules
Module Identifier F
Size in brIQs 14
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Hysteresis Band function module sets digital output state (D) to 1 if (G) rises above the value of (E)+(F/2) and then sets (D) to 0 if (G) falls below (E)-(F/2). This enables the state
of a digital node from an analogue input level. All alarm bits are ignored.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.10.15.1 IQ4 Hysteresis Band Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
The 'Destination' parameter will remain at that value until the 'Enable' parameter is set to '1' again. The 'Destination D' parameter can be set to the value of the 'Default Value' parameter
by setting the 'Reset' parameter to '1'.
The module's status is retained when the IQ4 is powered down and when the IQ4 restarts it the module will adopt the status at power down.
A1.10.30.1 IQ4 Sample and Hold Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Data Ready Set to ‘0’ if there fewer samples than required stored in the Plot module, otherwise set to ‘1’. 0 or 1 0 O R
Destination D The output (D) of the module. Full Analogue 0 O D
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
0 – Min,
1 - Max
Function The type of calculation that is to be performed. 2 N F
2 – Sum
3 – Average
4 - SD
0 or 1
Hold If ‘1’ the value of the Destination parameter will be retained. 1 = Hold 0 I H
0 = No hold
Last Sample The index of the last sample to be used in the Plot module buffer – working backwards in time. 1 is the last (most recent) +Full
1 I L
Index in the buffer. Analogue
Number of The number of values from the Plot nodule that are to be used. If this is greater than the number available, then those
0 to 1000 10 I N
Samples samples available are used.
Source The Plot module containing the data to which the calculation is to be applied. Full Analogue 0 I S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. Only available when the 'Protocol' parameter is set to 'BACnet'. It specifies
COV Mode 1=Enabled 0 N V
whether the module listens for unconfirmed COV messages from the specified BACnet device.
0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. Full analogue 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
IQ4/BACnet. Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent 0 or 1.
Protocol to devices on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet 0 =Trend 0 N -
network. 1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Address 0 I A
address of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. 10. 0 disables communications
The LAN of the device to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been selected as a 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Lan protocol this must be the LAN number of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the 10. 0 I N
required value. 0 = local LAN.
Remote Module The analogue parameter the IC Comms message will access. Any analogue module parameter. Blank N R
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 0 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.11.3 IQ4 Data From Bit IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
Size in brIQs 17
Default Overview Parameters $, S
The Data From Bit ic comms module obtains the value of a bit (remote bit (R)) from another controller, and makes it available as an output (L).
Additional functionality for IQ4 or greater
When using BACnet protocol and the 'COV mode' parameter is enabled the module can receive unconfirmed COV messages (the unconfirmed COV service) from another BACnet
device. The 'Remote Address' and 'Remote Lan' specify the NTD module linked to the BACnet device sending the COV messages, and the 'Remote Module' parameter specifies the
actual value sending the COV messages. The modules failed bit is set to TRUE on power up and will remain TRUE until a matching unconfirmed COV message is received, after which
it becomes FALSE and will remain FALSE forever (or until the controller is powered up again). This can be used in strategy to gate through some default value into a strategy until an
unconfirmed COV message is received. The following data types are supported from the BACnet source: UINT, BOOL, BINARYPV, ENUM, INT and REAL.
Any numeric value greater than 0.5 equates to TRUE, other values to FALSE.
A1.11.3.1 Data From Bit IC Comms Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. Only available when the 'Protocol' parameter is set to 'BACnet'. It specifies
COV Mode 1=Enabled 0 N V
whether the module listens for unconfirmed COV messages from the specified BACnet device.
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. 0 or 1 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
IQ4/BACnet. Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent 0 or 1.
Protocol to devices on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet 0 =Trend 0 N -
network. 1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Address 0 I A
address of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. 10. 0 disables communications
The LAN of the device to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been selected as a 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote LAN protocol this must be the LAN number of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the 10. 0 I N
required value. 0 = local LAN.
Remote Module The bit the IC Comms message will access. Any analogue module parameter. Blank N R
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was
Failed Bit 0 = OK 0 O F
successful.
1 = Failed
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. 1020to +1020 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 disables
Remote Address The address of the remote controller. 0 I A
communications
0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10.
Remote LAN The LAN of the device to which the message is to be sent. 0 I N
0 = local LAN.
Remote Module The bit the IC Comms message will access. Any digital byte module parameter. Blank N R
Retransmission The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then
1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval repeated.
Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission
Time into Interval 0 to 3276 0 N T
interval.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Any valid Trend module parameter L
Local module The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, or digital byte, or digital bit value. Blank I
code.
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
IQ4/BACnet. Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent 0 or 1.
Protocol to devices on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet 0 =Trend 0 N
network. 1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Address 0 I A
address of a NTD. 10. 0 disables communications
0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been selected
Remote Lan 10. 0 I N
as a protocol this must be the LAN of an NTD.
0 = local LAN.
Specifies where the value is to be written. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is selected
Any analogue, digital byte, or digital bit
Remote Module by a match with the label of the module’s source (L). Blank N R
module parameter.
Note: Label matching is not available if 'Protocol' is set to 'BACnet'.
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Significant The amount the value of the source address can change before a message is sent. If set to '0' the
0 to 6500 1 N S
Change messages is only sent at the retransmission interval.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
Write Priority IQ4/BACnet. The write priority used to write the value to the BACnet device. 0 to 16 9 N w
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.11.6 IQ4 Global To IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
Size in brIQs 19
Default Overview Parameters $, S
The Global to ic comms module sends a specified value and places it in a specified location in all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module.
A1.11.6.1 IQ4 Global To IC Comms Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module' 'Label', 'Page', 'X co-ordinate' and 'Y co-ordinate' - see Common IQ4 Module
Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 7
0=comms disabled
1=identifier
2=F attribute
Attributes The attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. 3=G attribute 0 N B
4=H attribute
5=I attribute
6=J attribute
7=K attribute
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local module The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, or digital byte, or digital bit value. 1020to +1020/0 or 1 0 I L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1.
IQ4/BACnet. Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent to
Protocol 0 =Trend 0 N
devices on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet network.
1 = BACnet.
0 to 119, 128 excluding
Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been selected as a addresses 2, 3, and 10.
Remote Lan 0 I N
protocol this must be the LAN of an NTD. 0 = local LAN.
128 = all LANs
Specifies where the value is to be written. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is selected by
Any analogue, digital byte or
Remote Module a match with the label of the module’s source (L). Blank N R
digital bit module parameter.
Note: Label matching is not available if 'Protocol' is set to 'BACnet'.
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
The amount the value of the source address can change before a message is sent. If set to '0' the messages
Significant Change 0 to 6500 1 N S
is only sent at the retransmission interval.
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
IQ4/BACnet. The write priority used to write the value to the BACnet device. 0 sends the request with
Write Priority 0 to 16 9 N w
no priority.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.11.7 IQ4 Maximum IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
Size in brIQs 17
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Maximum ic comms module requests the value of an analogue node (R) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the maximum value, and
makes it available for use in the strategy.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 7
0=comms disabled
1=identifier
2=F attribute
Attributes The attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. 3=G attribute 0 C B
4=H attribute
5=I attribute
6=J attribute
7=K attribute
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether the last message sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local Module The output of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
0 to 119 excluding
Remote LAN Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 I N
0 = local LAN.
Specifies the analogue parameter that is to be read. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is selected Any analogue module
Remote Module Blank N R
by a match with the label of the module connected to module’s output (L). parameter.
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 7
0=comms disabled
1=identifier
2=F attribute
Attributes The attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. 3=G attribute 0 N B
4=H attribute
5=I attribute
6=J attribute
7=K attribute
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether the last message sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local Module The output of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
0 to 119 excluding
Remote LAN Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0 I N
0 = local LAN.
Specifies the analogue parameter that is to be read. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is selected Any analogue module
Remote Module Blank N R
by a match with the label of the module connected to module’s output (L). parameter.
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.11.9 IQ4 Sum IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
Size in brIQs 17
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The sum ic comms module requests the value an analogue node (remote node (R)) from all controllers that match the search criteria set up in the module, calculates the sum, and places
it in the destination.
A1.11.9.1 IQ4 Sum IC Comms Module Parameters
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 7
0=comms disabled
1=identifier
2=F attribute
Attributes The attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. 3=G attribute 0 N A
4=H attribute
5=I attribute
6=J attribute
7=K attribute
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether the last message sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 O F
1 = Failed
Local Module The output of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 O L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 I ~
0=Enabled
0 to 119 excluding addresses
Remote LAN Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. 2, 3, and 10. 0 I N
0 = local LAN.
Specifies the analogue parameter that is to be read. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is selected Any analogue module
Remote Module Blank N R
by a match with the label of the module connected to module’s output (L). parameter.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 N I
Interval
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The alarm status of the analogue value connected to the value parameter. Remain sat the default if the value parameter 00000000 to
Alarm Status 00000000 O S
is set as a constant. 11111111
0 or 1
High The status of the high alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O H
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Low The status of the low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O L
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Outside
The status of the outside limits alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O O
Limits
1 = Alarm
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Read The status of the Read alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O R
1 = Alarm
Value The value of the analogue node. It can be a constant, or an input from another controller using IC Comms. -1020 to +1020 0 I V
20 20
Output The value of the module. -10 to +10 0 O D
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.2 IQ4 Digital Byte Modules
Module Identifier B
Size in brIQs 16
Default Overview Parameters $, S
The Digital Byte module stores a byte of information (8-bits values a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h e.g. 01010100).
A1.12.2.1 IQ4 Digital Byte Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', 'Page', 'X co-ordinate' and 'Y co-ordinate' - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
ACK Transactions v3.50 or greater. The status of the modules user alarm acknowledgement. 000 to 111 111 O U
Alarm Delay (secs) The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before a digital input alarm is generated. 0 to 172800 0 I d1(D)
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N d1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent Indicates if the alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N d1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State (Digin) The current state of the status alarm of the module. 0 or 1 0 O d1(S)
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The length of time in seconds that digital input alarm must be cleared before a clear alarm is
0 to 172800 0 I d1(d)
(secs) generated.
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the state clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N d1(C)
(State)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (State) Enables/Disables the state alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I d1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 to 32
Hardware Channel The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the input. 1 N c
0 = Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 30
0 = IQ4
Hardware I/O Module The I/O module to which the input is connected. 0 N i
1 to 30 = I/O
modules
The length of time (in hours) the input has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by
Hours Run 0 to 87840 0 O H
linking it to the required modules.
0 or 1
In Alarm Indicates an alarm condition has been present for longer than its delay time and the alarm is enabled. 0 = No Alarm 0 N R
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Override Output When set to 1 output (S) of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. 1=Override 0 I ^
0=No override
Override Status The status to which the output (S) of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. 0 or 1 0 I v
Required State The status that the input should be. When the input is not in this state, an alarm will be generated. 0 or 1 0 I R
The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking
Starts 0 to 109 0 O N
it to the required modules.
The output (S) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required
State 0 or 1 0 O S
modules.
Time in Alarm (secs) The length of time in seconds since the alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 I d1(T)
0 or 1
Type Specifies whether the input is an External Digital Input, or an External Digital Input. 0 = External 0 N Y
1 = Internal
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.4 IQ4 External Digital Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
Size in brIQs 68
Default Overview Parameters $, V
The External Digital sensor module is intended for use with universal inputs set to read digital values that require logging. Using this type of sensor ensures that the sensor logging the
input is tied to the digital input performing the alarm handling functions. It takes the reading from a digital device, such as a pressure switch, connected to an input of the controller, and
stores it as an analogue value.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A1.12.4.1 IQ4 External Digital Sensor Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 32
Hardware Channel The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the sensor. 0 N c
0=Disabled
0 to 30
Hardware I/O Module The I/O module to which the input is connected. 0 = IQ4 0 N i
1 to 30 = I/O modules
0 or 1
Override Output When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. 1=Override 0 I ^
0=No override
Override Value/Status The status to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. 0 or 1 0 I
Source The digital status of the input channel. If the input channel is set to 0 this becomes a constant. 0 or 1 0 I S
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor’s value. Any ASCII character except ( { ; , : Blank N %
Value The output of the module. 0 or 1 0 O V
Important if using this type of sensor, the corresponding digital input module MUST be added to the strategy.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.5 IQ4 External Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
Size in brIQs 76
Default Overview Parameters $, V, %
The External Sensor module takes the reading from a real sensor connected to the analogue input of the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm
levels. The sensor type determines how the scaling is performed. The sensor type is a separate module that defines parameters for a type of sensor. An offset is used to allow the reading
to be adjusted to the actual value.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
ACK Transactions v3.50 or greater. The status of the modules user alarm acknowledgement. 000 to 111 111 O U
Alarm Delay (High) The period (in seconds) for which the High alarm must be present before the High alarm is generated. 0 to 178200 0 S h1(D)
Alarm Delay (secs)
The period (in seconds) for which the Low alarm must be present before the Low alarm is generated. 0 to 178200 0 S l1(D)
(Low)
Alarm Delay (secs) The period (in seconds) for which the Out of Limits alarm must be present before the Out of Limits alarm is
0 to 178200 0 S 01(D)
(Out of Limits) generated.
Alarm Delay (secs)
The period (in seconds) for which the Read alarm must be present before the Read alarm is generated. 0 to 178200 0 S r1(D)
(Read)
Alarm Group (High) Specifies the alarm group to which the High alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N h1(G)
Alarm Group (Low) Specifies the alarm group to which the Low alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N l1(G)
Alarm Group (Out of
Specifies the alarm group to which the Out of Limits alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N o1(G)
Limits)
Alarm Group (Read) Specifies the alarm group to which the Read alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (High) Indicates if the High alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N h1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Low) Indicates if the Low alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N l1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Out of
Indicates if the Out of Limits alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N o1(K)
Limits)
1 = Sent
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the High alarm must have cleared before the clear alarm is
0 to 178200 0 I h1(D)
(secs) (High) generated.
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Low alarm must have cleared before the clear alarm is
0 to 178200 0 I l1(D)
(secs) (Low) generated.
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Out of Limits alarm must have cleared before the clear
0 to 178200 0 I o1(D)
(secs) (Out of Limits) alarm is generated.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Read alarm must have cleared before the clear alarm is
0 to 178200 0 I g1(D)
(secs) (Read) generated.
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Read) Indicates if the Read alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N r1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State The status of the 4 alarm outputs. 0000 to 1111 0000 N M
0 or 1
Alarm State (High) The status of the High alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O h1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Low) The status of the Low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O l1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Out of
The status of the Out of Limits alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O o1(S)
Limits)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Read) The status of the Read alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O r1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N h1(C)
(High)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N l1(C)
(Low)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N o1(C)
(Out of Limits)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N r1(C)
(Read)
0=Disabled
Specifies the amount by which the value must change before a BACnet notification is sent. If set to '0' there is
COV Increment 0 to +1020 0 N C
no notification.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Enabled (High) Enables/Disables the High alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I h1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Low) Enables/Disables the Low alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I l1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Out of
Enables/Disables the Out of Limits alarm. 1=Enabled 0 I o1(E)
Limits)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Read) Enables/Disables the Read alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I r1(E)
1 = Enabled
High Alarm Level The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I H
0 to 32
Hardware Channel The input channel to be used by the sensor. 0 N c
0=Disabled
0 to 30
0 = IQ4
Hardware I/O Module The I/O module to which the input is connected. 0 N i
1 to 30 = I/O
modules
0 to 5 (excluding 1)
0 = No alarm
2 = High Alarm
In Alarm Indicates an alarm condition has been present for longer than its delay time and the alarm is enabled. 3 = Low alarm 0 N !
4 = Out of Limits
alarm
5 = Read alarm
Low Alarm Level The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I L
20 20
Offset The amount by which the sensor reading is to be increased, or decreased to make it accurate. -10 to +10 0 I O
0 or 1
Override Output When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. 1=Override 0 I ^
0=No override
Override Value/Status The status to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. -1020 to +1020 0 I v
Source (mV) The value of the input channel. If the input channel is set to 0 this becomes a constant. 0 to 10000 0 I S
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N h1(T)
(High)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N l1(T)
(Low)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N o1(T)
(Out of Limits)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N r1(T)
(Read)
The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. Sensor type modules
Type store information about certain types of sensor. Ensure that the sensor type module chosen correctly specifies 0 to 99 1 N Y
the sensor that is being used.
Any ASCII
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor's value. character except ( { Blank N %
;,:
Value The output of the sensor. -1020 to +1020 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.6 IQ4 Internal Digital Input Modules
Module Identifier I
Size in brIQs 26
Default Overview Parameters $, S
The Internal Digital Input module takes the status of a digital value in the controller, checks the value against the required state, and places its value into a digital node.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
Note: For IQ4 v3.0 and greater the module must be sequenced if the hours run output is connected.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
ACK Transactions v3.50 or greater. The status of the modules user alarm acknowledgement. 000 to 111 111 O U
Alarm Delay (secs) The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before an alarm is generated. 0 to 172800 0 I d1(D)
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N d1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent Indicates if the alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N d1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State (Digin) The current state of the status alarm of the module. 0 or 1 0 O d1(S)
Clear Alarm Delay
v3.50 or greater. The length of time in seconds that digital input alarm must be cleared before a clear alarm is generated. 0 to 172800 0 I d1(d)
(secs)
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the state clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N d1(C)
(State)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (State) Enables/Disables the state alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I d1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 to 32
Hardware Channel The input channel on the specified I/O module to be used by the input. 1 N c
0 = Disabled
The length of time (in hours) the input has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to
Hours Run 0 to 87840 0 O H
the required modules. For the hours run to work correctly the module must be sequenced.
0 or 1
0 = No
In Alarm Indicates an alarm condition has been present for longer than its delay time and the alarm is enabled. 0 S R
Alarm
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
1=Override
Override Output When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter. 0 I ^
0=No
override
Override Status The status to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. 0 or 1 0 I v
Required State The status that the input should be. When the input is not in this state, an alarm will be generated. 0 or 1 0 I R
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the
Starts 0 to 109 0 O N
required modules.
State The output of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 or 1 0 O S
Source The input value of the module. 0 or 1 0 I I
Time in Alarm
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 I d1(T)
(secs)
0 or 1
Type Specifies whether the input is an External Digital Input, or an External Digital Input. 0 = External - N Y
1 = Internal
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.7 IQ4 Internal Digital Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
Size in brIQs 66
Default Overview Parameters $, V, %
The Internal Digital Sensor module allows a digital node to be monitored. It takes the value of a specified digital node, and puts it into an analogue node. This allows digital values to
be logged.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A1.12.7.1 IQ4 Internal Digital Sensor Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value parameter.
Override Output 1=Override 0 I ^
S
0=No override
Override
The status to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. 0 or 1 0 I
Value/Status
Source The digital status of the input. 0 or 1 0 I S
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII character except ( { ; ,
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor’s value. Blank N %
:
Value The output of the module. 0 or 1 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.12.8 IQ4 Internal Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
Size in brIQs 74
Default Overview Parameters $, S, %
The Internal Sensor module allows an analogue node to be monitored. It takes the reading from within the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against
alarm levels. Internal sensors have an exponent, and source instead of sensor type, and offset. The source defines the analogue node from which the sensor takes its value. The exponent
determines the number of decimal places before the decimal point.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A1.12.8.1 IQ4 Internal Sensor Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
ACK Transactions v3.50 or greater. The status of the modules user alarm acknowledgement. 000 to 111 111 O U
The period (in seconds) for which the High alarm must be present before the High alarm is
Alarm Delay (High) 0 to 178200 0 S h1(D)
generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the Low alarm must be present before the Low alarm is
Alarm Delay (secs) (Low) 0 to 178200 0 S l1(D)
generated.
Alarm Delay (secs) (Out of The period (in seconds) for which the Out of Limits alarm must be present before the Out of
0 to 178200 0 S 01(D)
Limits) Limits alarm is generated.
The period (in seconds) for which the Read alarm must be present before the Read alarm is
Alarm Delay (secs) (Read) 0 to 178200 0 S r1(D)
generated.
Alarm Group (High) Specifies the alarm group to which the High alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N h1(G)
Alarm Group (Low) Specifies the alarm group to which the Low alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N l1(G)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group (Out of Limits) Specifies the alarm group to which the Out of Limits alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N o1(G)
Alarm Group (Read) Specifies the alarm group to which the Read alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N r1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (High) Indicates if the High alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N h1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Low) Indicates if the Low alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N l1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Out of Limits) Indicates if the Out of Limits alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N o1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Read) Indicates if the Read alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N r1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State The status of the 4 alarm outputs. 0000 to 1111 0000 N M
0 or 1
Alarm State (High) The status of the High alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O h1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Low) The status of the Low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O l1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Out of Limits) The status of the Out of Limits alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O o1(S)
1 = Alarm
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the High alarm must have cleared before
0 to 178200 0 I h1(D)
(High) the clear alarm is generated.
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Low alarm must have cleared before
0 to 178200 0 I l1(D)
(Low) the clear alarm is generated.
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) (Out v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Out of Limits alarm must have cleared
0 to 178200 0 I o1(D)
of Limits) before the clear alarm is generated.
Clear Alarm Delay (secs) v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) for which the Read alarm must have cleared before
0 to 178200 0 I g1(D)
(Read) the clear alarm is generated.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm State (Read) The status of the Read alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 O r1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable (High) Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 O h1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable (Low) Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 O l1(C)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable (Out of
Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 O o1(C)
Limits)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable (Read) Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 O r1(C)
0=Disabled
Specifies the amount by which the driver value must change before a BACnet notification is
COV Increment 0 to +1020 0 O C
sent. If set to '0' there is no notification.
0 or 1
Enabled (High) Enables/Disables the High alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I h1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Low) Enables/Disables the Low alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I l1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Out of Limits) Enables/Disables the Out of Limits alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I o1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Read) Enables/Disables the Read alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 I r1(E)
1 = Enabled
High Alarm Level The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I H
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 5 (excluding 1)
0 = No alarm
Indicates an alarm condition has been present for longer than its delay time and the alarm is 2 = High Alarm
In Alarm 0 N !
enabled. 3 = Low alarm
4 = Out of Limits alarm
5 = Read alarm
Low Alarm Level The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I L
20 20
Offset Not used. -10 to +10 0 N O
0 or 1
When set to 1 output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override Value
Override Output 1=Override 0 I ^
parameter.
0=No override
-1020to +1020
Override Value/Status The status to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. IQ4 v3.30 or greater double 0 I v
precision
Source The value of the input channel. If the input channel is set to 0 this becomes a constant. 0 to 10000 0 I S
Time in Alarm (secs) (High) The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N h1(T)
20
Time in Alarm (secs) (Low) The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +10 0 N l1(T)
Time in Alarm (secs) (Out of
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N o1(T)
Limits)
Time in Alarm (secs) (Read) The length of time in seconds time since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 N r1(T)
Type The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. 0 to 99 1 N Y
Any ASCII character except
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor’s value. Blank N %
({;,:
Value The output (V) of the sensor. -1020 to +1020 0 O V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bottom Range The minimum value of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 I B
0 or 1
Specifies whether the knob's output is set to the bottom range value or upper range value when the knob is adjusted 0 = adjustment not
Clip to Limits 0 N L
outside these limits, or the adjustment is not allowed. allowed.
1 = adjustment allowed
COV Specifies the amount by which the knob value must change before a BACnet notification is sent.
0 to +1020 0 N C
Increment The ‘COV Increment’ parameter must not be set to ‘0’.
Destination The output (D) of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 O D
v3.40 or greater. The value to which the ‘Destination’ parameter is set when the ‘Reset to Default’ parameter is set
Default Value -1020 to +1020 0 I F
to ‘1’.
Reset to
v3.40 or greater. When set to ‘1’ the ‘Destination’ parameter is set to the default value. 0 or 1 0 I R
Default
PIN Level The PIN level required before the knob can be adjusted. 0 to 99 0 N P
Top Range The maximum value of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 I T
Any ASCII character
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the knob's value. Blank N %
except ( { ; , :
Value The value of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 N V
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination The output (D) of the knob. 0 or 1 0 N D
Default Status v3.40 or greater. The value to which the 'Destination' parameter is set when the ‘Reset to Default’ parameter is set to ‘1’. 0 or 1 0 I F
PIN Level The PIN level required before the switch can be adjusted. 0 to 99 0 N P
v3.40 or greater. The time (in seconds) after which the ‘Destination’ parameter back to the default status. When set to ‘0’ the -10 to
20
Pulse interval 0 I L
Destination’ parameter will not be changed. +1020
Reset to
v3.40 or greater. When set to ‘1’ the ‘Destination’ parameter is set to the default status. 0 or 1 0 I R
Default
Status The value of the switch. 0 or 1 0 N S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII
Alarm Label 6 30-character label describing the nature of TCL User alarm 6. character except Blank N U6
\/(){};,:
Alarm Reporting The LAN number of the device to which the TCL application will report software errors while being tested and 0, 4 to 119
Blank N R
Lan debugged. excluding 10.
The network address of the device to which the TCL application will report software errors while being tested and 0, 4 to 119
Alarm Reporting OS Blank N
debugged. excluding 10.
Current line The current line number, 0 unless at breakpoint. 0 to 1000 0 N L
0 or 1
0 = Run by IQ4
Debug Active Indicates whether TCLTool 2 is running the application. 0 N D
1 = Run by
TCLTool 2
ID The TCL application identifier specified in TCLTool 2, and read only - - N -
Any ASCII
A 20-character label for the TCL application specified in TCLTool 2. This is the label that will be used when TCL
Label character except - N $
alarms are sent to the alarm group. Read only
\/(){};,:
Last Error Last Error reported as a free format text string. 0 to 128 Blank N l
Number of Lines The number of lines of cone in the TCL application. . 1 to 1000 0 N c
Any ASCII
Program Author The name of the application's author (30-characters) specified in TCLTool 2. character except - N a
\/(){};,:
Any ASCII
The version of the TCL application (30-characters) specified in TCLTool 2, and read from the TCL application.
Program Version character except - N n
Read only.
\/(){};,:
1 to 10
1 = Stopped
2 = Loading
Program State The current state of the TCL application. 3 = Running 3 N L
4 = At Breakpoint
5 = Debug
6 = Error
Size of Module The size of the XNC interface module (in brIQs) including the TCL application. Read only 1 to 2000 0 N Z
The XNC interface module can have up to 1000 inputs each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the inputs.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII
Label A 30-character label for the input. character except Blank N I<n>$
\/(){};,:
Value The value of the input. -1020 to +1020 0 I I<n>V
<n> specifies the number of the input.
The XNC interface module can have up to 1000 outputs each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each of the inputs.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII
Label A 30-character label for the output. . character except Blank N O<n>$
\/(){};,:
Value The value of the output. -1020 to +1020 0 I O<n>V
<n> specifies the number of the output.
Note: The total number of Inputs/outputs supported by the XNC3 is 1000 i.e. 750 inputs 250 Outputs.
The XNC interface module can have 20 stores that contain a specific string, each of which will use 5 brIQs of the controller’s memory. The following parameters are repeated for each
of the stores.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII
Label A 30-character label for the store. character except Blank N S<n>$
\/(){};,:
Value The string the store contains. -1020 to +1020 0 O S<n>V
<n> specifies the number of the output.
The XNC interface module also has 100 spaces of non-volatile memory, known as savedVars, which can be used to store both string and numeric data, each of which will use 5 brIQs
of the controller’s memory.
The module also contains the TCL program.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
- full analogue to + full
Input Value The value of the Input. Each input has this parameter, ‘n’ is input number 1 to 1000. 0 I InV
analogue
Inputs (PV The PV in the Wallbus device to which the input of the Interface module is connected. Each input has this
- - N InN
Index) parameter, n determines the input.
Inputs (Refresh Defines the interval at the Interface module writes its value to the PV in the Wallbus device. Each input has this 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s,
- N InP
Period) parameter, n determines the input. 30s, 35, 40s, 45s, 50s
Inputs
Defines the amount by which the value of the input must change before the value is written to the PV in the
(Significant - - N InC
Wallbus device. Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
change)
0 to 30-characters. Any
Label The name of the interface. ASCII character except - N $
\/(){};,: 0
Network The network module of the network to which the interface is to be connected. Valid module number - N n
0 to 30-characters. Any
Output Label The label of the output. Each output has this parameter, ‘n’ is input number 1 to 1000. ASCII character except null N On$
\/(){};,: 0
- full analogue to + full
Output Value The value of the Output. Each output has this parameter, ‘n’ is output number 1 to 1000. 0 I OnV
analogue
The time, in seconds, that the value of the output is held for after the last communication from the Wallbus device.
Outputs 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s,
‘0’ holds indefinitely. Any other value, nn, will cause the output’s value to be set to ‘FL_INVALID’ nn seconds - N OnM
(Expiry time) 30s, 35, 40s, 45s, 50s
after the last update is received from the Wallbus device, where nn is the value of this parameter.
Outputs (PV The PV in the Wallbus device to which the output of the Interface module is connected. Each output has this
- - N OnN
Index) parameter, n determines the input.
1, 2
Program Type The type of interface module. 1 = XNC 1 N Y
2 = Wallbus
Size of
Size of the module including any application file (e.g. TCL application). 1 to 2000 0 N Z
Modules
0, 1, 2
0 = Not Present
Status The status of interface device. 0 N t
1 = Operational
2= Not Communicating
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13
00 = single bit. A value on I[n]V >= 0.5 is converted to 1.
Values < 0.5 are converted to 0.
01 = 2 byte unsigned Integer.
02 = 2 byte signed integer
04 = IEEE value. 4 byte format (float).
05 = IEEE value 8 byte format (double).
07 = BCD 2 byte integer
Inputs Data Determines how many consecutive registers are written, and how the value of I[n]V
09 = Allows a bit mask to be applied to a 16 bit word. E.g. 00 N InE
Format is converted to register values.
a bit mask retrieving bits 5 through 9 would be
0000001111100000. Bitmasks should only be defined as
either a single bit or multiple consecutive bits for any given
Output Instance.
10 = 4 byte unsigned integer
11 = 4 byte signed integer.
12 = 8 byte unsigned integer (64 bit)
13 = 8 byte signed Integer (64 bit)
Inputs Refresh Time in seconds between write. 0 to 1800
0 N InP
Period Each input has this parameter, n determines the input. 0 = on change only
The Modbus register address where the input’s value is written.
or
Inputs Defines a Modbus Digital Input or Input Register address from where the input’s
Register value is written. - - N InN
Address The number of consecutive addresses written will be determined by the data format
parameter for this Input.
Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
Only for registers with a Data Format of 9 (Bitmask). It defines the bit(s) that will
be written to when the input value changes
Inputs
When applying bit masks to data being written to the register the current value of
Register - - N InM
the register must be read, and then the bit mask applied to preserve the data not
Bitmask
affected by the bitmask. Thus only affecting the data in the bits specified.
Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The power of 10 scaling factor to apply to the register value to convert it to the
required units. E.g. a scale factor of +2 would multiply the value by 100, a scale
Inputs Scaling
factor of -2 would multiply the value by 0.01. -20 to +20 0 N InF
Factor
Note: Restricted to integer values.
Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
Inputs The difference between the current value of I[n]V and the last transmitted value of
Significant I[n]V that will cause the new value to be sent to the Modbus device. - - N InC
change Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
Inputs Base
The a base value to apply to all Inputs Register Addresses. This allows register offset
Register 0 to 65535 0 N i
addressing mode to be used.
Address
Network The network module of the network to which the interface is to be connected. Valid module number - N n
00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13
00 = single bit
01 = 2 byte unsigned Integer.
02 = 2 byte signed integer
04 = IEEE value. 4 byte format (float).
05 = IEEE value 8 byte format (double).
07 = BCD 2 byte integer
Determines how many consecutive registers are read, and how the values are
Outputs Data 09 = Allows a bit mask to be applied to a 16 bit word. E.g.
combined to form the value of O[n]V. - - OnF
Format a bit mask retrieving bits 5 through 9 would be
Each output has this parameter, n determines the output.
0000001111100000 Bitmasks should only be defined as
either a single bit or multiple consecutive bits for any given
output
10 = 4 byte unsigned integer
11 = 4 byte signed integer.
12 = 8 byte unsigned integer (64 bit)
13 = 8 byte signed integer (64 bit)
Outputs Time in seconds between read requests. 0 to 1800
60 N OnP
Refresh Period Each output has this parameter, n determines the output. 0 = on change only
The Modbus coil or register address from where the value of O[n]V is read. The
Outputs
number of consecutive addresses read will be determined by the data format
Register - - N OnN
parameter for this output.
Address
Each output has this parameter, n determines the output.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Only for registers with a Data Format of 9 (Bitmask). It defines the bit(s) that will
be extracted from the register read operation and applied to the Outputs Value.
Outputs
When applying bit masks to data being written to the register the current value of
Register - 0000 N OnM
the register must be read, and then the bit mask applied to preserve the data not
Bitmask
affected by the bitmask. Thus only affecting the data in the bits specified.
Each output has this parameter, n determines the output.
Outputs Base
The a base value to apply to all Outputs Register Addresses. This allows register
Register 0 to 65535 0 N i
offset addressing mode to be used.
Address
Specifies whether the register can be written or just read. It is only used when the
'Register Addressing Mode' parameter is set to 1 or 2 (Extended Addressing or
Outputs Extended Addressing Base 1). 0, 1
Register When set to ‘0’ the register being addressed is a Holding Register or a Coil 0 = Read/Write 0 N OnT
Type depending upon the output's Data Format. 1 = Read Only
When set to ‘1’ the register being addressed is a Discrete or Analogue Input
depending upon the output’s Data Format.
The power of 10 scaling factor to apply to the register value to convert it to the
required units. E.g. a scale factor of +2 would multiply the value by 100, a scale
Outputs
factor of -2 would multiply the value by 0.01. -20 to +20 0 N OnE
Scaling Factor
Note: Restricted to integer values.
Each output has this parameter, n determines the input.
0, 1, 2
0 = Standard Modbus addressing (e.g. 40001 to 49999 for
The addressing mode used by the module. holding registers,
Register When set to 1 or 2 it is combined with the 'Data Type' and 'Outputs Register Type' 30001 to 39999 for analogue Input registers etc.)
Addressing to determine which type of item is to be written/read. For example for a data type of 1 = Extended Addressing (e.g. 0 to 65535 used to specify 0 N m
Mode single bit, and output register type of Read Only a Discrete Input register would be address.
read. Whereas for a output register type of Read-Write a Coild would be read. 2 = Extended Addressing Base 1. This is the same as
Extended Addressing except that addresses are in the range
(1 – 65536)
0, 1, 2
0 = Not Present
Status The status of interface device. 0 N t
1 = Operational
2= Not Communicating
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15
0 - Energy
1 - Energy
2 - Volume
3 - Mass
4 - Time : Not supported
5 - Power
Determines which of the data values returned from the device is written to O[n]V. 6 - Power
Outputs Data Index - - OnN
Each Output has this parameter, n determines the output. 7 - Volume Flow
8 - Volume Flow
9 - Volume Flow
10 - Mass Flow
11 - Flow Temperature
12 - Return Temperature
13 - Temperature Difference
14 - External Temperature
15 - Pressure
Time in seconds between read requests.
Note: Some battery powered meters will only respond at a minimum refresh rate of 2 hours (or more).
Outputs Refresh Once one refresh request has been made, a further request will receive no response until the meters 0 to 1800
60 N OnP
Period refresh. 0 = on change only
period has elapsed.
Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
The power of 10 scaling factor to apply to the register value to convert it to the required units. E.g. a
scale factor of +2 would multiply the value by 100, a scale factor of -2 would multiply the value by
0.01.
Outputs Scaling All values read from the meter are in a normalised form for the type of value they are reading – e.g.
-20 to +20 0 N OnE
Factor Wh. So if the value should be presented as KWh – the value returned from the meter would need a
scaling factor of 3.
Note: Restricted to integer values.
Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
Primary Address Address of the device to be read. 0 to 15 0 N d
Secondary Address The serial number of device to be read. 8-decimal digit string value. - N D
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2
0 = Not Present
Status The status of interface device. 0 N t
1 = Operational
2= Not Communicating
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Actual Type The actual module type as found on the bus. Character String Blank N A
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. If connecting an IQ4/IO module the address is set by the strategy in the range 1 to 15. If
Address connecting XCITE I/O module the address is set by the I/O module’s address switch in the range 1 to 15 (labelled 0 to 15 N/A N M
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F).
Configured
Specifies the type of I/O module that is to be connected to the controller. Character String Blank N Y
Type
0 or 1
Indicates if the I/O module is in a failed state i.e. state is 'not present' (0), 'recoverable fault' (4), or 'unrecoverable
Failed 0 = OK 0 N F
fault' (5).
1 = Failed
0 to 30-characters. Any
Firmware
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The firmware version of the I/O module discovered by communication with the module. ASCII character except - N C
version
\/(){};,: 0
0 to F Module
Module ID Specifies the id of the I/O module. This must match the module's CAN address. 0 N
0 = main controller Number
Serial Any ASCII character except Factory
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The serial number of the hardware I/O module, also printed on the module. N S
Number \/(){};,: set
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 8
0 = Not present
1 = Self testing
2 = Standby
3 = Operational
State IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The state of the I/O module. 4 = Major recoverable fault 0 N T
5 = Major unrecoverable
fault
6 = Unaddressed -
7 = Duplicate Address
8 = Upgrade
Version The I/O module's firmware version. Character string fixed N C
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. When set to ‘1’ the I/O module indicates its address by flashing its I/O Bus indicator.
When set to ‘1’ by pressing the I/O module’s Service button the I/O module will flash its address once. The value
0 or 1
remains at '1' and subsequent presses of the Service button will cause it to flash the address again. The value can
Wink 0 = No flash 0 N W
only be set back to '0' using IQSET, text comms or the IQ4’s web pages.
1 = Flash
When set to '1' using IQSET, text comms or the IQ's web pages the I/O module will repeatedly flash its address
until the I/O module’s Service button is pressed or it is set to ‘0’.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination The output (D) of the module. 0 or 1 0 O D
Falling Edge
When set to ‘1’ pulses the module’s ‘Destination D’ parameter on the falling edge of a change of value. 0 or 1 1 I F
Enable
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
1=
Invert Output When set to ‘1’ then the normal status of the ‘Destination D’ parameter is ‘1’ and the output pulse is set to ‘0’. Inverted 0 O I
0=
Normal
The duration of the output pulse, in seconds. If this is set to ‘0’ then the pulse will last for one complete cycle of the sequence
Pulse Duration +analogue 0 I P
table and in the case of event based execution the OFF event follows the ON event directly.
Rising Edge
When set to ‘1’ pulses the module’s ‘Destination D’ parameter on the rising edge of a change of value. 0 or 1 1 I R
Enable
Source The value that is to be monitored for changes. 0 or 1 0 I S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.15.2 IQ4 Combination Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
Size in brIQs 19
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Combination Logic module calculates its output (D) (0 or 1) as the logical combination of up to 4 logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). Each logical function is itself a function
of 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), and (H) which are AND’ed together ((E) AND (F) AND (G) AND (H)). An AND NOT function can also be achieved by specifying a lowercase letter
instead of uppercase. This allows combinations of AND, and NOT functions within each of the logical functions (J), (K), (L), and (M). The output (D) is the result of all logical functions
OR’ed together ((J) OR (K) OR (L) OR (M).
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.15.2.1 IQ4 Combination Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase letters indicate
Combination Boolean of
the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with Blank N J
J EeFfGgHh
the results of the logical functions K, L, and M.
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase letters indicate
Combination Boolean of
the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with Blank N K
K EeFfGgHh
the results of the logical functions J, L, and M.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase letters indicate
Combination Boolean of
the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with Blank N L
L EeFfGgHh
the results of the logical functions J, K, and M.
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase letters indicate
Combination Boolean of
the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical combination will be OR’ed with Blank N M
M EeFfGgHh
the results of the logical functions J, K, and L.
Destination The output (D) of the module. 0 or 1 0 O D
Input E Specifies (E) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 I E
Input F Specifies (F) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 I F
Input G Specifies (G) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 I G
Input H Specifies (H) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 I H
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.15.3 IQ4 Counter Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
Size in brIQs 18
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Counter Logic module provides the facility for counting pulse type signals such as those provided by gas and electricity meters. It has two outputs rate (R) and cumulative count
(M). (M) is the total number of times the input (S) has been set to 1 since the reset input (A) was last set to 1 multiplied by the scaling factor (F). (R) is the change in (M) over the period
(T).
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.15.3.1 IQ4 Counter Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Cumulative IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The cumulative output (M) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input
Double precision 0 O M
Output to other modules by linking it to the required modules.
Last Cumulative
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The value of the Cumulative Count when the module was last serviced. Full analogue 0 N l
Count
Page Specifies the strategy page containing the module. 0 to 255 0 N p
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Power IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The power in either kW or Btu/hour. Full analogue 0 N P
The rate (R) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the
Rate -1020 to +1020 0 O R
required modules.
Reschedule Time Defines the time, in seconds, over which the rate is calculated. 0 to 32767 5 N T
Reset The state of the reset input. 0 or 1 0 I A
20 20
-10 to +10
Scale Factor The value of each input pulse. IQ4 v3.30 or greater 1 I F
Double precision
Source The value being counted. 0 or 1 0 I S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.15.4 IQ4 Delay Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
Size in brIQs 14
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The Delay Logic module is specifically designed for interacting with the alarm reporting mechanism of the strategy allowing a grace time before alarms are reported. It calculates its
output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and G). If they are different for longer than the grace time, the output (D) will be set to 1. If they are the same, output (D) will be 0.
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.15.4.1 IQ4 Delay Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Default Full
The value used when the result of the calculation above is not 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. 0 I F
Input Analogue
Destination Full
The module's output. 0 O D
D Analogue
Input a The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘0’ 0 or 1 0 I a
Input b The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘1’ 0 or 1 0 I b
Input c The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘2’ 0 or 1 0 I c
Input d The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘3’ 0 or 1 0 I d
Input e The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘4’ 0 or 1 0 I e
Input f The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘5’ 0 or 1 0 I f
Input g The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘6’ 0 or 1 0 I g
Input h The value used when the result of the calculation above is ‘7’ 0 or 1 0 I h
The value subtracted form the value of the ‘Selector’ parameter. It allows support for base values of 0 and 1. It also supports the Full
Offset 1 I O
ability to cascade selector modules’. The default of 1 allows support for operation with BACnet multi-state objects. Analogue
Full
Selector Determines which of the 8 analogue inputs is used for the ‘Destination’ parameter’s value. 0 I S
Analogue
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.15.6 IQ4 D to A Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
Size in brIQs 19
Default Overview Parameters $, D
The D to A Logic module converts the digital inputs E, F, G, H, I, J, K, and L into a single analogue output D. The value of (D) represents the binary value of the input bits. E specifies
1 when set, F specifies 2 when set, G specifies 4 when set, H specifies 8 when set, I specifies 16 when set, J specifies 32 when set, K specifies 64 when set, and L specifies 128 when
set. e.g. with the following inputs (E)=1, (F)=0, (G)=1, (H)=0, (I)=1, (J)=0, (K)=0, (L)=0, output (D) would be 21. The module uses the following formula:
D=1x(E) + 2x(F) + 4x(G) + 8x(H) + 16x(I) + 32x(J) + 64x(K) + 128x(L)
The module can be disabled using the module state parameter. When the module is disabled its output is not updated, and is not passed on to any linked modules.
A1.15.6.1 IQ4 D to A Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bit 0 Specifies (a) in the calculation, adds 1 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I a
Bit 1 Specifies (b) in the calculation, adds 2 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I b
Bit 2 Specifies (c) in the calculation, adds 4 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I c
Bit 3 Specifies (d) in the calculation, adds 8 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I d
Bit 4 Specifies (e) in the calculation, adds 16 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I e
Bit 5 Specifies (f) in the calculation, adds 32 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I f
Bit 6 Specifies (g) in the calculation, adds 64 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I g
Bit 7 Specifies (h) in the calculation, adds 128 to the output. 0 or 1 0 I h
20 20
Destination The output (D) of the module. -10 to +10 0 O D
Specifies the digital node from which the value used as (E) is read. If it is not to be used in the calculation it should be linked Any digital
Input E - I E
node 0,0. node
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Hours Run The cumulative number of hours run output (O) of the module run calculated by the module (O). It can be used to provide
-1020 to +1020 0 O O
Output an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.
Interval The maximum number of hours run before an alarm is generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I I
0 or 1
Interval Limit Indicates when the hours run limit is exceeded. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the
1 = Interval 0 O N
Alarm required modules. A
exceeded.
0 or 1
Reset Resets the count of hours and alarm condition. 0 I A
1 = Reset
Source The state of the module whose hours run are being accumulated. 0 or 1 0 I S
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.15.10 IQ4 Latch Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
Size in brIQs 18
Default Overview Parameters $, D
IQ4 v3.30 or greater.
Latch Logic modules allow a digital state to be stored when a trigger input is set. The 'Destination D' parameter (D) is set to the value of the 'Source' parameter when the 'Trigger'
parameter is set to '1'. The 'Destination' parameter will remain at that value until the 'Trigger' parameter is set to '1' again. The 'Destination D' parameter (D) can be set to the value of
the 'Default Value' parameter by setting the 'Reset' parameter to '1'.
The module's status is retained when the IQ4 is powered down and when the IQ4 restarts it the module will adopt the status at power down.
A1.15.10.1 IQ4 Latch Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Disable Module', 'Label', 'Page', 'Sequence Step', 'Sequence Table', ‘X co-ordinate’ and ‘Y co-ordinate’
- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay (secs) (PV
The period (in seconds) loop input must be invalid before a PV Fail alarm is generated. 0 to 172800 0 I f1(D)
Fail)
Alarm Delay (SP The period (in seconds) the input must be not at the required setpoint before a Setpoint Deviation alarm is
0 to 172800 0 I s1(D)
Deviation) generated.
Alarm Group (PV Fail) Specifies which alarm group the PV Fail alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N f1(G)
Alarm Group (Setpoint
Specifies which alarm group the Setpoint Dev alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N s1(G)
Deviation)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (PV Fail) Indicates if the PV fail alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N f1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (SP
Indicates if the setpoint deviation alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 N s1(K)
Deviation)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the process variable fail clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N f1(C)
(PV Fail)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
Specifies whether the setpoint deviation clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 N s1(C)
(SP Deviation)
0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Clear Alarm Delay
v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) the PV Fail alarm must be cleared before the clear alarm is generated. 0 to 172800 0 I f1(d)
(secs) (PV Fail)
Clear Alarm Delay v3.50 or greater. The period (in seconds) the Setpoint Deviation alarm must be cleared before the clear alarm
0 to 172800 0 I s1(d)
(secs) (SP Deviation) is generated.
Specifies a range above and below the setpoint where the loop output is not changed when the process variable
Deadband is in that range e.g. 5 specifies 2.5 above and 2.5 below the setpoint. When enabled it filters out minor plant 0 to +1020 0 I B
disturbances and noise.
0 or 1
Default Action Indicates when the loop fail action type 2 is taken. 0 O a
1 = action type 2
If Sensor Fail = 0 -1020
The value to which the loop will control if the process variable fails, and the fail action is set to use the default to +1020
Default Value 0 I E
level. If Sensor Fail = 1 or 2
0 to 100
Derivative The derivative part of the output. -25 to +25 0 N d
The amount (in minutes) to multiply the result of the gain multiplied by the rate of change of error by to
Derivative Time (mins) -1020 to +1020 0 I T
produce the derivative part of the output.
0 or 1
Enabled (PV Fail) Specifies whether the process variable fail alarm is enabled. 1 = Enabled 0 I f1(E)
0 = Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (SP Deviation) Specifies whether the setpoint deviation alarm is enabled. 1 = Enabled 0 I s1(E)
0 = Disabled
The proportional gain of the loop, defines the way the loop responds to changes in the process variable. For
Gain -1020 to +1020 0 I G
IQ4 v3.0 and greater controllers when set to 0 the loop uses integral only control.
0, 6 and 7
0 = No loop alarm
In Alarm Indicates an alarm condition has been present for longer than its delay time and the alarm is enabled. 0 N !
6 = SP Deviation alarm
7 =PV Fail alarm
Integral The integral part of the output. -100 to +100 0 N i
Integral Time (mins) The time (in minutes) after which the integral term is added to the output. -1020 to +1020 0 I I
0 or 1
Manual Select Specifies whether manual level is imposed on the loop. 0 I A
1 = Manual level
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Manual Level The loop’s manual override setpoint. -1020 to +1020 0 I L
Occupied Setpoint The loop’s occupied setpoint. Used when setpoint select is set to '1'. 20
-10 to +10 20
0 I O
Output The output of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 O D
20 20
Process Variable The measured value being controlled. -10 to +10 0 I P
0 or 1
PV Fail Alarm State The status of the Process Variable Fail alarm. 0=No alarm 0 O f1(S)
1=Alarm
1 to 600
Reschedule Time The interval in seconds between loop output calculations. 0 N R
0 = Disabled
0 to 4
0 = Default PV
1 - Default OP
Sensor Fail The action that is taken when the process variable for a loop is invalid. 0 N F
2 - Stay in default OP,
3 - Freeze output
4 - No action
Setpoint Deviation The maximum loop error that can be reached before a setpoint deviation alarm is generated. -1020 to +1020 0 I V
0 or 1
0 = Unoccupied
Setpoint Select Specifies whether the loop controls to the occupied or unoccupied setpoint. 0 I S
Setpoint
1 = Occupied Setpoint
0 or 1
SP Deviation Alarm
The status of the Setpoint Deviation alarm. 1 = Alarm 0 O s1(S)
State
0 = No Alarm
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the PV alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 N f1(T)
(PV Fail)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the SP deviation alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 N s1(T)
(SP Deviation)
Unoccupied Setpoint The loop’s unoccupied setpoint. Used when setpoint select is set to '0'. -1020 to +1020 0 I U
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
v3.50 or greater. The time – in seconds – that the IQ4 must wait before unilaterally ending the
Backup Failure Timeout 0 to 65535 30 N f
backup or restore procedure.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6
0 = Idle
1 = preparing
for backup
2 = preparing
for restore
Backup_and_Restore_state v3.50 or greater. The status of the BACnet backup/restore. 3 = performing 0 N t
a backup
4 = performing
a restore
5 = backup
failure
6 = restore
failure
0 or 1
BACnet Backup/Restore v3.50 or greater. Enables/Disables the IQ4’s BACnet backup and restore functionality. 1 = Enabled 0 N b
0 = Disabled
BACnet Backup Preparation v3.50 or greater. The amount of time in seconds that the IQ4 might remain unresponsive after the
0 to 65535 0 N u
Time response to a start backup procedure has been sent.
0 or 1
BACnet Writable Properties v3.50 or greater. Enables/Disables the ability to write to the IQ4’s parameters over BACnet. 1 = Enabled 0 N w
0 = Disabled
v3.50 or greater. Specifies whether the Change_Of_State_Count and Elapsed_Active_Time 0 or 1
BO State Count And Active
properties on the BACnet AO & BO Objects are enabled. 0 = Enabled 0 N c
Time Properties
Must be disabled if a BTL compliant strategy is required. 1 = Disabled
Not in v3.50 or greater. For earlier versions specifies whether the controller's BTL compliance is
enabled. When enabled the controller's schedule offset modules are read only over BACnet. 0 or 1
BTL Compliance Changes are still possible when access is over the Trend network. 1 = Enabled 1 N c
For the controller to be BTL compliant this option must be enabled i.e. Schedule Offset modules 0= Disabled
read only over BACnet.
0 or 1
Create/Delete Service v3.50 or greater. Enables the Create/Delete service. 1 = Enabled 0 N C
0= Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The controller's address on the BACnet network. It can be specified manually or can be calculated
Calculated
Device Instance automatically using the following formula: 1 to 4194303. N i
automatically
Device Instance = (LAN Number*1000) + Local node
00:00:00 to
Last_Restore_Time v3.50 or greater. The last time the strategy was restored using a BACnet restore. 00:00:00 N m
23:59:59
0 or 1
Specifies whether the device instance is calculated automatically or manually specified. It is not
Manual Device Instance 1 = Manual 0 N A
recommended that this parameter is changed.
0= Auto
0 or 1
Specifies whether the object name prefixes are added to the object names when viewed from
Object Name Prefixes 1 = Added 1 N j
BACnet.
0= Not added
8 to 20-
BACnet Services Password v3.50 or greater. The password required to authorise use of the IQ4's BACnet services. - N K
character string
0 or 1
Cold & Warm Restart Service v3.50 or greater. Enables/Disables the IQ4's Cold & Warm Restart Service. 1 = Enabled 0 N r
0 = Disabled
0 or 1
1 = Message
Send I-am Specifies whether the IQ4 sends and 'I am' message on the BACnet network when it powers up. sent 0 N S
0 = Message
not sent
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.2 IQ4 BACnet IP Network Modules
Module Identifier n3
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
IQ4/BACnet only
BACnet IP network modules store the parameters specific to the BACnet IP network.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
1 =
Enables/disables the controller's BBMD functionality. The BBMD functionality will not work with devices that use
BBMD Enabled Enabled 0 N e
automatic IP addressing (DHCP), and under such condition should be left disabled.
0=
Disabled
BDT Remote IP A list of up to 32 devices addresses. Each item in the list is the IP address of a BBMD device the other side of a router IP All 32 set to
N bn(B)b
Address which can forward broadcast messages. Address 0.0.0.0
BDT Remote IP All 32 set to
A list of up to 32 subnets masks that correspond to the remote IP addresses specified in the BDT Remote IP Address. N b(n)s
Subnet Address 0.0.0.0
All 32 set to
BDT remote UDP A list of up to 32 UDP ports that correspond to the remote IP addresses specified in the BDT Remote IP Address. 0 to 65535 N Bn(E)
47808
The controller's network number on the BACnet IP network. Only a single network number is allowed on a single
Network Number 0 to 65534 0 N n
Ethernet subnet, and must be unique on the Ethernet network.
UDP Port The UDP port used by the controller to send messages to other Trend system devices on the BACnet IP network. 0 to 65535 47808 N E
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.3 IQ4 BACnet MSTP Network Modules
Module Identifier n5
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
BACnet MSTP network modules store the parameters specific to the BACnet MS/TP network.
A1.17.3.1 IQ4 MSTP Network Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: ‘Label’ and 'Disable Module', - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group Specifies which alarm group to which network alarms generated on the MS/TP network are sent. 0 to 500 1 N g
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies the controller's network number on the BACnet MS/TP network. Can be specified automatically or
BACnet
manually. When 'Manual BACnet network number' is set to 'Automatic' it is read only and is set to the number LAN
network 0 to 65534 N n
specified by the 'Lan Number' parameter. When 'Manual BACnet network number' is set to 'Manual' it can be set number
number
to the required value. It is strongly recommended that this value is set automatically.
0,1,2,3,4
0=Disabled
Baud Rate Specifies the controller's baud rate on the MSTP network. 76800 should be selected for best system performance. 1=9600
76800 N b
Value Baud rates below 38400 are not recommended for large systems, performance problems are likely. 2=19200
3=38400
4=76800
Any ASCII character
Lan Label User-friendly label for the LAN. It can be up to 30-characters long. - N k
except \/(){};,:
The LAN number of the controller on the Ethernet network. It is the same as the Address module's 'Local Lan'
Lan Number parameter. Changing the value of this parameter will change the value of the Address module's 'Local Lan' 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 9 N N
parameter.
The MAC address of the controller on the BACnet MS/TP network. Can be specified automatically or manually.
MAC Address When 'Manual MAC address' is set to 'Automatic' it is read only and set to '0'. When 'Manual MAC address' is 0 to 255 0 N M
set to 'Manual' it can be set to the required value. It is strongly recommended that this value is set automatically.
Max Info
Specifies the maximum number of frames a node can send per rotation of the MS/TP token. 0 to 65534 20 N f
Frames
The maximum address polled to create a network on the MS/TP trunk. It is not recommended that this parameter
Max Master 1 to 127 127 N O
is changed from the default.
User-friendly label for the module. It can be up to 30-characters long. If the controller is to be accessed by an Any ASCII character
Module Label Blank N $
SDU-xcite only 20-characters can be used. except \/(){};,:
Manual
Specifies whether the controller's address on the BACnet MS/TP network is determined manually or 0 or 1
BACnet
automatically. If determined automatically the address is set to the number specified by the 'Lan Number' 1 = Automatic 1 N l
network
parameter. 0 = Manual
number
Specifies whether the controller's MS/TP MAC address determined manually or automatically. If determined 0 or 1
Manual MAC
automatically the MAC address is set to '0'. It is strongly recommended that this be left as automatic. Setting to 1 = Automatic 1 N L
address
some other MAC address will compromise system performance. 0 = Manual
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, or 2
Specifies whether messages on the MSTP network require a low-level acknowledgement. When set to
0 = Unconfirmed
Service Class 'Confirmed' the device will require a low-level acknowledgement, when set to 'Unconfirmed' an 0 N a
1= Unused
acknowledgement is not required.
2 = Confirmed
None, LAN, IWRK
NONE = No Trend
network available on the
MSTP network
LAN = The Trend network
Trend Mode IQ4 v3.2 or greater. Determines how the associated MSTP network operates in a Trend system. - N T
on the MSTP network is a
LAN
IWRK = The Trend
network on the MSTP
network is an internetwork
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.4 IQ4 BACnet Network Modules
Module Identifier n3
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
BACnet Network modules store the parameters specific to the BACnet network.
A1.17.4.1 IQ4 BACnet Network Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: ‘Label’, - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Enables/disables the controller's BBMD functionality. The BBMD functionality will not work with devices that
BBMD Enabled 1 = Enabled 0 N e
use automatic IP addressing (DHCP), and under such condition should be left disabled.
0= Disabled
Specifies whether the controller's BTL compliance is enabled. When enabled the controller's Schedule Offset
0 or 1
modules are read only over BACnet. Changes are still possible when access is over the Trend network.
BTL Compliance 1 = Enabled 1 N c
For the controller to meet the requirements of the BACnet testing laboratory WSPCert this option must be
0= Disabled
enabled i.e. Schedule Offset modules read only over BACnet.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
BDT Remote IP A list of up to 32 devices addresses. Each item in the list is the IP address of a BBMD device the other side of a All 32 set to
IP Address N bn(B)b
Address router which can forward broadcast messages. 0.0.0.0
BDT Remote A list of up to 32 subnets masks that correspond to the remote IP addresses specified in the BDT Remote IP All 32 set to
IP Address N b(n)s
Subnet Address. 0.0.0.0
BDT remote UDP A list of up to 32 UDP ports that correspond to the remote IP addresses specified in the BDT Remote IP Address. 0 to 65535 All 32 set to 47808 N Bn(E)
The controller's address on the BACnet network. It can be specified manually or can be calculated automatically
Calculated
Device Instance using the following formula: 1 to 4194303. N I
automatically
Device Instance = (LAN Number*1000) + Local node
0 or 1
Manual Device
Specifies whether the device instance is calculated automatically or manually specified. 1 = Manual 0 N A
Instance
0= Auto
The controllers BACnet network number. Only a single network number is allowed on a single Ethernet subnet,
Network Number 0 to 65534 0 N n
and must be unique on the Ethernet network.
0 or 1
1 = Message
Send I-am Specifies whether the IQ4 sends and 'I am' message on the BACnet network when it powers up. sent 0 N S
0 = Message
not sent
UDP Port The UDP port used by the controller to send messages to other Trend system devices on BACnet. 0 to 65535 47808 N E
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.5 IQ4 Ethernet IP Network Modules
Module Identifier n1
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
Ethernet IP network modules store the parameters specific to the Ethernet network.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQ4 v2.30 or greater. Specifies the alarm group to which all Ethernet IP network alarms are sent. If set
Alarm Group 0 to 500 0 N g
to zero alarms only sent to connected supervisor devices.
The IP address of the each of the DNS servers being used. IQ4 Max 5 addresses, IQ4 max 4 addresses.
DNS Servers 1 IP addresses separated
If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP 0.0.0.0 N N
to 5 by a ';'.
server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available, it is not set.
Email The password required by the email server that the IQ4 is to use to send email. Only set up if required
0 - N A
Password by server.
Email Port IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The TCP port used by the email server. 0 to 65535 25 N O
0, 1, 2, 3
0 = No security
Email Security IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The security protocol used by the email server. 1 = SSL 3 N q
2 = STARTTLS
3 = Auto Secure
Email Server
The IP address or host name of the email server that the controller is to use to send email. IP Address - N L
Address
0, 1, 2, 3
Email Min 0 = TLS V1.0
The minimum version for email TLS.
TLS version 1 = TLS V1.1 0 N -
2 = TLS V1.2
3 = TLS V1.3
Email The user name required by the email server that the controller is to use to send email. Only set up if
0 - N o
Username required by server.
0 or 1
Enable Default
Specifies whether the controller will respond to its default hostname. 0 = Enabled 0 N h
Hostname
1 = Disabled
Ethernet MAC The MAC address of the controller. - Set by manufacturer N M
The controller’s host name. It provides a network communication name for the controller. It is separate Any 7 bit ASCII
from the Identifier. It must be unique on the network, and must not be greater than 15-characters in character in the range
Hostname Blank N $
length. It can include 'A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-', or '_'. It must start with a character in the range 'A'-'Z', 'a'- 'A'-'Z', 'a'-'z' or '0'-'9'
'z' and must not end with '-' or '_'. plus '-' or '_'.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Ignore Email IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Causes IQ4 to ignore the SSL security certificate should normally be enabled,
0 = Disabled 0 N j
Certificate but can be disabled if the IQ4 has problem authenticating the certificate.
1 = Enabled
The IP address of the controller. The IP address for each controller must be unique to avoid address
clashes. IP address in the following ranges should not be used:
IP Address Reason
127.x.x.x.x Reserved for loopback.
The non-masked part of the IP address cannot be all 1’s or 0’s e.g. if IP
Non-masked part of IP
address is 1.2.x.x and subnet mask is 255.255.0.0 then x.x. cannot be either 128.1.1.3 if
address
255.255 or 0.0. Addressing mode = 0
IP Address 224.0.0.0 to IP Address Obtained N I
Reserved for multicast. automatically if
239.255.255.255
Addressing mode = 1
Addresses 240.0.0.0 to
Reserved for experimentation and development.
247.255.255.255
x.x.x.255 Reserved for broadcast.
If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP
server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available, it automatically negotiated with other
devices on the segment.
1 or 2
IP Addressing 1 = Obtained
Specifies whether the IP settings are obtained automatically or specified manually. 1 N P
Mode automatically
2 = Specified Manually
A 30-character label for the controller's LAN. It is used by supervisor and tool to display a label for the
Any ASCII character
LAN Label LAN. It is only used when the controller is acting as the INC on the network. It is recommended that Blank N k
except \/(){};,:
it is set to the same value in all controllers on the same LAN.
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. The LAN number of the controller on the Ethernet network. It is the same as the
LAN Number Address module's 'Local Lan' parameter. Changing the value of this parameter will change the value 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 20 N N
of the Address module's 'Local Lan' parameter.
Redirect to IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Redirects any web server request made to the http web server to the https web 0 or 1
1 N n
HTTPS server. 1 = redirect
Remote 20 IP addresses
All 20 set to 0.0.0.0 N b
Device 1 to 20 separated by a ';'.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The IP address or host name and subnet mask of each of the other devices that are to form part of the
internetwork on Ethernet, allowing the internetwork to span routers. Known as the remote devices
table.
The table must be placed in all devices on the network and include the details of at least two devices 20 masks separated by a
All 20 set to 0.0.0.0 N s
from each subnet to be linked by the internetwork. For increased reliability details of additional devices ';'.
should be specified. If automatic addressing is being used the devices must be specified using host
names, and if manual addressing is being used the list should contain the devices with the lowest IP
addresses.
255.255.255.255 if
The IP address of the router to which messages are sent if the destination address is not on the local
Addressing mode = 0
subnet. It should be set to the IP address of a router on the same subnet as the controller.
Router 1 IP Address Obtained N R
If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP
automatically if
server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available, it is not set
Addressing mode = 1
IQ4 v3.60 or greater. The port number used by the IQ4 for the SSH communications required for vCNC
Secure Access
connection. It should only be changed if the default is not suitable, i.e. already being used on the 0 to 65535 22 N T
Port
network for something else.
Secure Web 0 to 65535
Server Port IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The port number used by the IQ4 for its HTTPS web server. 0 = HTTPS web server 0 N e
Number OFF
When selected the controller's standalone mode is turned ON. When operating in standalone mode the
0 or 1
Standalone controller will not attempt to find other controllers on the Ethernet network. This option should only
0 = Enabled 0 N a
Mode Enabled be selected if the controller is the only one on the Ethernet network, or there is a requirement for it not
1 = Disabled
to communicate with other controllers. For IQ4NCs it is permanently disabled.
255.255.0.0 if
The subnet mask of the controller. The subnet mask must be the same for all devices not separated by
Addressing mode = 0
routers that are to build LANs or an internetwork. This ensures that they are on the same subnet.
Subnet Mask - Obtained N S
If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP
automatically if
server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available, it is set to 255.255.0.0.
Addressing mode = 1
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
None, LAN, IWRK
NONE = No Trend
network available on the
Ethernet network
LAN = The Trend
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. Determines how the associated Ethernet network operates in a Trend system. It
Trend Mode network on the Ethernet - N T
can be set to:
network is a LAN
IWRK = The Trend
network on the Ethernet
network is an
internetwork
The UDP port of the controller. This defines the UDP port used by the controller to send messages to
UDP Port other Trend system devices. To construct an internetwork, the all the devices must use the same UDP
0 to 65535 57612 N E
(inet) port. If you are restricted to using one subnet, but wish to have separate sites on that subnet (i.e. more
than one internetwork), then you can set different UDP port numbers for each group of devices.
0 to 65535
Web Server
The Ethernet port number used by the IQ4 for its HTTP web server. 0 = HTTP web server 80 N w
Port Number
OFF
The IP address of the each of the WINS servers being used. IQ4 Max 5 addresses. IQ4 Max 5 addresses,
WINS Servers IQ4 max 4 addresses. IP addresses separated
0.0.0.0 N W
1 to 5 If Addressing Mode is Obtain Automatically this parameter is obtained automatically from DHCP by a ';'.
server if one is available. If a DHCP server is not available, it is not set.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies whether the controller the controller's XML server is turned ON. The table below describes
the options:
Option Description
XML interface 0 to 3
The controller's XML Web services are disabled.
OFF 0 = XML interface OFF
Basic IQ 1 = Basic IQ
XML Server The controller's XML Web services are enabled.
authentication authentication 0 N u
Enabled
IQ4 v3.1 or greater only. The controller's XML Web services are enabled, and 2 = Write authentication
Write
writes to the controller using the XML web services are protected using 3 = Read/Write
authentication authentication
HMAC_MD5 security.
IQ4 v3.1 or greater only. The controller's XML Web services are enabled, and
Read/Write
read from and writes to the controller using the XML web services are protected
authentication
using HMAC_MD5 security.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.6 IQ4 LAN Network Modules
Module Identifier n2
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
LAN network modules store the parameters specific to the Trend current loop network.
A1.17.6.1 IQ4 IQ LAN Network Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: ‘Label’ and 'Disable Module', - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm IQ4 v2.30 or greater. Specifies the alarm group to which all Trend current loop LAN alarms are sent. If
0 to 500 0 N g
Group set to zero alarms only sent to connected supervisor devices.
0 or 1
Specifies whether the controller will negotiate its baud rate with other controllers on the network, or use
Autobaud 1 = Enabled 1 N A
the baud rate specified by the Baud Rate parameter.
0 = Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies the baud rate of the LAN. 2 or 3 Set by
Baud Rate Not available if Autobaud is enabled. When Autobaud is enabled the Baud Rate parameter is read only, 2=9600 hardware N b
and will be negotiated with other devices on the network. 3=19200 switch.
A 30-character label for the controller's LAN. It is used by supervisor and tool to display a label for the Any ASCII character except
LAN Label Blank N k
LAN. It is only used when the controller is acting as the INC on the network. \/(){};,:
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. The LAN number of the controller on the Ethernet network. It is the same as the
LAN
Address module's 'Local Lan' parameter. Changing the value of this parameter will change the value of 1, 4 to 119 excluding 10. 20 N N
Number
the Address module's 'Local Lan' parameter.
None, LAN, IWRK
NONE = No Trend network
available on the current loop
Trend LAN = The Trend network on the
IQ4 v3.2 or greater. Determines how the associated current loop network operates in a Trend system. - N T
Mode current loop is a LAN
IWRK = The Trend network on
the current loop is an
internetwork
A1.17.7 IQ4 Type 8 (Modbus Serial) Network Module
Module Identifier n
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
IQ4 v4.20 firmware or greater /INT variants.
Type 8 (Modbus Serial) Network modules store the parameters specific to the Modbus serial connection.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7
0 = 1200
1 = 2400
2 = 4800
Baud Rate The baud rate of the Modbus. 4 N b
3 = 9600
4 = 19200
5 = 38400
6 = 57600
7 = 115200
0, 1, 2
Read only – Indicates the status of the selected port
0 =
Communication Unavailable – the channel is in use by another Resource
Unavailable 0 N t
Channel Status Available – the channel is available
1 = Available
In Use – the channel is being used by this Network Module.
2 = In Use
0, 1, 2
Communication 0 = Not Used
The port used for the Modbus communications. 0 N v
Channel 1 = RS232
2 = RS485
Interframe Pause The pause in ms between frames sent by the controller on the Modbus Network. 500 0 N i
0, 1
0 = Modbus
Modbus The communication mode used by the Modbus connection. It should be set to the value required by the other devices
RTU 1 N m
Communication Mode (slave device(s)) on the Modbus RTU and ASCII slaves should not be mixed on the same network port.
1 = Modbus
ASCII
0, 1, 2
0- None
Parity The parity required for the Modbus. 2 N P
1 - Odd
2 - Even
Re-tries The number of times to attempt a Modbus request before a communication error is reported. 0, 1, 2, 3 3 N r
Timeout The maximum wait time in ms for a response frame from a Modbus request. 0 to 65535 50 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Local Address The address of the IQ4 on the Wall-bus network. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 1 N a
The communication channel used by the Wallbus network, always
Communication Channel 4 4 N v
‘4’.
0, 1, 2
0 = Unavailable, the channel is in use by another
Communication Channel
The status of the selected communication channel. Resource 0 N t
Status
1 = Available, the channel is available
2 = In Use – the channel is being used by this module.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.9 IQ4 Type 15 (M-bus) Network Modules
Module Identifier n
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
IQ4 v4.30 firmware or greater /INT variants.
Type 15 (M-bus) Network modules store the parameters specific to the M-bus connection.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
0 = 300
1 = 600
2 = 1200
Baud Rate The baud rate of the M-bus. 3 = 2400 0 N b
4 = 4800
5 = 9600
6 = 19200
7 = 38400
Read only – Indicates the status of the selected port 0, 1, 2
Unavailable – the channel is in use by another Resource 0 = Unavailable
Communication Channel Status 0 N t
Available – the channel is available 1 = Available
In Use – the channel is being used by this Network Module. 2 = In Use
0, 1, 2
0 = Not Used
Communication Channel The port used for the M-bus communications. 0 N v
1 = RS232
2 = RS485
Interframe Pause The pause in ms between frames sent by the controller on the M-bus network. 0 to 500 100 N i
Retries The number of times to attempt a M-bus request before a communication error is reported. 0, 1, 2, 3 3 N r
Timeout The maximum wait time in seconds for a response frame from a M-bus request. 0 to 65535 10 N T
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.10 IQ4 Type 16 (Trend Client) Network Modules
Module Identifier n
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
IQ4 v3.30 or greater
They are used by the IQ4 to communicate with its USB Local Engineering Port and RS232 Local Supervisor Port, they are always Network modules 10 and 11 (n10 and n11). n10 is
used for the USB Local Engineering Port and n11 is used for the RS232 Local Supervisor Port.
Because they are used by the IQ4 they are created as required and cannot be edited. Both n10 and n11 are present in all variants of IQ4, however n11 is not present in /XNC variants but
will be created if the RS232 Local Supervisor Port is to be used as a supervisor port. If the port is to be used by the XNC to interface with a 3rd party system a Type 17 (XNC Serial)
Network module should be used.
A1.17.10.1 IQ4 Type 16 (Trend Client) Network Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: ‘Label’, - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
1 or 3
Communication Channel The number of the COM port assigned to the Serial port. 1 = RS232 1 N v
3 = RS485
Communication Channel The type of serial interface the port is to use. It is automatically set to match the
RS232 or RS485 - N m
Mode hardware of the port to which it is connected.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2
0 = Unavailable, the channel is in use by
Communication Channel another Resource
The status of the selected communication channel. 0 N t
Status 1 = Available, the channel is available
2 = In Use – the channel is being used by
this module.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.17.12 IQ4 Type 19 (Modbus IP) Network Modules
Module Identifier n
Size in brIQs 0
Default Overview Parameters -
IQ4 v4.20 firmware or greater /INT variants.
IQ4 Type 19 (Modbus IP) Network Module store the parameters specific to the Modbus IP connection. A Type 19 (Modbus IP) Network module is required for each Modbus device
the IQ4 is to communicate with.
Note: A maximum of 10 Type 19 (Modbus IP) Network modules can be added to the controller's strategy.
A1.17.12.1 IQ4 Type 19 (Modbus IP) Network Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: 'Label' and 'Disable Module'- see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Network
The network number of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with. 0 to 65534 0 N n
Number
0 or 1
Type Indicates the type of NTD. 0 = Not used 1 N Y
1 = BACnet
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies the algorithm used by the module to predict the warm up and cool down times. Can be set to 'Physical' or
0 or 1
'Statistical'. When set to 'Physical' it will use the traditional algorithm used in all previous IQ controllers. When set to
Algorithm Type 1=Statistical 0 N Y
'Statistical' it will use a new algorithm which calculates the OSS times based on measurement of the start and stop
0=Physical
timing, and typically offers better accuracy.
Cooldown Limit The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned off before the end of occupation (the cool down
0 to 1439 0 I D
(minutes) period).
Set between optimum stop time and the end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by
Cooldown State 0 or 1 000 O d
linking it to the required modules.
An estimate of temperature of the cooling medium (e.g. supply air temperature) that is used if an actual measurement
Cooling Average
of the temperature is not available.
Medium -1020 to +1020 0 N c1(M)
This value is overwritten by the 'Cooling Medium Temperature' parameter. Therefore, there is no point in specifying
Temperature
it.
For the 'Physical' model this is the length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the
medium temperature.
Cooling Gain Time
For the 'Statistical' model this is the length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature cool down by 1 -100 to +100 5 I c1(G)
Constant
Deg C on a typical day.
This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected.
Cooling Medium
The temperature of the cooling medium. If set to 0 the value of the Cooling Medium Temp parameter will be used. -1020 to +1020 8 I c1(A)
Temperature
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Cooling OSS
Specifies the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. -1020 to +1020 0 I c1(S)
Setpoint
Cooling Start The maximum variance (in DegC) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of
-100 to +100 1 I c1(T)
Elevation occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected.
Cooling Stop The maximum variance (in DegC) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of
-100 to +100 1 I c1(P)
Elevation occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if cooling is selected.
An estimate of temperature of the heating medium (e.g. supply air temperature) used if an actual measurement of the
Heating Average
temperature is not available.
Medium -1020 to +1020 70 N h1(M)
This value is overwritten by the 'Heating Medium Temperature' parameter. Therefore, there is no point in specifying
Temperature
it.
For the 'Physical' model this is the length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to achieve the
medium temperature.
Heating Gain Time
For the 'Statistical' model this is the length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature warm up by 1 Deg -100 to +100 10 I h1(G)
Const (hours)
C on a typical day.
This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected.
Heating Medium
The temperature of the heating medium. If set to 0 the value of the Heating Ave Medium Temp parameter will be used. -1020 to +1020 70 I h1(A)
Temperature
Heating OSS
Specifies the temperature that must be achieved before occupation is read. -1020 to +1020 0 I h1(S)
Setpoint
Heating Start The maximum variance (in DegC) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the start of
-100 to +100 -1 I h1(T)
Elevation occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected.
Heating Stop The maximum variance (in DegC) of the actual temperature from the setpoint that is acceptable at the end of
-100 to +100 -1 I h1(P)
Elevation occupation. This parameter only needs to be specified if heating is selected.
Inside Temp Specifies the inside temperature. 0 to 100 0 I I
The length of time (in hours) it would take the building temperature to equalise with the outside air temperature at the
Loss Time
end of occupation. It is continually adjusted by the OSS module to ensure accuracy at start and stop times. It should be 0 to 100 5 I L
Constant (hours)
set to a reasonable value to reduce the OSS module’s learning time.
0 or 1
Mode Current OSS mode. 0 = Heating 0 O m
1 = Cooling
Non Occupied Set between occupation stop and optimum start time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it
0 or 1 0 O n
State to the required modules.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Set between start of occupation and optimum stop time. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking
Occupied State 0 or 1 0 N o
it to the required modules.
Set between start of occupation, and end of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking
OTP State 0 or 1 0 O t
it to the required modules.
Set between optimum start time and optimum stop time (used for switching loops to occupied setpoint). It can be used
OSS State 0 or 1 0 O s
to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.
Outside Temp Specifies the outside air temperature. 0 to 100 0 I O
Optimum On Time The current calculated optimum ON time. 00:00 to 48:00 00:00 N N
Optimum Off Time The current calculated optimum OFF time. 00:00 to 48:00 00:00 N F
20 20
Start Time Error The current start time error in minutes. -10 to +10 - N E
‘Physical’
algorithm
0 to 2
0 = Passive
1 = Heating
2 = Cooling
‘Statistical’
algorithm
0 to 6
0 = Passive
State The current state of operation of the OSS module. 1 = Heating On 0 N S
2 = Cooling
On
3 = Heating
start
4 = Heating
stop
5 = Cooling
start
6 = Cooling
stop
Stop Time Error The current stop time error in minutes. -1020 to +1020 - N e
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Valid module
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Time Schedule module used the OSS to determine occupation status. OSS
number.
Time Schedule Note: In previous firmware versions, the Time Schedule module used is determined by module number. This can be module I Z
0 = use module
replicated by setting this parameter to ‘0’. number
number
Warm Up Limit The maximum period (in minutes) the heating/cooling can be turned on before the start of occupation (the warm up
0 to 1439 360 I W
(minutes) period).
Set between optimum start time and the start of occupation. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by
Warmup State 0 or 1 0 O w
linking it to the required modules.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group to which the BBUF alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N g
0 or 1
Data Precision The precision of the recorded value. 0 = Single precision 0 N D
1 = Double precision
Last Notify Record The value of the ‘Total Record Count’ parameter when the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N l
0 or 1
Indicates whether the log is full i.e. the number of records has reached the value specified by
Log Enable 0 = Disabled 1 I E
the ‘Number of Records’ parameter.
1 = Enabled
Indicates whether the log is full i.e. the number of records has reached the value specified by 0 or 1
Log Full 0 N l
the ‘Number of Records’ parameter. 1 = Log full
Specifies the number of records after which the buffer level alarm is sent (e.g. if set to 200 the
Notification Threshold 0 to 232-1 0 N n
alarm would be sent every 200 values i.e. 200, 400, 600 etc).
Number of Records Specifies the number of records the module can store before the first is overwritten. 1 to 1000 1000 N N
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Record Count The number of records recorded so far. 0 to Number of Records 0 N R
Records Since Last
The number of records since the last notification was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N r
Notification
-1020 to +1020 for analogue outputs.
Source The value the plot module is recording. 0 I S
0 or 1 for digital outputs.
0 or 1
Stop When Full Specifies whether logging will stop when the log is full. 0 = Disabled 0 N W
1 = Enabled
Time of Last Date and time in the format yyyy-
The date and time the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 N b
Notification mm-dd&Thh:mm:ss
Date and time in the format yyyy-
Time of Last Record The date and time of the last record. 0 N T
mm-dd&Thh:mm:ss
Indicates the total number of records that have been taken since the module started recording
Total Record Count 0 to 232-1 0 N C
values.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.21.2 IQ4 Synchronised Plot Modules
Module Identifier P
Size in brIQs 12 plus log memory (5 bytes per record) IQ4 is limited to 100,000 logging records (e.g. 100 off 1000 point logs).
Default Overview Parameters $
Synchronised plot modules are the traditional Trend plot; they can log up to 1000 records of the value at fixed intervals (from 1s up to 24 hours).
Synchronised plots on should not be used if BTL compliance is required.
A1.21.2.1 IQ4 Synchronised Plot Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', 'Page', 'X co-ordinate' and 'Y co-ordinate' - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group to which the BBUF alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N g
Last Notify
The value of the Total Record Count when the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N l
Record
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Notification Specifies the number of records after which the buffer level alarm is sent (e.g. if set to 200 the alarm would be sent every
0 to 232-1 0 N n
Threshold 200 values i.e. 200, 400, 600 etc).
Number of
Specifies the number of records the module can store before the first is overwritten. 1 to 1000 1000 N N
Records
0 to 9
0 = 1 hour
1 = 15 minutes
2 = 24 hours
3= 1 minute
The interval between logs. The interval between logs. For controllers that store 96 values per plot only 1 hour, 15 minutes,
Period 4 = 5 minutes 0 N P
24 hours, and 1 minute intervals are available. For controllers that can store 1000 values per plot all intervals are available.
5=10 minutes
6=20 minutes
7=30 minutes
8=6 hours
9=1 second.
0 to Number of
Record Count The number of records recorded so far. 0 N R
Records
Records Since
Last The number of records since the last notification was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N r
Notification
-1020 to +1020 for
analogue outputs.
Source The value the plot module is recording. 0 I S
0 or 1 for digital
outputs.
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 N b
Notification mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time of the last record. 0 N T
Record mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Total Record
Indicates the total number of records that have been taken since the module started recording values. 0 to 232-1 0 N C
Count
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.21.3 IQ4 Periodic Plot Modules
Module Identifier P
Size in brIQs 12 plus log memory (5 bytes per record) IQ4 is limited to 100,000 logging records (e.g. 100 off 1000 point logs).
Default Overview Parameters $
Periodic Plot modules enable the value of a parameter to be recorded at the interval defined by the Interval input; so, the interval may change. Periodic plots can save memory since
more data can be recorded when important events are occurring, and less when there is nothing significant to record. After the maximum number of values is stored, the first will be
overwritten. There is an option to enable a Log Full output and cease logging, until the plot buffer is cleared (Stop When Full option).
A1.21.3.1 IQ4 Periodic Plot Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', 'Page', 'X co-ordinate' and 'Y co-ordinate' - see Common IQ4 Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group to which the BBUF alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N g
Last Notify
The value of the Total Record Count when the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N l
Record
0 or 1
Log Enable Enables/Disables the recording of information. If BTL compliance is required, this must not be linked to another module. 0 = Disabled 1 I E
1 = Enabled
Indicates whether the log is full i.e. the number of number of records in the plot has reached the value specified by the 0 or 1
Log Full 0 O F
Number of Records parameter. 1 = Log full
Interval Specifies the interval in seconds between one sample and the next. 0 to 86400 0 I I
Notification Specifies the number of records after which the buffer level alarm is sent (e.g. if set to 200 the alarm would be sent every
0 to 232-1 0 N n
Threshold 200 values i.e. 200, 400, 600 etc).
Number of
Specifies the number of records the module can store before the first is overwritten. 0 to 1000 1000 N N
Records
0 to Number of
Record Count The number of records recorded so far. 0 N R
Records
Records Since
Last The number of records since the last notification was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N r
Notification
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
-1020 to +1020 for
analogue outputs.
Source The value the plot module is recording. 0 I S
0 or 1 for digital
outputs.
0 or 1
Stop When Specifies whether logging will stop when the log is full. When enabled logging will stop when the number of values logged
0 = Disabled 0 N W
Full =number of records. When disabled, the log will wrap round when full overwriting the oldest value.
1 = Enabled
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 N b
Notification mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time of the last record. 0 N T
Record mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Total Record
Indicates the total number of records that have been taken since the module started recording values. . 0 to 232-1 0 N C
Count
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.21.4 IQ4 Triggered Plot Modules
Module Identifier P
Size in brIQs 12 plus log memory (5 bytes per record) IQ4 is limited to 100,000 logging records (e.g. 100 off 1000 point logs).
Default Overview Parameters $
Triggered Plot modules enable the value of a parameter to be recorded when the trigger input occurs (changes from 0 to 1). This allows recording of events at a specific time that could
otherwise be missed by synchronised or periodic plots. Triggered plotting maximises use of plot memory as it only records when required. After the maximum number of values is
stored, the first will be overwritten. There is an option to enable a Log Full output and cease logging, until the plot buffer is cleared (Stop When Full option).
Triggered plots should not be used if BTL compliance is required.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group Specifies the alarm group to which the BBUF alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 N g
Last Notify
The value of the Total Record Count when the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N l
Record
0 or 1
Log Enable Enables/Disables the recording of information. If BTL compliance is required, this must not be linked to another module. 0 = Disabled 1 I E
1 = Enabled
Indicates whether the log is full i.e. the number of number of records in the plot has reached the value specified by the 0 or 1
Log Full 0 O F
Number of Records parameter. 1 = Log full
Notification Specifies the number of records after which the buffer level alarm is sent (e.g. if set to 200 the alarm would be sent every
0 to 232-1 0 N n
Threshold 200 values i.e. 200, 400, 600 etc).
Number of
Specifies the number of records the module can store before the first is overwritten. 0 to 1000 1000 N N
Records
0 to Number of
Record Count The number of records recorded so far. 0 N R
Records
Records Since
Last The number of records since the last notification was sent. 0 to 232-1 0 N r
Notification
-1020 to +1020 for
analogue outputs.
Source The value the plot module is recording. 0 I S
0 or 1 for digital
outputs.
0 or 1
Stop When Specifies whether logging will stop when the log is full. When enabled logging will stop when the number of values logged
0 = Disabled 0 N W
Full =number of records. When disabled, the log will wrap round when full overwriting the oldest value.
1 = Enabled
Stop When
Indicates the total number of records that have been taken since the module started recording values. 0 to 232-1 0 N C
Full
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time the last BBUF alarm was sent. 0 N b
Notification mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Date and time in
Time of Last the format yyyy-
The date and time of the last record. 0 N T
Record mm-
dd&Thh:mm:ss
Total Record
Indicates the total number of records that have been taken since the module started recording values. 0 to 232-1 0 N C
Count
Trigger Input The value that triggers recording. Recording occurs when the value changes from 0 to 1 not when it changes from 1 to 0. 0 or 1. 0 N G
Trigger Output An output that Indicate the state of the trigger input. 0 or 1 0 O O
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.22 IQ4 Schedule Offset Modules
Module Identifier H
Size in brIQs
OTP Schedule Modules 19
OSS Schedule Modules 21
Default Overview Parameters -
They allow items to be turned off and on at times that are offset from the specified time schedule module’s occupation times. There are two different types of Schedule Offset module:
occupation time profile, and optimum start/stop. IQSET treats them as the same module with the Type parameter defining the modules type.
OTP
This type of Schedule Offset module is controlled by the occupation times set in the associated time schedule module + the start and stop deviation specified on the Schedule Offset
module itself. (I.e. the output is on during the occupation period, and off during the unoccupied period subject to the application of the start and stop deviations).
OSS
This type of Schedule Offset module is controlled by the optimum start and stop times calculated by the OSS module. (I.e. the output is on during the OSS on period, subject to the
application of the start and stop deviations).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies either the output level used during cool down, or the analogue node from which it is read.
Cooldown Value -1020 to +1020 0 I L
Note: This parameter is not used for OTP Schedule Offset modules.
Either specifies the output level used when the Schedule Offset is in manual control, or the analogue node from which
Manual Level -1020 to +1020 0 I M
it is read.
Manual Select The digital node that forces the module to manual control. 0 or 1 0 I A
Non-Occupied
Either specifies the output level used during non-occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read -1020 to +1020 0 I N
Value
Occupied Value Specifies either the output level used during occupation, or the analogue node from which it is read. S -1020 to +1020 0 I O
OSS/OTP
The Time Schedule module from which the schedule’s occupation times are taken. 1 to 100 0 N Z
Connection
Output The analogue node to which the module writes its output (D). -1020 to +1020 0 O D
The difference (in minutes) between the start time specified in the time schedule module and the start time used by
Start Deviation -1440 to +1440 0 I T
the schedule offset.
1 to 4
1 = Occupied
2 = Warmup
State The current state of the OSS module. 0 N S
3 = Cooldown
4 = Non-
occupied
The difference (in minutes) between the stop time specified in the time schedule module and the start time used by
Stop Deviation 1440 to +144 0 I P
the schedule offset.
1 to 2
Type The type of schedule offset module to be used. 1 = OSS 2 N Y
2 = OTP
Specifies either the output level used during warm up, or the analogue node from which it is read.
Warm Up Value -1020 to +1020 0 I W
Note: This parameter is not used for OTP Schedule Offset modules.
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 3
0 = no change
Daylight Hours The length of time (hours) by which the time is changed for daylight saving. When the ‘DST Source’ parameter is set to
1 = 1 hour 0 I G
Change ‘1’ (Auto) read only and calculated using the ‘Time zone’ parameter.
2 = 2 hours
3 = 3 hours
0 or 1
Daylight
Indicates whether the IQ4’s time has been adjusted for daylight saving. 1 = Time 0 O F
Savings Applied
adjusted
Daylight
Savings Offset The length of time (minutes) by which time is changed for daylight saving 0 to 240 0 O V
(Mins)
0 to 31
Daylight Start The day of the month when daylight saving starts. When the ‘DST Source’ parameter is set to ‘1’ (Auto) read only and
0 = No daylight 0 I S
Day calculated using the ‘Time zone’ parameter.
saving
Daylight Start The month when daylight starts. When the ‘DST Source’ parameter is set to ‘1’ (Auto) read only and calculated using the
1 to 12 1 I O
Month ‘Time zone’ parameter.
Determines whether the IQ4 calculates daylight saving based on the value of the ‘Time zone’ parameter (Auto) or uses 0 or 1
‘Daylight Start Day’, ‘Daylight Start Month’, ‘Daylight Stop Day’, and ‘Daylight Stop Month’ parameters to determine 0 = Manual
DST Source 0 N h
when daylight saving starts and stops, and the ‘Daylight Hours Change’ parameter to determine the amount the time Entry
changes (Manual). 1= Auto
Hours The hours part of the current time. 0 to 23 0 O H
Any ASCII
Label 30-character user-friendly label for the module. character except Blank N $
\/(){};,:
Minutes The minutes part of the current time. 0 to 59 0 O N
Minutes Past
The number of minutes elapsed since midnight. 0 to 1439 0 O m
Midnight
Minute Pulse The pulse generated every minute. 0 or 1 0 O k
1 to 12
Month The current month. 0 O M
1= January
Monthly Pulse The pulse generated every month. 0 or 1 0 O d
Page Specifies the strategy page containing the module. 0 to 255 0 N p
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Seconds The seconds part of the current time. 0 to 59 0 O C
The pulse generated every second.
Second Pulse 0 or 1 0 O j
Note: The 1 second pulse (second pulse) should only be connected to event driven modules).
Time Server IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The IP address or hostname of the NTP server. Read only when the ‘Time Server Address Source’ Valid IP address
0.0.0.0 N g
Address parameter is ‘1’. or hostname
0 or 1
Time Server IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Only available if the ‘Time source’ parameter is set to ‘1’ (NTP). Specifies whether the address of
1 = DHCP 0 N f
Address Source the NTP server is to be obtained from the DHCP server, or entered manually in the ‘Time Server Address’ parameter.
0 = Manual
0, 1
Time Source IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The source of the IQ4s time. Can be set to use the IQ4’s RTC (internal) or an NTP server (NTP) 0 = Internal 0 N I
1 = NTP
0 or 1
Time Master Enables/disables the timemaster function 1 = Enabled 0 N A
0 = Disabled
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. The time zone in which the IQ4 is located. Used to determine the ‘Daylight Start Day’, ‘Daylight
Start Month’, ‘Daylight Stop Day’, ‘Daylight Stop Month’ and ‘Daylight Hours Change’ parameters when the ‘DST List of time Not
Time zone N Z
Source’ parameter is set to ‘1’ (Auto), and the ‘UTC Offset (Mins)’ parameter. Must be specified if an NTP server is to be zones used
used.
UTC Offset
The length of time (minutes) the IQ4’s local Time zone time differs from the UTC time -780 to + 780 0 N U
(Mins)
Weekly Pulse The pulse generated every week. 0 or 1 0 O u
1 to 7
Weekday The current day of the week. 1 O W
1 = Monday
X Co-ordinate Specifies the horizontal position of the module on a strategy page. 0 to 255 0 N x
Y Co-ordinate Specifies the vertical position of the module on a strategy page. 0 to 255 0 N y
Year The last two digits of the current year. 0 to 99 0 O Y
Yearly Pulse The pulse generated every year. 0 or 1 0 O z
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
BACnet only
String representing a list of object property references. - - - R
references
2
Data Type Specifies the type of Time Schedule module. 2 N Y
2 = Analogue
Default Value The value output when the module is in the Null’ state. Full analogue 0 N D
Edit Timeout Internal use only - - N d
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
End Day The day of the month used for the end of the effective period. 0 N e
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
End Month The month of the year used for the end of the effective period. 0 = Unspecified 0 N n
1 to 12 = Day of month
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, to 9999
End Year The year used for the end of the effective period. 0 N t
0 = Unspecified
Exceptions 1 Not Used. 0 0 N -
Exceptions List of Exceptions Index 1 to no max - N C
references List of object property references. - - - -
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31.
Start Day The day of the month used for the beginning of the effective period. 0 N a
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
Start Month The month of the year used for the beginning of the effective period. 0 = Unspecified 0 N m
1 to 12 = Day of month
0 to 9999
Start Year The year used for the beginning of the effective period. 0 N s
0 = Unspecified
User Level The level of the PIN required by the user to make changes to the occupation times. 0 to 100 0 N P
0 or 1
Value The status of the module. 0 = Unoccupied 0 O V
1 = Occupied
Week Day
The schedule, an array of 7 day profiles. Index 1 to 7 0 N W
Profiles
A1.26.1.2 Day of Week Sub-Module Parameters
The normal week consists of seven individual Day of week sub-modules which are identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(W<n>)
Where Z<n> specifies the Time Schedule module and W<n> specifies the day of the week sub-module (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 - Monday = 1). E.g. Z2(W1(*)) would read all the parameters
from Time Schedule module 2’s Monday’s day of the week sub-module.
A1.26.1.3 Day of Week TimeValue Sub-Module Parameters
Each of the Day of week sub-module contains up to 20 Day of Week TimeValue sub-modules that define a time and the Time Schedule’s occupation status at that time which are
identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(W<n>(P<n>))
Where Z<n>W<n> specifies the Time Schedule module, and Day of week sub-module, and P<n> specifies the Day of Week TimeValue sub-module. E.g. Z2(W1(P1(*)) would read all
the parameters from the first Day of Week TimeValue sub-module from Time Schedule module 2’s Monday’s day of the week sub-module.
Day of Week TimeValue sub-module have the following parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time The time of the change. 00.00 to 24.00 00.00 N T
2
Type The data type of the value 2 N Y
2 = Analogue
Value The occupation state for the change time. Full analogue 0 N V
A1.26.1.4 Exception Sub-Module Parameters
Each Time Schedule module can contain up to 50 Exception sub-modules that define when the IQ4 will operate different occupation times to those defined by the normal week which
are identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(C<n>)
Where Z<n> specifies the Time Schedule module and C<n> specifies the Exception sub-module. E.g. Z2(C1(*)) would read all the parameters from Time Schedule module 2 first
Exception sub-module.
Exception sub-modules also include the following parameter common to most modules: ‘Label’, plus the following parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
BACnet only
v3.50 or greater. String representing a list of object property references. - - - R
references
0
Data Type Specifies the type of Time Schedule module. 0 N Y
0 = Digital
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Default Value v3.50 or greater. The value output when the module is in the Null’ state. 0 = OFF 0 N D
1 = ON
Edit Timeout v3.50 or greater. Internal use only - - N d
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
End Day v3.50 or greater. The day of the month used for the end of the effective period. 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 0 N e
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
End Month v3.50 or greater. The month of the year used for the end of the effective period. 0 = Unspecified 0 N n
1 to 12 = Day of month
0, to 9999
End Year v3.50 or greater. The year used for the end of the effective period. 0 N t
0 = Unspecified
Exceptions 1 Not Used. 0 0 N -
Exceptions List of Exceptions Index 1 to no max - N C
references v3.50 or greater. List of object property references. - - - -
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
v3.50 or greater. The day of the month used for the beginning of the effective
Start Day 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31. 0 N a
period.
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
v3.50 or greater. The month of the year used for the beginning of the effective
Start Month 0 = Unspecified 0 N m
period.
1 to 12 = Day of month
0 to 9999
Start Year v3.50 or greater. The year used for the beginning of the effective period. 0 N s
0 = Unspecified
The level of the PIN required by the user to make changes to the occupation
User Level 0 to 100 0 N P
times.
0 or 1
Value The status of the module. 0 = Unoccupied 0 O V
1 = Occupied
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Week Day
The schedule, an array of 7 day profiles. Index 1 to 7 0 N W
Profiles
A1.26.2.2 Day of Week Sub-Module Parameters
The normal week consists of seven individual Day of week sub-modules which are identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(W<n>)
Where Z<n> specifies the Time Schedule module and W<n> specifies the day of the week sub-module (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 - Monday = 1). E.g. Z2(W1(*)) would read all the parameters
from Time Schedule module 2’s Monday’s day of the week sub-module.
A1.26.2.3 Day of Week TimeValue Sub-Module Parameters
Each of the Day of week sub-module contains up to 20 Day of Week TimeValue sub-modules that define a time and the Time Schedule’s occupation status at that time which are
identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(W<n>(P<n>))
Where Z<n>W<n> specifies the Time Schedule module, and Day of week sub-module, and P<n> specifies the Day of Week TimeValue sub-module. E.g. Z2(W1(P1(*)) would read all
the parameters from the first Day of Week TimeValue sub-module from Time Schedule module 2’s Monday’s day of the week sub-module.
Day of Week TimeValue sub-module have the following parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
BACnet only
String representing a list of object property references. - - - R
references
1
Data Type Specifies the type of Time Schedule module. 1 N Y
1 = Multistate
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Default Value The value output when the module is in the Null’ state. Multistate (Constrained by the ‘States Category module’ parameter). 1 N D
Edit Timeout Internal use only - - N d
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
End Day The day of the month used for the end of the effective period. 0 N e
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
End Month The month of the year used for the end of the effective period. 0 = Unspecified 0 N n
1 to 12 = Day of month
0, to 9999
End Year The year used for the end of the effective period. 0 N t
0 = Unspecified
Exceptions 1 Not Used. 0 0 N -
Exceptions List of Exceptions Index 1 to no max - N C
references List of object property references. - - - -
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
The day of the month used for the beginning of the effective 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31.
Start Day 0 N a
period. 0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
The month of the year used for the beginning of the effective
Start Month 0 = Unspecified 0 N m
period.
1 to 12 = Day of month
0 to 9999
Start Year The year used for the beginning of the effective period. 0 N s
0 = Unspecified
States Category The States Category module used to provide the available
Valid States Category module instance number. 0 N g
module states for multistate values.
The level of the PIN required by the user to make changes to
User Level 0 to 100 0 N P
the occupation times.
0 or 1
Value The status of the module. 0 = Unoccupied 0 O V
1 = Occupied
Week Day Profiles The schedule, an array of 7 day profiles. Index 1 to 7 0 N W
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3
The use of the exception and the ‘Use’ parameter is used instead. If set to ‘0’ 0 = Legacy Configuration
BACnet Use Legacy Configuration the ‘Use’ parameter will be used to specify the exception’ 1 = Date or date pattern 0 N u
use. 2 = Range of dates
3 = Week and Day
Calendar
The Calendar module that specifies the days the exception applies to. Valid Calendar module instance number. 0 N C
Reference
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
The day of the week when the exception will apply. When set to ‘Unspecified’
Day of Week 0 = Unspecified - N A
any day is used. Only available when ‘Use’ is set to ‘Week and Day’.
1 to 7 = Day of week (1 = Monday)
Pre v3.50
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
1 to 31 = Day of month
End Day The day of the month from which the exception stops. v3.50 or greater 1 N E
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
1 to 31 = Day of month
0 = Unspecified
Pre v3.50
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
End Month The month in which the exception stops. v3.50 or greater 1 N T
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
0 = Unspecified
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
The year in which the exception stops. When set to ‘Unspecified’ any year is used. 0 to 9999
End Year 1 N R
Only available when ‘Use’ is set to ‘Range of Dates’. 0 = Unspecified
IQ4 v2.0 or greater
1 to 16
The priority of the exception. In case of exception overlap, the exception with 16 = Highest priority
Priority 1 N P
highest priority level will be used. Pre IQ4 v2.0
1 to 6
6 = Highest priority
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Pre v3.50
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
1 to 31 = Day of month
v3.50 or greater
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
Start Day The day of the month from which the exception is to apply. 1 N S
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34.
0 = Unspecified
1 to 31 = Day of month
32 = Last day of month
33 = Every odd day
34 = Every even day
Pre v3.50
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12.
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
v3.50 or greater
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14.
Start Month The month from which the exception is to apply. 0 = Unspecified 1 N O
1 to 12 = Month of year (1 = January)
13 = Every odd month (January, March, May, July,
September, November)
14 = Every even month (February, April, June, August,
October, December.
0 to 9999
Start Year The year when the exception starts. When set to ‘Unspecified’ any year is used. - N Y
0 = Unspecified
0, 1, 2
The use of the exception. This parameter is only used when the ‘BACnet Use’ 0 = next (i.e. once only)
Use 0 N U
parameter is set to ‘0’ (Legacy Configuration). 1 = every (yearly)
2 = free (not used)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
0 = Unspecified
1 = First
Week of The week of the month when the exception will apply. When set to ‘Unspecified’ 2 = Second
- N W
Month any week is used. Only available when ‘Use’ is set to ‘Week and Day’. 3 = Third
4 = Forth
5 = Fifth
6 = Last
A1.26.3.5 Exception TimeValue Sub-Module Parameters
Each of the Exception sub-modules contains up to 20 Exception TimeValue sub-modules that define a time and the Time Schedule module’s occupation status at that time which are
identified in text comms as:
Z<n>(C<n>(D1(P<n>)))
Where Z<n>W<n> specifies the Time Schedule module, and Exception sub-module, and D1(P<n> specifies the Exception TimeValue sub-module. E.g. Z2(C2(D1(P1(*)))) would read
all the parameters from the first TimeValue sub-module of the second Exception sub-module.
Exception TimeValue sub-modules have the following parameters:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies the URL of the page that is displayed when the user logs in from a web browser. This link can be to a page
of information held within the controller, or a web site that is not the IQ.
IQSET provides an easy way to specify the required URL, however the required format is described below.
If linking to a Graphical Display Page, the URL should be in the format below:
GraphIQs/<Directory Module Structure>/index.htm
Where <Directory Module Structure> is the directory module structure of the Display module that defines the page.
If linking to a Modules List Page, the URL should be in the format below:
<Module Type>.htm
Where <Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details
Home Page Valid URL Blank N H
of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual.
E.g. type S.htm to display the sensor module list page.
If linking to a Modules Details Page, the URL should be in the format below:
<Module Type><Module Number>.htm
Where <Module Type> specifies the type of module using its module identifier (e.g. S specifies sensor). For details
of the module identifiers see the appropriate module section of this manual.
<Module Number> specifies the number of the module.
E.g. to display the module details page for sensor 3 type S3.
If linking to web sites, enter the website’s URL. E.g. http://www.trendcontrols.com
0 or 1
Guest User IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Specifies that the user is the Guest user. 1 = User is the Guest 0 N g
user
Level The user level associated with the user module. 0 to 100 100 N L
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Logged On Indicates whether user is currently logged in. 0 = Not logged on 0 O O
1 = Logged on
Any ASCII character
Password The 30-character password that must be entered by the user when logging in from a web browser. Blank N W
except \/(){};,:
The 4-digit number that must be entered by the user to log on from a display, or must be sent by a tool /supervisor
Pin 0000 to 9999 9999 N P
to authorise a change.
Timeout The length of time in minutes after which the user will be automatically logged off. 1 to 480 1 N T
Any ASCII character
User Name 30-character user-name. Blank N $
except \/(){};,:
View Alarms Specifies if the user can access alarm information when accessing the controller from a web browser. 0 or 1 1 N V
View GraphIQs
Specifies where the user can access graphical display pages when accessing the controller from a web browser. 0 or 1 1 N G
Pages
View Modules Specifies where the user can access module information when accessing the controller from a web browser. 0 or 1 1 N M
View Navigator Specifies where the user can access the navigator when accessing the controller’s graphical display pages. 0 or 1 1 N N
View Time
Specifies where the user can access time schedule information when accessing the controller from a web browser. 0 or 1 1 N Z
Schedules
IQ4 v3.30 or greater. Specifies whether the user only able to access the controllers web pages. When selected, the 0 or 1
Web Use Only 0 N w
user will not be able to authorise changes using text communications. 1 = Web use only
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A1.27.2 IQ4 Type 1 CNC User Modules
Module Identifier U
Size in brIQs 12
Default Overview Parameters $, O
v3.60 or greater. Type 1 CNC User modules contain the usernames and passwords that enable a client that supports secure communications to a vCNC operating in 'Secure SHH' mode
to connect to the vCNC. Each module has a password, and username which must be provided by a client to authorise the secure connection to the vCNC.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Status The connection status of the vCNC. 0 = Not connected 0 O S
1 = Connected
For more details of the module see the IQ4 Configuration Reference Manual (TE201263).
A2 IQECO Modules
This section describes in detail all the configuration parameters for each IQECO module. For further information, see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
IQECO Address Modules
IQECO Alarm Destination Modules
IQECO Alarm Group Modules
IQECO Alarm Route Modules
IQECO Directory Modules
IQECO Display Modules
IQECO Driver Modules
IQECO Function Modules
IQECO IC Comms Modules
IQECO Input Modules
IQECO Interface Modules
IQECO I/O Modules
IQECO Logic Modules
IQECO Loop Modules
IQECO Network Modules
IQECO NTD Modules
IQECO Sensor Type Modules
IQECO Synchronised Plot Modules
IQECO Time Modules
IQECO User Modules
Throughout this section module parameters will be referenced by their letter the E parameter would be referenced as E. The value of a module’s parameter is referenced by the parameter
letter in brackets e.g. (E) refers to the actual Value of the E parameter.
For each module, the module identifier is listed which should be used when accessing the module with text comms. There is also a description of how the module works and a table
listing all the parameters associated with it, and a description of each parameter.
The Type column of the tables in this section indicates how the parameter is defined.
Text Description
Const A module parameter that has no connection and therefore cannot be changed by running strategy, but may be changed by text comms. Can be read/write, or read only.
Source A module input that can be connected to other modules or output channels. Read/write.
Output A module output that can be connected. Read/write.
Status A module output that has no connection. Read only.
When configuring an IQECO controller only the modules used in the strategy are added to the controller’s memory. This enables the number of each type of module to be adjusted to
suit the requirements of the strategy, so long as the maximum number of modules (300) and the memory available for modules is not exceeded.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 30-characters. Any ASCII
Label User-friendly label for the module. Blank Const $
character except \/(){};,:
Sequence Step The sequence step at which the module is serviced. 0 to 200 0 Const @
Note: Although these parameters are common they may not all exist in all modules.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to maximum for Set by
Memory Used The amount of memory used for the current strategy Status t
controller type controller
Number of
Specifies the number of modules in the strategy. 0 to 300 0 Const >
Modules
0 or 1
Operation Status Indicates the status of the strategy. 0 = Not running 1 Const #
1 = Normal
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Determines whether the controller manages triac outputs to prevent large electrical 0 or 1
Power Managed demands on the controller. When enabled the controller powers up the triac outputs in turn to reduce the 0 = Disabled 0 Const W
risk of overloading the controller. 1 = Enabled
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Determines the mode used to determine when the raise/lower drivers calculate the
actual location of the valve.
Mode Description
Synchronisation occurs when the `Position Synchronisation` parameter in the
Disabled
raise/lower driver module is set to 1.
Synchronisation occurs when the controller is switched on, or when a soft reset
Automatic
occurs, or at midnight, for all raise/lower driver modules in the controller.
Synchronisation occurs when the controller is switched on, or when a soft reset
occurs, or at midnight plus a period calculated using the formula below:
0 to 2
Δt = Address MOD 64 x 10.5 + 0.5 s
0 = Disabled
Raise/Lower Automatic Where address MOD 64 is the remainder after integral division by 64 of the
1 = Automatic 0 Const Z
Sync mode Address Staggered controller's address. This gives a delay of between 0 seconds to 11 minutes 25.5
2 = Automatic
seconds.
Address Staggered
This ensures that all IQECO controllers in a system do not operate their valves and
dampers simultaneously.
The default setting is 'Disabled pa' this causes different behaviour to IQECO v1.0 and IQL controllers. To
ensure similar behaviour this parameter should be set as below:
IQECO 31 – Automatic
IQECO 35 – Automatic
IQECO 38 – Automatic
IQECO 39 – Automatic
IQECO VAV P – Automatic Addressed Staggered
IQECO VAV P A – Automatic Addressed Staggered
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Read only. The controller's unique serial number, also shown on the product label. Set up during Any ASCII character
Serial Number - Const M
manufacture, and used to identify the controller in a service pin message. except \/(){};,:
Used to generate a service pin message. The IQECO will reset the parameter back to '0' after sending the 0 or 1
Service Pin service pin message. The service pin message can also be initiated by pressing the service pin button on 1 generates service 0 Const !
the IQECO. pin
Any ASCII character
Strategy Name 30-character name of the strategy. Blank Const H
except \/(){};,:
Strategy
Read only. The revision of the strategy. -1020 to +1020 - Const d
Revision
0,4 to 119 excluding
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The network address of the device connected to the network via the controller's 10
Supervisor Port 0 Const U
engineering port. 0 = Local device
only
Any ASCII character
Type Name The controller hardware type e.g. (IQECOVAV/../PA/, IQECOVAV/../P, or IQECO39. Fixed Const
except \/(){};,:
Version 25-character string containing controller type, firmware issue, and date Fixed - Const C
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, 4 to 119 excluding
Address Specifies the network address of the device to which alarms are sent. 10. 0 Const A
0 = Not used
Additional information about the module. If this parameter is not set up, IQSET will automatically set it to the
Any ASCII character
Details label. Blank Const -
except \/(){};,:
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only.
0 or 1
Indicates when the module is unable to reach the specified destination. It can be used to provide an input to
Failed 0 = OK 0 Output F
other modules by linking it to the required modules.
1 = Failed
The priority level below which alarms are held. If an alarm is received above this level it, and all alarms will be
Hold Priority sent. The destination will stay open to low priority alarms for 5 seconds after the last alarm is sent. 0 to 255 0 Const/Source H
Note: Setting this to a constant prevents it being link to another module to allow linking again set to 0.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
0 = Clear alarms sent
Inhibit Clear Specifies whether the destination will send clear alarms. 0 Const C
1 = Clear alarms not
sent
0, 1, 4 to 119 excluding
Lan Specifies the LAN number of the device to which alarms are sent. 10. 0 Const N
0 = Local LAN
1 or 2
Message
The format of the alarm message. 1 = Text 0 Const M
Format
2 = Attribute
Retry The time in minutes between attempts to send the message. It should be set to 0 for autodialling to allow
0 to 32767 0 Const I
Interval continual retries.
Source The alarm route module(s) from which the destination accepts alarm. Route Modules only - Source S
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Any ASCII
Additional information about the module. If this parameter is not set up, IQSET will automatically set it to the label.
Details character except Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only.
\/(){};,:
0 to 255
(Hold)
The priority of the alarm in the group. 255 = Highest 0 Source/Const P
Priority
priority
Indicates whether an alarm assigned to that module has occurred. The value is set to 1 for a single cycle of the sequence
0 or 1
table when an alarm allocated to the group occurs after that it is reset to 0. If alarms are occurring faster than once per
New Alarm 1 = Alarm 0 Output N
sequence cycle, the value will be set to 1 until one sequence cycle after the last alarm occurred It can be used to provide
0 = No alarm
an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.
Route modules
Output The alarm route module(s) used to route alarms in the group. - Output O
only
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm
The alarm group module(s) for which it is to route alarms. Alarm Group modules only Blank Input G
Group
Destination The alarm destination module(s) to which the module will send alarms providing the enable input is set. Destination modules only Blank Output D
0 or 1
Enable Enables/Disables the route. 0 = Disabled 1 Const/Source E
1 = Enabled
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current priority level of the output being used by the driver. Normal strategy operation
Active priority writes to priority level 14. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the driver and the driver
0 to 16 14 Output u
level reports overridden in its Trend status (But not on BACnet). IC comms write to priority level 9, manual override
writes to level 8. '0' means the source is unconnected and there is no other active input to the array.
Any ASCII
Additional information about the driver.
Details character except - Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
\/(){};,:
in-phase 0 to 32
The output channel to be used by the driver. 0 Const L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase
The value of the driver's in-phase output channel. -1020 to +1020 0 Output l
Output
0 or 1
Override IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the output of the module is set to the value specified by the 'Override
1 = Enabled 0 Const Source ^
Output Value' parameter.
0 = Disabled
Override IQECO v2.0 or greater. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set
-1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source v
Status/Value to 1.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Source The value input to the driver. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source S
20 20
Value The value input into the driver algorithm. -10 to +10 0 Status V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.8.2 IQECO Digital Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
The Digital Driver module provides an ON/OFF type output controlled by the state of a digital bit. It has a single digital source S and provides a single digital output l with an optional
antiphase output a. The state of l is determined directly by the state of S.
For IQECO v2.0 or greater the output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A2.8.2.1 IQECO Digital Driver Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', and 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current priority level of the output being used by the driver. Normal strategy operation
Active priority writes to priority level 14. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the driver and the driver
0 to 16 14 Output u
level reports overridden in its Trend status (But not on BACnet). IC comms write to priority level 9, manual override
writes to level 8. '0' means the source is unconnected and there is no other active input to the array.
Any ASCII
Additional information about the driver.
Details character except - Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
\/(){};,:
in-phase 0 to 32
The output channel to be used by the driver. 0 Const L
Channel 0=Disabled
in-phase
The output value of the driver. 0 or 1 0 Output l
Output
0 or 1
Override IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the output of the module is set to the value specified by the Override
1 = Enabled 0 Const/Source ^
Output Value parameter.
0 = Disabled
Override IQECO v2.0 or greater. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set
0 or 1 0 Const/Source v
Status/Value to 1.
Source The value input to the driver. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source S
20 20
Value The value input into the driver algorithm. -10 to +10 0 Status V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.8.3 IQECO Multi Stage Digital Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
Only available in IQECO controllers with v2.0 firmware or greater.
Multi Stage Digital Driver modules enable the controller to sequence multiple outputs and is ideal for controlling fan speed relays or boilers. They switch several outputs ON and OFF
as the input value (Source (S)) changes between stages. The driver changes between stages as the input value passes through each integer up to the maximum number of stages determined
by the Number of Stages parameter depending on the selected switching type.
Note: The driver requires consecutive outputs channels e.g. for 3 stages it will automatically take 3 consecutive inputs station from the output specified by the 'in-phase Channel'
parameter.
The way in which the outputs are turned ON/OFF is determined by the Switching Type parameter which can be set to one of 3 modes:
Sequenced
Cascaded
Binary
Sequenced
In sequence mode, only one output is ever enabled. As the Source (S) increases, or decreases, the output turns OFF before the next output turns ON. There is a delay of 300ms when
switching between stages to ensure that only one relay is active at a time.
The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON
>=3<4 3 ON
>=4<5 4 ON
>=5<6 5 ON
>=6<7 6 ON
>=7<8 7 ON
>=8 8 ON
The first output turned ON (Lead Output) can be specified using the Lead Output parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned on if the Lead Output parameter is set
to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON
>=3<4 3 ON
>=4<5 4 ON
>=5<6 5 ON
>=6<7 6 ON
>=7<8 7 ON
>=8 8 ON
The number of stages can be specified (maximum of 8) using the Number of Stages parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases when
the Number of Stages parameter is set to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON
>=3 3 ON
The Lead Output and Number of Stages parameters can be used together to provide flexibility in how the outputs are turned ON and OFF. The table below shows how the outputs are
turned ON as the source (S) increases when the Number of Stages parameter is set to '5' and the Lead Output is parameter is set to 4.
The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON ON
>=3<4 3 ON ON ON
>=4<5 4 ON ON ON ON
>=5<6 5 ON ON ON ON ON
>=6<7 6 ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=7<8 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=8 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The first output turned ON (Lead Output) can be specified using the Lead Output parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned on if the Lead Output parameter is set
to '3'.
Source Value Value OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0
>=1<2 1 ON
>=2<3 2 ON ON
>=3<4 3 ON ON ON
>=4<5 4 ON ON ON ON
>=5<6 5 ON ON ON ON ON
>=6<7 6 ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=7<8 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
>=8 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The number of stages can be specified (maximum of 8) using the Number of Stages parameter. The table below shows how the outputs are turned ON as the source (S) increases when
the Number of Stages parameter is set to '3'.
The Lead Output and Number of Stages parameters can be used together to provide flexibility in how the outputs are turned ON and OFF. The table below shows how the outputs are
turned ON as the source (S) increases when the Number of Stages parameter is set to '5' and the Lead Output is parameter is set to 4.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
<0 0 00000000
>=1<2 1 00000001 ON
>=2<3 2 00000010 ON
>=3<4 3 00000011 ON ON
>=4<5 4 00000100 ON
>=5<6 5 00000101 ON ON
>=6<7 6 00000110 ON ON
>=7<8 7 00000111 ON ON ON
>=8<9 8 00001000 ON
As the value increases the outputs will be turned ON accordingly. E.g. if the source value is 230 the bit array would be '11100110' and the outputs would be turned ON as shown.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=230<231 230 11100110 ON ON ON ON ON
The table below shows some more examples of which outputs are turned on for a specific value.
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=45<45 45 00101101 ON ON ON ON
Source Value Value Bit Array OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
>=67<68 67 01000011 ON ON ON
>=85<86 85 01010101 ON ON ON ON
>=101<102 101 01100101 ON ON ON ON
>=134<135 134 10000110 ON ON ON
>=158<159 158 10011110 ON ON ON ON ON
>=179<180 179 10110011 ON ON ON ON ON
>=200<201 200 11001000 ON ON ON
>=255 255 11111111 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
The output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A2.8.3.1 IQECO Multi Stage Digital Driver Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', and 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The current priority level of the output being used by the driver. Normal strategy operation writes to priority
Active priority level 14. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the driver and the driver reports
0 to 16 14 Output u
level overridden in its Trend status (But not on BACnet). IC comms write to priority level 9, manual override writes
to level 8. '0' means the source is unconnected and there is no other active input to the array.
Additional information about the driver. Any ASCII character
Details - Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
The output channel to be used by the driver for the first output stage. The channels for other stages are
in-phase automatically allocated the adjacent channels until each stage has a channel. 0 to 32
0 Const L
Channel Note: The driver requires consecutive outputs channels e.g. for 3 stages will automatically take 3 consecutive 0=Disabled
inputs station from the output specified by the 'in-phase Channel' parameter.
in-phase
The output value of the driver. ON ('1') when any stage is ON. 0 or 1 0 Output l
Output
Lead Output Specifies the output that is turned on at stage 1. Not supported if 'Switching Type' is binary. 1 to 8 1 Const D
Number of
The number of output stages or switching levels for the module. 0 to 8 0 Const R
Stages
The state parameter formatted as a bit string.
000000000 to
Output Status E.g. if stages 2 and 4 were ON it would be '00001010'. The bit string is read from right to left with the bit 00000000 Output F
11111111
indicating the status of stage 1 on the right. '1' indicates that a stage is on.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Override
Specifies whether the output of the module is set to the value specified by the 'Override Value' parameter. 1 = Enabled 0 Const/Source ^
Output
0 = Disabled
Override
The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is set to 1. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source v
Status/Value
Source The value input to the driver. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source S
Indicates the status of the driver's output. It is an analogue value whose binary equivalent indicates the output
channels that are ON. '0' = OFF, '1' = ON. All energised outputs are added to produce an analogue value that
can be decoded to indicate which outputs are ON.
State 0 to 255 0 Output B
E.g. if stages 2 and 4 are energised the value would be '10' which could be decoded to a bit string of '00001010'.
The bit string is read from right to left with the bit indicating the status of stage 1 on the right. '1' indicates that
a stage is ON.
Specifies the way in which the outputs are turned ON/OFF. It can be set to one of 3 modes: 0, 1, 2
Switching Sequenced (One output is turned ON at a time in sequence.) 0 = 'Sequenced', 1 =
0 Const P
Type Cascaded (Outputs turned on in sequence leaving previous outputs ON (each step adds to the next).) 'Cascade', and 3 =
Binary (The input value is decoded to switch any combination of outputs.) 'Binary'
Value The value input into the driver algorithm. Not available in IQSET. -1020 to +1020 0 Status V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.8.4 IQECO Raise/Lower End Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
The Raise/Lower End Driver module is designed to drive a split-phase motor. It should be used for actuators with reversible action motors without any built-in positioning or where
there are no built-in limit switches, or clutches.
It provides either two digital outputs (L and A), or a single analogue output from a single analogue input S. Setting (A) to 0, selects a single analogue output.
When the driver is operating with two digital outputs, (L) will be set to 1 for period if (S) is greater than the valve position, and (A) will be set to 1 for a period if (S) is less than the
valve position. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve position.
When operating with a single analogue output, the value of the output will be set to the appropriate value to drive the associated relay module. If (S) is greater than the valve position,
the output value will be set to 10 V to cause the associated relay module to raise for a period. If (S) is less than the valve position the output value will be set to 4 V cause the associated
relay module to lower for a period. This period is calculated as a percentage of the full-scale drive time. The actual percentage is determined by the difference between (S) and the valve
position. If (S) is equal to the valve position, the output value is set to 7 V. If (S) is negative the output value will be set to 0 V.
The module needs to know the position of the valve. This is done either by estimating the position, by using the full-scale drive time and the sum of the amounts of time that the valve
has been driven in each direction. (E.g. If the full-scale drive time is 10 s and the valve has been driven open from the closed position for 8s and then driven closed for 3s making a total
of 5s in the open direction (8-3). The estimated value position would be 50% open because the value has been driven open for half the full-scale drive time). The valve position is verified
when the value is required to be fully closed or fully open (0% or 100) by additionally driving for the full-scale drive time in the required direction. This ensures that the valve has
reached the end stop.
Driving the valve for additional time when it is to be set to fully open or fully closed the controller will force the driver to drive the actuator closed for twice the full-scale drive time.
For v1.0 IQECO controllers this occurs at midnight. For IQECO v2.0 or greater the controllers the exact time this is determined by the 'Raise/Lower Sync mode' parameter in the address
module see the table below for details.
Mode Description
Disabled Synchronisation occurs when the `Position Synchronisation` parameter in the raise/lower driver module is set to 1.
Automatic Synchronisation occurs when the controller is switched on, or when a soft reset occurs, or at midnight, for all raise/lower driver modules in the controller.
Synchronisation occurs when the controller is switched on, or when a soft reset occurs, or at midnight plus a period calculated as per the formula below:
Δt = Address MOD 64 x 10.5 + 0.5 s
Automatic Address
Where address MOD 64 is the remainder after integral division by 64 of the controller's address. This gives a delay of between 0 seconds to 11 minutes
Staggered
25.5 seconds.
This ensures that all IQECO controllers in a system do not operate their valves and dampers simultaneously.
For IQECO v2.0 or greater the output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
A2.8.4.1 IQECO Raise/Lower End Driver Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters that are common to most modules: 'Label', and 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current priority level of the output being used by the driver. Normal strategy
Active priority operation writes to priority level 14. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet, this controls the driver and
0 to 16 14 Output u
level the driver reports overridden in its Trend status (But not on BACnet). IC comms write to priority level 9, manual
override writes to level 8. '0' means the source is unconnected and there is no other active input to the array.
Anti-phase 0 to 32
Specifies the output channel to be used for the antiphase output channel (if used). 0 Const A
Channel 0=Disabled
Anti-phase
The antiphase output value of the driver. 0 or 1 0 Output a
Output
Any ASCII
Additional information about the driver.
Details character except - Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
\/(){};,:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The current position of the actuator. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the
Drive Position 0 to 100 0 Output P
required modules.
full-scale Drive The time (in seconds) taken for the actuator to move from one end stop to the other. 20 to 6500 90 Const/Source D
0 to 32
in-phase Channel The output channel to be used by the driver. 0 Const L
0=Disabled
in-phase Output The output value of the driver. 0 or 1 0 Output l
0 or 1
Invert Specifies whether the output of the driver is inverted. 1=Inverted 0 Const/Source I
0=Normal
0 or 1
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the output of the module is set to the value specified by the 'Override
Override Output 1 = Enabled 0 Const/Source ^
Value' parameter.
0 = Disabled
Override IQECO v2.0 or greater. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output parameter is
-1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source v
Status/Value set to 1.
IQECO v2.0 or greater. When enabled the driver will drive the actuator closed for 1.5 times the full-scale drive 0 or 1
Position
time. This enables the actual actuator position to be re-calibrated regularly to ensure correct control. Once the 0 = Disabled 0 Source Z
Synchronisation
synchronisation is complete the driver will return to the required control position. 1 = Enabled
0, 1, or 2
State The current state of the raise/lower module outputs. 0 = Static, 1 = 0 Status B
Raise, 2 = Lower
Source The value input to the driver. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source S
Value The value input into the driver algorithm. -1020 to +1020 0 Status V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.8.5 IQECO Time Proportional Driver Modules
Module Identifier D
The Time Proportional Driver module provides an output whose mark-space ratio is dependent on the input level. It has an analogue source S and provides a single digital output L. The
state of L is determined by the value of S, and the period time. If (S) is greater than 0, (L) will be set to 1 for a length of time. This length of time is calculated as a percentage of the
period time determined by the value of S.
For IQECO v2.0 or greater the output of the module can be overridden to the value specified by the Override Status/Value parameter by setting the Override Output parameter to '1'.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current priority level of the output being used by the driver. Normal
strategy operation writes to priority level 14. If a higher priority value comes in from BACnet,
Active priority level this controls the driver and the driver reports overridden in its Trend status (But not on BACnet). 0 to 16 14 Output u
IC comms write to priority level 9, manual override writes to level 8. '0' means the source is
unconnected and there is no other active input to the array.
Any ASCII
Additional information about the driver.
Details character except - Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
\/(){};,:
0 to 32
in-phase Channel The output channel to be used by the driver. 0 Const L
0=Disabled
in-phase Output The output value of the driver. 0 or 1 0 Output l
0 or 1
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the output of the module is set to the value specified
Override Output 1 = Enabled 0 Const/Source ^
by the Override Value parameter.
0 = Disabled
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The value to which the output of the module is set if the Override Output
Override Status/Value -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source v
parameter is set to 1.
The length of time (in seconds) for which the output is on when the source of the module is at
Period 0 to 6500 0 Const/Source P
100%.
Source The value input to the driver. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source S
20 20
Value The value input into the driver algorithm. -10 to +10 0 Status V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Bit
h 1
g 1
f 1
e 1
d 1
c 1
b 1
Bit
a 1
G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter out of the range 1 to 8 all the output bits are set. to 0.
Cascade
Cascade mode sets the output bits as the input value increases.
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter in the range 1 to 8 the output bits are set. as below
Bit
h 1
g 1 1
f 1 1 1
e 1 1 1 1
d 1 1 1 1 1
c 1 1 1 1 1 1
b 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the value of the ‘Source G’ parameter out of the range 1 to 8 all the output bits are set. to 0.
A2.9.2.1 IQECO Analogue to Digital Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bit 1 Bit 1 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'a'. 0 or 1 0 Output a
Bit 2 Bit 2 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'b'. 0 or 1 0 Output b
Bit 3 Bit 3 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'c'. 0 or 1 0 Output c
Bit 4 Bit 4 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'd'. 0 or 1 0 Output d
Bit 5 Bit 5 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'e'. 0 or 1 0 Output e
Bit 6 Bit 6 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'f'. 0 or 1 0 Output f
Bit 7 Bit 7 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'g'. 0 or 1 0 Output g
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bit 8 Bit 8 of the module's output byte. Available in IQSET as a connectable output labelled 'h'. 0 or 1 0 Output h
0, 1, 2, 3
0 = Binary
Mode v2.40 or greater. The mode in which the module is operating. 1 = Binary + Overflow 1 Const M
2 = Bit set
3 = Cascade
v2.40 or greater. The value left over after the conversion, can be passed to another module, calculated
as below:
Binary + Overflow
O = TRUNC (G DIV 256)
Overflow -1020 to +1020 0 Output O
BitSet and Cascade modes
O = min (0,TRUNC(G – 8)) : i.e. overflow cannot go negative.
Binary
O = 0.0
Input G Specifies the analogue value to be converted. -1020 to +1020 - Const/Source G
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character except
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 1 (output a). Any ASCII character except
Label ,0-a Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 2 (output b). Any ASCII character except
Label ,1-b Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 3 (output c). Any ASCII character except
Label ,2-c Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 4 (output d). Any ASCII character except
Label ,3-d Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 5 (output e). Any ASCII character except
Label ,4-e Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 6 (output f). Any ASCII character except
Label ,5-f Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 7 (output g). Any ASCII character except
Label ,6-g Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
20-character label for bit 8 (output h). Any ASCII character except
Label ,7-h Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.9.3 IQECO Average Function Modules
The Average function module calculates its output (D) as the average value of two, three, or four inputs (E), (F), (G), and (H).
A2.9.3.1 IQECO Average Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination The output (D) of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 Output D
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
Source E Specifies (E) in the calculation, divisor. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source E
20 20
Source F Specifies (F) in the calculation, input. -10 to +10 0 Const/Source F
20 20
Source G Specifies (G) in the calculation, input. -10 to +10 0 Const/Source G
Source G Specifies (G) in the calculation, input. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source H
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.9.4 IQECO Comparator Function Modules
Module Identifier F
The Comparator Function module calculates its output (D) as 0 or 1 by comparing two inputs (E and F). When (F)>(E), (D)=1, and when (F)=<(E), (D)=0.
A2.9.4.1 IQECO Comparator Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination The output (D) of the module. -1020 to +1020 0 Output D
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
Sequence
The module's position in the sequence table. 0 to 200 0 Const -
Step
Specifies (E), filter factor, in the calculation. It is normally in the range 0 to 1 where 0 gives no filter action,
Source E -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source E
and 1 gives an infinite filter (i.e. no change in output).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Specifies (G), input, in the calculation. If it is not to be used in the calculation, it should be set to a constant
Source G -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source G
value of 1.
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.9.7 IQECO Gate Function Modules
Module Identifier F
The Gate Function module selects its output (D) from one of two values ((E) or (F)) depending on the state of a digital control bit (B). When (B)=1, (D)=(F), and when (B)=0, (D)=(E).
A2.9.7.1 IQECO Gate Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
If the heat exchanger is for cooling the power is calculated using the following formula:
Power = (Air on temperature – Heating medium temperature) * Coil duty * Valve position / 100
The module could therefore be used as follows:
Power kW (D) = (Air On Temp (E) – Water Supply Temp (F)) * Coil Duty kW/degK (G) * Valve Position %(0-100)(H) * 0.01 (constant)(I)
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.9.9 IQECO Hysteresis Band Function Modules
Module Identifier F
The Hysteresis Band Function module sets digital output state (D) to 1 if (G) rises above the value of (E)+(F/2) and then sets (D) to 0 if (G) falls below (E)-(F/2). This enables the state
of a digital node from an analogue input level.
A2.9.9.1 IQECO Hysteresis Band Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
The Total (D) can be reset to '0' by setting the Reset parameter (H) to '1'. If a plot module is logging the module's output, it should be triggered by the same pulse as the modules reset
H. Increases in the output that are smaller than about 1 part in 10 7 may not be shown but will still be accumulated accurately.
A2.9.10.1 IQECO Integrator Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Default Value The value to be used when the 'Reset' parameter is set to '1'. -1020 to +1020 0 Const F
20 20
Destination D The output (D) of the module. -10 to +10 0 Output D
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Enable When set to ‘1’ sets the module’s output ‘D’ to the value of the ‘Source’ parameter ‘S’. 0 or 1 1 Source
30-character user-friendly label for the module.
Label Any ASCII character except \/(){};,: Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
0 or 1
Reset When set to ‘1’ sets the module’s output ‘D’ to the value specified by the ‘Default Value’ parameter. 0= no change 0 Source
1 = Reset
Source The value that is to be processed -1020 to +1020 0 Source
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.9.19 IQECO Square Root Function Modules
Module Identifier F
The Square Root Function module calculates its output (D) as the square root of the input (G) multiplied by a value (E). The module uses the following formula:
(D)=(E)(G)
A2.9.19.1 IQECO Square Root Function Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter that is common to most modules: 'Sequence Step', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. When 'COV mode' is
0 or 1
enabled it is set to TRUE on power up and will remain TRUE until a matching unconfirmed COV
Failed Bit 0 = OK 0 Output F
message is received, after which it becomes FALSE and will remain FALSE forever (or until the
1 = Failed
controller is powered up again).
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. 1020to +1020 0 Output L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1.
Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent to devices on the
Protocol 0 =Trend 0 Const -
Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet network.
1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the
0 to 119 excluding addresses
address of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. For IQECO v2.1 or
Remote Address 2, 3, and 10. 0 disables 0 Const/Source A
greater with 'COV mode' enabled this parameter specifies the address of NTD linked to the BACnet
communications
device sending the COV messages.
The LAN of the of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the
0 to 119 excluding addresses
LAN number of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. For IQECO
Remote Lan 2, 3, and 10. 0 Const/Source N
v2.1 or greater with 'COV mode' enabled this parameter specifies the LAN number of NTD linked to
0 = local LAN.
the BACnet device sending the COV messages.
The analogue parameter the IC Comms message will access. For IQECO v2.1 or greater with 'COV Any analogue module
Remote Module Blank Const R
mode' enabled this parameter specifies the BACnet parameter sending the COV messages. parameter.
IQECO less than v2.1 = 1 to
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated.
Retransmission 1440
For IQECO v2.1 or greater setting this parameter to 9999 causes the module to listen for unconfirmed 5 Const I
Interval IQECO v2.1 or greater = 1 to
COV messages from the specified BACnet device.
1440 and 9999
Time into
Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 Status T
Interval
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.10.2 IQECO Data From Bit IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
IQECO v2.0 or greater.
The Data From Bit ic comms module obtains the value of a bit (remote bit (R)) from another controller, and makes it available as an output (L).
For IQECO controllers with v2.1 firmware or greater when the 'COV mode' parameter is enabled the module can receive unconfirmed COV messages (the unconfirmed COV service)
from another BACnet device. The 'Remote Address' and 'Remote Lan' specify the NTD module linked to the BACnet device sending the COV messages, and the 'Remote Module'
parameter specifies the actual value sending the COV messages. The modules failed bit is set to TRUE on power up and will remain TRUE until a matching unconfirmed COV message
is received, after which it becomes FALSE and will remain FALSE forever (or until the controller is powered up again). This can be used in strategy to gate through some default value
into a strategy until an unconfirmed COV message is received. The following data types are supported from the BACnet source: UINT, BOOL, BINARYPV, ENUM, INT and REAL.
Any numeric value greater than 0.5 equates to TRUE, other values to FALSE.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 Output F
1 = Failed
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. 0 or 1 0 Output L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
0 or 1.
Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent to devices on the
Protocol 0 =Trend 0 Const -
Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet network.
1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the
0 to 119 excluding addresses
address of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. For IQECO v2.1 or
Remote Address 2, 3, and 10. 0 disables 0 Const/Source A
greater with 'COV mode' enabled this parameter specifies the address of NTD linked to the BACnet
communications
device sending the COV messages.
The LAN of the of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must be the
0 to 119 excluding addresses
LAN number of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that contains the required value. For IQECO
Remote Lan 2, 3, and 10. 0 Const/Source N
v2.1 or greater with 'COV mode' enabled this parameter specifies the LAN number of NTD linked to
0 = local LAN.
the BACnet device sending the COV messages.
The bit the IC Comms message will access. For IQECO v2.1 or greater with 'COV mode' enabled this Any analogue module
Remote Module Blank Const R
parameter specifies the BACnet parameter sending the COV messages. parameter.
IQECO less than v2.1 = 1 to
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. For IQECO v2.1 or
Retransmission 1440
greater setting this parameter to 9999 causes the module to listen for unconfirmed COV messages 5 Const I
Interval IQECO v2.1 or greater = 1 to
from the specified BACnet device.
1440 and 9999
Time into
Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 Status T
Interval
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 Output F
1 = Failed
Local Module The value received from the remote controller. 1020to +1020 0 Output L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
0.
Protocol Specifies the protocol used to send the message. 0 Const -
0 =Trend
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10. 0
Remote Address 0 Const/Source A
this must be the address of a NTD. disables communications
The LAN of the device to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and 10.
Remote Lan 0 Const/Source N
selected as a protocol this must be the address of an NTD. 0 = local LAN.
Remote Module The bit the IC Comms message will access. Any digital byte module parameter. Blank Const R
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 Const I
Interval
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 Status T
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Significant The amount the value of the source address can change before a message
0 to 6500 1 Const S
Change is sent. If set to '0' the messages is only sent at the retransmission interval.
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.10.6 IQECO v2.0 Data To IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
IQECO v2.0 or greater.
The IQECO v2.0 Data To ic comms module sends the value specified by the 'Local Module' parameter to a node (remote node (R)) in another IQ controller.
IQECO controllers are limited to a total of 10 data to and global to ic comms modules.
A2.10.6.1 IQECO v2.0 Data To IC Comms Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 Output F
1 = Failed
Local module The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, or digital byte, or digital bit value. 1020to +1020/0 or 1 0 Const/Source L
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent to 0 or 1.
Protocol devices on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the 0 =Trend 0 Const
BACnet network. 1 = BACnet.
The address of the remote controller. If BACnet has been selected as a protocol this must 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Address 0 Const/Source A
be the address of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that the value is to be sent. 10. 0 disables communications
Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been 0 to 119 excluding addresses 2, 3, and
Remote Lan selected as a protocol this must be the LAN of the NTD linked to the BACnet device that 10. 0 Const/Source N
the value is to be sent. 0 = local LAN.
Specifies where the value is to be written. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is
Any analogue, digital byte, or digital
Remote Module selected by a match with the label of the module’s source (L). Blank Const R
bit module parameter.
Note: Label matching is not available if 'Protocol' is set to 'BACnet'.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 Const I
Interval
Significant The amount the value of the source address can change before a message is sent. If set to '0'
0 to 6500 1 Const S
Change the messages is only sent at the retransmission interval.
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 Status T
0 to 16
Write Priority The write priority used to write the value to the BACnet device. 9 Const w
0 sends the request with no priority
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.10.7 IQECO v2.0 Global To IC Comms Modules
Module Identifier N
IQECO v2.0 or greater
The IQECO v2.0 Data To ic comms module sends the value specified by the 'Local Module' parameter to a node (remote node (R)) in another IQ controller.
IQECO controllers are limited to a total of 10 data to and global to ic comms modules.
A2.10.7.1 IQECO v2.0 Global To IC Comms Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 to 7
0=comms disabled
1=identifier
2=F attribute
Attributes The attribute that must match in all devices for them to respond to the message. 3=G attribute 0 Const B
4=H attribute
5=I attribute
6=J attribute
7=K attribute
0 or 1
Failed Bit Indicates whether or the last messages sent by the module was successful. 0 = OK 0 Output F
1 = Failed
Local module The value that is sent. It can be an analogue value, or digital byte, or digital bit value. 1020to +1020/0 or 1 0 Const/Source L
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Module State Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
0 or 1.
Specifies the protocol used to send the message. If set to Trend the message is sent to devices
Protocol 0 =Trend 0 Const
on the Trend network. If set to BACnet the message is sent to devices on the BACnet network.
1 = BACnet.
0 to 119, 128 excluding addresses
Specifies the LAN of the devices to which the message is to be sent. If BACnet has been selected 2, 3, and 10.
Remote Lan 0 Const/Source N
as a protocol this must be the LAN of an NTD. 0 = local LAN.
128 = all LANs
Specifies where the value is to be written. If Label Matching is selected the remote node is
Any analogue, digital byte or
Remote Module selected by a match with the label of the module’s source (L). Blank Const R
digital bit module parameter.
Note: Label matching is not available if 'Protocol' is set to 'BACnet'.
Retransmission
The length of time (in minutes) between a message being sent and then repeated. 1 to 1440 5 Const I
Interval
The amount the value of the source address can change before a message is sent. If set to '0' the
Significant Change 0 to 6500 1 Const S
messages is only sent at the retransmission interval.
Time into Interval Length of time (in minutes) since the start of the retransmission interval. 0 to 3276 0 Status T
0 to 16
Write Priority The write priority used to write the value to the BACnet device. 0 sends the request with no 9 Const w
priority.
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The alarm status of the analogue value connected to the value parameter. Remain sat the default if the value 00000000 to
Alarm Status 00000000 Output S
parameter is set as a constant. 11111111
0 or 1
High The status of the high alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output H
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Low The status of the low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output L
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Outside
The status of the outside limits alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output O
Limits
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Read The status of the Read alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output R
1 = Alarm
Value The value of the analogue node. It can be a constant, or an input from another controller using IC Comms. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source V
20 20
Output The value of the module. -10 to +10 0 Output D
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.2 IQECO Digital Byte Modules
Module Identifier B
IQECO v2.0 or greater.
The Digital Byte module stores a byte of information (8-bits values a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h e.g. 01010100).
A2.11.2.1 IQECO Digital Byte Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bit a The value of bit 0. 0 or 1 0 Output a
Bit b The value of bit 1. 0 or 1 0 Output b
Bit c The value of bit 2. 0 or 1 0 Output c
Bit d The value of bit 3. 0 or 1 0 Output d
Bit e The value of bit 4. 0 or 1 0 Output e
Bit f The value of bit 5. 0 or 1 0 Output f
Bit g The value of bit 6. 0 or 1 0 Output g
Bit h The value of bit 7. 0 or 1 0 Output h
User-friendly label for output bit 0. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 0-a Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 1. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 1-b Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 2. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 2-c Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 3. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 3-d Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 4. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 4-e Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 5. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 5-f Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
User-friendly label for output bit 6. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 6-g Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
User-friendly label for output bit 7. It can be up to 30-characters long. Any ASCII character except
Label, 7-h Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. \/(){};,:
The decimal value of the value. Enables the output value of the module to be easily specified.
State 0 to 255 0 Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only.
The 8-bit digital status of the byte. It can be a constant, or an input from another controller using IC
Value 00000000 to 11111111 00000000 Const S
Comms.
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.3 IQECO External Digital Input Modules
Module Identifier I
The External Digital Input module takes the status from a real digital device such as a pressure switch, connected to a digital input of the controller, checks the value against the required
state, and places its value into a digital node.
A2.11.3.1 IQECO External Digital Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before an
0 to 172800 0 Const/Source d1(D)
(secs) alarm is generated.
Alarm Group IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const d1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Indicates if the alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status d1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The current state of the status alarm of the module. 0 or 1 0 Output d1(S)
(Digin)
0 or 1
Clear Alarm
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies whether the state clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const m1(C)
Enable (State)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (State) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Enables/Disables the state alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source d1(E)
1 = Enabled
Hardware 0 to 7, 101 to 108
The input channel to be used by the input. Channels 101 to 108 are used for IQECOs service PIN. 1 Const c
Channel 0 = Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to other
Starts 0 to 109 0 Output N
modules by linking it to the required modules.
State The output (S) of the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 or 1 0 Output S
Time in Alarm
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds since the alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 Const/Source d1(T)
(secs)
Type Specifies whether the input is an external digital input, or an external digital input. 0 0 Const Y
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.4 IQECO External Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
The External Sensor module takes the reading from a real sensor connected to the analogue input of the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm
levels. The sensor type determines how the scaling is performed. The sensor type is a separate module that defines parameters for a specific type of sensor. An offset is used to allow
the reading to be adjusted to the actual value.
A2.11.4.1 IQECO External Sensor Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be above the
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source h1(D)
(High) high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated.
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be below the
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source l1(D)
(Low) low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated.
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be outside
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source 01(D)
(Out of Limits) the specified limits before an out of limits alarm is generated.
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must read an
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source r1(D)
(Read) invalid reading before an out of limits alarm is generated.
Alarm Group (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies the alarm group to which the High alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const h1(G)
Alarm Group (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies the alarm group to which the Low alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const l1(G)
Alarm Group (Out
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies the alarm group to which the Out of Limits alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const o1(G)
of Limits)
Alarm Group (Read) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies the alarm group to which the Read alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const r1(G)
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Indicates if the High alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status h1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Indicates if the Low alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status l1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Out of
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Indicates if the Out of Limits alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status o1(K)
Limits)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Read) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Indicates if the Read alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status r1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State The status of the 4 alarm outputs. 0000 to 1111 0000 Status M
0 or 1
Alarm State (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The status of the High alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output h1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The status of the Low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output l1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Out of
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The status of the Out of Limits alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output o1(S)
Limits)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Read) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The status of the Read alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output r1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const h1(C)
(High)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const l1(C)
(Low)
0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const o1(C)
(Out of Limits)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const r1(C)
(Read)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Enabled (High) Enables/Disables the High alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source h1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Low) Enables/Disables the Low alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source l1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Out of
Enables/Disables the Out of Limits alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source o1(E)
Limits)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Read) Enables/Disables the Read alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source r1(E)
1 = Enabled
High Alarm Level The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source H
0 to 7
Hardware Channel The input channel to be used by the sensor. 0 Const c
0=Disabled
0 to 9, A, B, C, D, E,
and, F
0 = controller
A = 10
Hardware Module IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The I/O module to which the sensor is connected. B = 11 0 Const i
C = 12
D = 13
E = 14
F = 15
Low Alarm Level The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Input L
20 20
Offset The amount by which the sensor reading is to be increased, or decreased to make it accurate. -10 to +10 0 Const/Source O
Sequence Step The module's position in the sequence table. 0 to 200 0 Const -
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Time in Alarm
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status h1(T)
(secs) (High)
Time in Alarm
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status l1(T)
(secs) (Low)
Time in Alarm
(secs) (Out of The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status o1(T)
Limits)
Time in Alarm
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status r1(T)
(secs) (Read)
The sensor type module used by the sensor to convert the signal into engineering units. Sensor type modules
store information about certain types of sensor. Ensure that the sensor type module chosen correctly v1 = 0 to 10
Type specifies the sensor that is being used. v2.0 or greater = 0 to 1 Const Y
For IQECO controllers v2.0 or greater 1 to 99 are user configurable sensor. 101 to 111 are fixed sensor 111
type modules 100 is unused.
Any ASCII
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor’s value. character except ( { ; Blank Const %
,:
Value The output of the sensor. -1020 to +1020 0 Output V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.5 IQECO Internal Sensor Modules
Module Identifier S
The Internal Sensor module allows an analogue node to be monitored. It takes the reading from within the controller, scales it into engineering units, and checks the value against alarm
levels. Internal sensors have an exponent, and source instead of sensor type, and offset. The source defines the analogue node from which the sensor takes its value. The exponent
determines the number of decimal places before the decimal point. An offset is used to allow the reading to be adjusted.
A2.11.5.1 IQECO Internal Sensor Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be above the
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source h1(D)
(High) high alarm limit before a sensor high alarm is generated.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater. The length of time in seconds that the sensor reading must be below the
0 to 178200 0 Const/Source l1(D)
(Low) low alarm limit before a sensor low alarm is generated.
Alarm Group (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies the alarm group to which the High alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const h1(G)
Alarm Group (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies the alarm group to which the Low alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const l1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Indicates if the High alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status h1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Indicates if the Low alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status l1(K)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Alarm State (High) IQECO v2.0 or greater. The status of the High alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output h1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Alarm State (Low) IQECO v2.0 or greater. The status of the Low alarm. 0 = No alarm 0 Output l1(S)
1 = Alarm
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const h1(C)
(High)
0=Disabled
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the read clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const l1(C)
(Low)
0=Disabled
Additional information about the sensor. Any ASCII character
Details Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. except \/(){};,:
0 or 1
Enabled (High) Enables/Disables the High alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source h1(E)
1 = Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (Low) Enables/Disables the Low alarm. 0 = Disabled 0 Const/Source l1(E)
1 = Enabled
High Alarm Level The value above which a sensor high alarm will be generated. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source H
20 20
Low Alarm Level The value below which a sensor low alarm will be generated. -10 to +10 0 Const/Input L
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Offset The amount by which the sensor reading is to be increased, or decreased to make it accurate. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source O
Sequence Step The module's position in the sequence table. 0 to 200 0 Const -
Source The value of the input channel. If the input channel is set to 0 this becomes a constant. 0 to 10000 0 Const/Source S
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status h1(T)
(High)
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the alarm state commenced. 0 to +1020 0 Status l1(T)
(Low)
Any ASCII character
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the sensor’s value. Blank Const %
except ( { ; , :
Value The output (V) of the sensor. -1020 to +1020 0 Output V
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.6 IQECO Internal Digital Input Modules
Module Identifier I
The Internal Digital Input module takes the status of a digital value in the controller, checks the value against the required state, and places its value into a digital node.
A2.11.6.1 IQECO Internal Digital Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: 'Label', - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The length of time in seconds that the value must be in the wrong state before an alarm is
Alarm Delay (secs) 0 to 172800 0 Const/Source d1(D)
generated.
Alarm Group IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies the alarm group module to which the status alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const d1(G)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent IQECO v2.0 or greater. Indicates if the alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status d1(K)
1 = Sent
Alarm State (Digin) IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current state of the status alarm of the module. 0 or 1 0 Output d1(S)
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the state clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const m1(C)
(State)
0=Disabled
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
0 =
Enabled (State) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Enables/Disables the state alarm. 0 Const/Source d1(E)
Disabled
1 = Enabled
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The length of time (in hours) the input has been ON. It can be used to provide an input to
Hours Run 0 to 87840 0 Output H
other modules by linking it to the required modules.
IQECO v2.0 or greater. The current number of times the driver has started. It can be used to provide an input to
Starts 0 to 109 0 Output N
other modules by linking it to the required modules.
State The module's output state. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules. 0 or 1 0 Output S
Source The status of the input to the digital input module. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source I
Time in Alarm (secs) IQECO v2.0 or greater controllers. The length of time in seconds since the alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 Const/Source d1(T)
0 or 1
Type Specifies whether the input is an external digital input, or an external digital input. 0 = External 1 Const Y
1 = Internal
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.7 IQECO Knob Modules
Module Identifier K
The Knob module enables an analogue value to be changed. It has user-defined limits between which its value can be adjusted. Use of the knob can be restricted by using the PIN level
to prevent unauthorised adjustments.
A2.11.7.1 IQECO Knob Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: 'Label', and Sequence Step (IQECO v2.0 or greater) - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Bottom
The minimum value of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source B
Range
0 or 1
Clip to Specifies whether the knob's output is set to the bottom range value or upper range value when the 0 = adjustment not
0 Const L
Limits knob is adjusted outside these limits, or the adjustment is not allowed. allowed.
1 = adjustment allowed
Destination The output (D) of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 Output D
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Additional information about the sensor. Any ASCII character
Details Blank Const -
Note: This parameter does not exist in the controller it is for use in IQSET only. except \/(){};,:
PIN Level The PIN level required before the knob can be adjusted. 0 to 99 0 Const P
20 20
Top Range The maximum value of the knob. -10 to +10 0 Const/Source T
Any ASCII character
Units 4-character string that specifies the engineering units of the knob's value. Blank Const %
except ( { ; , :
v2 or greater
Value The value of the knob. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source V
v1 Const
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.11.8 IQECO Switch Modules
Module Identifier W
The Switch module enables a digital value to be changed.
A2.11.8.1 IQECO Switch Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: 'Label', and Sequence Step (IQECO v2.0 or greater) - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the
following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Inputs (PV The PV in the Wallbus device to which the input of the Interface module is connected. Each input has this
- - N InN
Index) parameter, n determines the input.
Inputs (Refresh Defines the interval at the Interface module writes its value to the PV in the Wallbus device. Each input has 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s,
- N InP
Period) this parameter, n determines the input. 35, 40s, 45s, 50s
Inputs
Defines the amount by which the value of the input must change before the value is written to the PV in the
(Significant - - N InC
Wallbus device. Each input has this parameter, n determines the input.
change)
0 to 30-characters. Any ASCII
Label The name of the interface. - N $
character except \/(){};,: 0
The network module of the network to which the interface is to be connected.
Network For Type 1 (XNC) Interface modules this parameter is only required when interfacing using a serial Valid module number - N n
connection.
0 to 30-characters. Any ASCII
Output Label The label of the output. Each output has this parameter, ‘n’ is input number 1 to 250. null N On$
character except \/(){};,: 0
- full analogue to + full
Output Value The value of the Output. Each output has this parameter, ‘n’ is output number 1 to 250. 0 I OnV
analogue
The time, in seconds, that the value of the output is held for after the last communication from the Wallbus
Outputs (Expiry device. 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 25s, 30s,
- N OnM
time) ‘0’ holds indefinitely. Any other value, nn, will cause the output’s value to be set to ‘FL_INVALID’ nn 35, 40s, 45s, 50s
seconds after the last update is received from the Wallbus device, where nn is the value of this parameter.
Outputs (PV The PV in the Wallbus device to which the output of the Interface module is connected. Each output has this
- - N OnN
Index) parameter, n determines the input.
2
Program Type The type of interface module. 2 N Y
2 = Wallbus
Size of Modules Size of the module including any application file. 1 to 2000 0 N Z
0, 1, 2
0 = Not Present
Status The Status of interface device. 0 N t
1 = Operational
2= Not Communicating
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase
Combination Boolean of
letters indicate the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical Blank Const J
J EeFfGgHh
combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions K, L, and M.
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase
Combination Boolean of
letters indicate the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical Blank Const K
K EeFfGgHh
combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, L, and M.
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase
Combination Boolean of
letters indicate the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical Blank Const L
L EeFfGgHh
combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and M.
Logically combines up to 4 digital values (E), (F), (G), or (H) using AND, and AND NOT functions. uppercase
Combination Boolean of
letters indicate the true state, and lowercase letters indicate the false state (i.e. NOT). The result of this logical Blank Const M
M EeFfGgHh
combination will be OR’ed with the results of the logical functions J, K, and L.
Destination The output (D) of the module. 0 or 1 0 Output D
Input E Specifies (E) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source E
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Input F Specifies (F) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source F
Input G Specifies (G) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source G
Input H Specifies (H) in the logical combination. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source H
Any ASCII
30-character user-friendly label for the module.
Label character except Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller.
\/(){};,:
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.14.2 IQECO Counter Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
IQECO v2.0 greater.
The Counter Logic module provides the facility for counting pulse type signals such as those provided by gas and electricity meters. It has two outputs rate (R) and cumulative count
(M). (M) is the total number of times the input (S) has been set to 1 since the reset input (A) was last set to 1 multiplied by the scaling factor (F). (R) is the change in (M) over the period
(T).
A2.14.2.1 IQECO Counter Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: Sequence Step - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Cumulative The cumulative output (M) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input to other
-1020 to +1020 0 Output M
Output modules by linking it to the required modules.
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
The rate (R) calculated by the module. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by linking
Rate -1020 to +1020 0 Output R
it to the required modules.
Reschedule
Defines the time, in seconds, over which the rate is calculated. 0 to 1275 5 Const T
Time
Reset The state of the reset input. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source A
20 20
Scale Factor The value of each input pulse. -10 to +10 1 Const/Source F
Source The value being counted. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source S
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Hours Run The cumulative number of hours run output (O) of the module run calculated by the module (O). It can be
-1020 to +1020 0 Output O
Output used to provide an input to other modules by linking it to the required modules.
Interval The maximum number of hours run before an alarm is generated. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source I
Interval Limit Indicates when the hours run limit is exceeded. It can be used to provide an input to other modules by 0 or 1
0 Output N
Alarm linking it to the required modules. 1 = Interval exceeded.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
0 or 1
Reset Resets the count of hours and alarm condition. 0 Const/Source A
1 = Reset
Source The state of the module whose hours run are being accumulated. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source S
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.14.6 IQECO Latch Logic Modules
Module Identifier G
IQECO v2.30 or greater.
Latch Logic modules allow a digital state to be stored when a trigger input is set. The 'Destination D' parameter (D) is set to the value of the 'Source' parameter when the 'Trigger'
parameter is set to '1'. The 'Destination' parameter will remain at that value until the 'Trigger' parameter is set to '1' again. The 'Destination D' parameter (D) can be set to the value of
the 'Default Value' parameter by setting the 'Reset' parameter to '1'.
The module's status is retained when the IQECO is powered down and when the IQECO restarts it the module will adopt the status at power down.
A2.14.6.1 IQECO Latch Logic Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: Sequence Step - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Default
The value to be used when the 'Reset' parameter is set to '1'. 0 or 1 0 Const D
Value
Destination
The output (D) of the module. 0 or 1 0 Output D
D
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character except
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
0 or 1
When set to '1' sets the module's 'Destination D' parameter to the value specified by the 'Default Value'
Reset 0 = no change 0 Source R
parameter.
1 = Reset
Source The value being processed. 0 or 1 0 Source S
Trigger When set to '1' sets the module's output 'D' to the value of the 'Source' parameter. 0 or 1 0 Source T
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Destination The output (D) of the module. 0 or 1 0 Output D
30-character user-friendly label for the module. Any ASCII character except
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
Minimum
The minimum time in seconds that the output of a timer module is ON. 0 to 32767 0 Const M
On
On Delay The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is ON before the output is turned ON. 0 to 32767 0 Const M
Off Delay The length of time in seconds after the input of a timer is OFF before the output is turned OFF. 0 to 32767 0 Const F
Source The value being timed. 0 or 1 0 Const/Source S
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.15 IQECO Loop Modules
Module Identifier L
Loop modules perform the mathematical calculations that determine, the value of output (D) based on present, and past values of measured variables. The loop module compares the
measured value (P) with the current setpoint. The difference between (P) and the current setpoint is the error. The loop then calculates the value of output (D) to reduce the error. The
choice of setpoint is dependent on the value of the setpoint select parameter (S). If set to 1 the occupied setpoint (O) is used, if set to 0 the unoccupied setpoint (U) is used.
A2.15.1 IQECO Loop Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameter common to most modules: Sequence Step - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Delay (SP IQECO v2.0 or greater. The length of time in seconds that the loop input must be not at the required
0 to 172800 0 Const/Source s1(D)
Deviation) setpoint before a setpoint deviation alarm is generated.
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
Alarm Group (Setpoint
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies which alarm group the Setpoint Dev alarm is sent. 0 to 500 0 Const s1(G)
Deviation)
0 or 1
Alarm Sent (SP
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Indicates if the setpoint deviation alarm has been sent to the alarm group. 0 = Not sent 0 Status s1(K)
Deviation)
1 = Sent
0 or 1
Clear Alarm Enable
IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the setpoint deviation clear alarm is enabled. 1=Enabled 0 Const s1(C)
(SP Deviation)
0=Disabled
Specifies a range above and below the setpoint where the loop output is not changed when the
Deadband 0 to +1020 0 Const B
process variable is in that range. When enabled it filters out minor plant disturbances and noise.
0 or 1
Disable Module Specifies whether the module is enabled, or disabled. 1=Disabled 0 Const/Source ~
0=Enabled
0 or 1
Enabled (SP Deviation) IQECO v2.0 or greater. Specifies whether the setpoint deviation alarm is enabled. 1 = Enabled 0 Source/Const s1(E)
0 = Disabled
The proportional gain of the loop. This defines the way the loop responds to changes in the process
Gain -1020 to +1020 0 Const G
variable. When set to 0 the Loop uses integral only control.
Integral The integral part of the output. 0 to +100 0 Status i
20 20
Integral Time (mins) The time (in minutes) after which the integral term is added to the output. -10 to +10 0 Const I
30-character label for the module. Any ASCII character
Label Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for use in IQSET only, it is not sent to the controller. except \/(){};,:
0 or 1
Manual Select Specifies whether manual level is imposed on the loop. 0 Const/Source A
1 = Manual level
Manual Level The loop’s manual override setpoint. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source L
Occupied Setpoint The loop’s occupied setpoint. Used when setpoint select is set to 1. 20
-10 to +10 20
0 Const/Source O
Output The output of the module. 0 to 100 0 Output D
Process Variable The measured value being controlled. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source P
1 to 600
Reschedule Time The interval in seconds between loop output calculations. 0 Const/Source R
0 = Disabled
Setpoint Deviation The maximum loop error that can be reached before a setpoint deviation alarm is generated. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source V
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0 or 1
0 = Unoccupied
Setpoint Select Specifies whether the loop controls to the occupied or unoccupied setpoint. 0 Const/Source S
Setpoint
1 = Occupied Setpoint
0 or 1
SP Deviation Alarm
The status of the Setpoint Deviation alarm. 1 = Alarm 0 Output s1(S)
State
0 = No Alarm
Time in Alarm (secs)
The length of time in seconds since the SP deviation alarm state started. 0 to +1020 0 Status s1(T)
(SP Deviation)
Unoccupied Setpoint The loop’s unoccupied setpoint. Used when setpoint select is set to '0'. -1020 to +1020 0 Const/Source U
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
0, 1, or 2
IQECO v2.0 or greater only. Specifies whether messages on the MS/TP network require a low-level acknowledgement. When
0 = Unconfirmed
Service Class set to 'Confirmed' the device will require a low-level acknowledgement, when set to 'Unconfirmed' an acknowledgement is 0 Const C
1= Unused
not required.
2 = Confirmed
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.16.3 IQECO Type 14 (Wallbus) Network Modules
Module Identifier n
IQECO v2.30 or greater
They store the parameters specific to the Wallbus network.
A2.16.3.1 IQECO Type 14 (Wallbus) Module Parameters
The modules include the following parameters common to most modules: 'Label' - see Common IQECO Module Parameters, plus the following:
Text
Parameter Description Range Default Type
Comms
The MAC address in hex of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with.
MAC Address Valid MAC in hex address - Const a
Note: This parameter is for information only in IQSET it is not sent to the controller.
Any ASCII character except
Model Name Read only. The model name of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with. - Const m
\/(){};,:
A user-friendly label for the NTD. Any ASCII character except
Name Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for information only in IQSET it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
Network
The network number of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with. 0 to 65534 0 Const n
Number
0 or 1
Type Indicates the type of NTD. 0 = Not used 1 Const Y
1 = BACnet
The UDP port of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with.
UDP Port - - Const -
Note: This parameter is for information only in IQSET it is not sent to the controller.
The name of the manufacturer of the BACnet device the NTD is to communicate with. Any ASCII character except
Vendor Name - Const v
Note: This parameter is for information only in IQSET it is not sent to the controller. \/(){};,:
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
Module
Name in IQSET Description
Number
10kTherm DegC This is for the value output of the Trend TB thermistor sensor (10 kohm at 25 °C) with a scaling range of 2.5 °C to 60 °C. It has a conversion
101
TBTS accuracy of ±0.25 °C over the range 10 to 30 °C. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are -5 and 50 respectively.
Knob TB 0.5deg This is for the knob output of a standard Trend TBTS/K thermistor sensor (1 kohm to 11 kohm. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits
102
trim alarm are -0.6 and 0.6 respectively.
This is for fan output of the Trend TBTS/KEF thermistor sensor. The input resistance is set to one of five values and the sensor scaling produces
103 Fan TBTS/KEF 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Off, Lo, Med, Hi, and Auto settings respectively. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alar m are 4.5 and 0
respectively.
104 Current 4-20ma This scales the 4 to 20 mA input signal to the value 2 to 10. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are 2 and 10 respectively.
105 Volts 0-10V This scales the 0 to 10 V input signal to the value 0 to 10. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are 0 and 10 respectively.
Onboard DP
106 Differential pressure sensor input calibrated to give 0 to 2 inwc. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are x and y respectively.
1.5inwc
107 Onboard DP 375Pa Differential pressure sensor input calibrated to give 0 to 500 Pa. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are x and y respectively.
10k Therm DegF This scaling type is for standard Trend thermistor sensor (10 kohm at 77 °F) with a scaling range of 36.5 °F to 140 °F. It has a conversion accuracy
108
TBTS of ±0.45 °F over the range 10 to 30 °C. The Lower and Upper limits for the Out of Limits alarm are x and y respectively.
10k Therm DegC
109 This is the same as module 101 with out of limits set to 104 and -29.
OAT
10k Therm DegF
110 This is the same as 108 with out of limits set to 220 and -20.
OAT
v2.0 or greater IQECO controllers. This is for fan output of the Trend TBTS/KOF thermistor sensor. The input resistance is set to one of five
111 Fan TBTS KOF values and the sensor scaling produces 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Off, Lo, Med, Hi, and Auto settings respectively. The Lower and Upper limits for the
Out of Limits alarm are 4.5 and 0 respectively.
v2.0 or greater IQECO controllers. This is inputs from a wall mounted display. It does not change the input value. The value is passed unchanged
112 WMD Prescaled
into the strategy.,
Note: For v1.0 IQECO v1.0 controllers the modules numbers 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, and 110 are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10.
For more details of the module see the IQECO Configuration Reference Manual (TE201089).
A2.19.2 IQECO Configurable Sensor Type Modules
Module Identifier Y
IQECO v2.0 controllers or greater.
Programmable Sensor Type modules enable sensor scaling to be set up to suite the specific application.
A2.19.2.1 IQECO Configurable Sensor Type Module Parameters
Parameter Description Range Default Type Text Comms
I<n>
Inputs 1 to The input points specify the actual value of the electrical input signal from the sensor, or the analogue input value from
-1020 to +1020 0 Const Where <n> =
20 the lookup function module.
input number
0 to 4
0 = Volts (V)
The type of input signal. It should be set to match the hardware-input channel connected to the sensor. If the input is from
1 = Thermistor
a lookup function module, it should be set to Internal Analogue Value. Thermistor input channels may use either
Volts (V)
Input Type Thermistor Volts or Thermistor (KOhms). Normally the sensor characteristics will be given in kilohms so Thermistor 0 Const -
2 = Current (mA)
(KOhms) should be used. However, Thermistor Volts enables a sensor’s characteristics to be produced by measuring
3 = Thermistor
voltage values at the input terminals and entering them in the thermistor volts table.
Ohms (Kohm)
4 = Analogue
Any ASCII
A 30-character reference for the sensor.
Label character except Blank Const -
Note: This parameter is for IQSET use only it is not written to the controller.
\/(){};,:
Specifies the lowest rated value of the sensor (the out of limits alarm lower limit). Not used if the module is used for
Lower Limit -1020 to +1020 0 Const L
lookup function module.
Number The sensor type module. 1 to 99 1 Const -
Number of
The number of points used in the conversion table. 2 to 20 Blank Const P
Points
O<n>
The output points specify the value of the output for the corresponding input point, or the analogue input value from the
Outputs 1 to Where <n> =
lookup function module. Up to twenty can be defined. -1020 to +1020 0 Const
20 output
Note: An output point must be defined for each input point.
number
Part The part number for the sensor.
- - Const -
Number Note: This parameter is for IQSET use only it is not written to the controller.
Shortcut Description
CTRL+A Select all
CTRL+ALT+I Create LDF
CTRL+C Copy
CTRL+F Displays the current strategy page full screen.
CTRL+L Displays the System View
CTRL+M Select the Command Line toolbar
CTRL+N Navigate window
CTRL+O Display version info
CTRL+T Display the Tracker Window
CTRL+U Deselect all
CTRL+V Paste
CTRL+X Cut
ESC Cancel edit
F1 Help
F3 Zoom
F4 Zoom to 100%
F5 Display top left
F6 Display top right
F7 Display bottom left
F8 Display bottom right
INDEX